Accutray At30

Circuit Imaging System
Models AT30, ATH30, ATH32
Service Manual
For Software v3.01 and above Version 8.28.12 Part Number 94SM54
Fabrication Concept Corp. 1800 East Saint Andrew Pl. Santa Ana, CA 92705 www.fabcon.com 714 881-2000
To insure proper operation and full value from your printer, please read this instruction manual and the warranty carefully. This Operation Manual
must be read and understood by all operators, supervisors and maintenance personnel. It must be stored with the unit for reference at any time. All
new operators and personnel should be trained and be made familiar with its safe use. 2012 Copyright Fabcon
AccuTray Service Manual version:7/10/12 page 2
Family of Products
Table of Contents
1. Safety ---------------------------------------- 8 - 10 4.10 Verify the Temperature Setting
1.1 Declaration of Conformity 4.11 Closed Loop System Troubleshooting.
1.2 Explanation
1.3 General 5. Integrator Functions and Features - 31 - 39
1.4 Electrical 5.1 Integrator
1.5 Operating Safely 5.2 Feature Quick Reference
1.6 The Nature of Light 5.3 Operator Control Panel
1.7 Spectramatch Lamps 5.4 Table Showing the 12 Calibration Positions
1.8 Maintenance and Service 5.5 Calibration Procedures
1.9 Environmental 5.6 Changing the Calibration Number
5.7 Matching Exposure Surfaces
2. Product Overview ------------------------11 - 17 5.8 Splitting Steps
2.1 General 5.9 Matching with a meter
2.2 Registration
2.3 Theory of Operation 6. Integrator Program Set Up ----------- 38 - 53
2.4 Applications 6.1 To Enter the Select Mode
2.5 Targets 6.2 Lock Level Feature
2.6 Panel Registration Tooling 6.3 Lock Level Description and Operation
2.7 Quality Control Tool 6.4 Setting or Changing your Lock Code feature
2.8 Maintenance 6.5 To Clear Lamp Statistics
2.9 Shimming 6.6 To Clear Memory and Exposure Statistics
2.10 Statistical registration option 6.7 Two Value Exposure Modes
2.11 Features 6.8 Split Exposure Mode
2.12 Hybrid Collimation 6.9 Single Surface Mode
6.10 Board Count Display Mode
3. Specifications ----------------------------- 18 - 22 6.11 Frame Control Interface Mode
3.1 AT30 / ATH30 6.12 Set Default Vacuum Delay
3.2 Crated Dimensions 6.13 Tray Mode
3.3 Shipping Weight 6.14 High Temperature Alarm Point
3.4 Actual Dimensions 6.15 Set Point Temperature
3.5 Effective Exposure Frame Area 6.16 Hysteresis Setting
3.6 Applications 6.17 Type Mode
3.7 Exposure Light Source 6.18 Exposure Statistics (Elapsed Hours)
3.8 Capability 6.19 Exposure Statistics (Total Exposures)
3.9 Registration System 6.20 Selecting a Memory Location
3.10 Glass Tooling 6.21 Quick Keypad
3.11 Temperature Control 6.22 Entering an Exposure Time
3.12 General Points 6.23 Setting the Light Intensity
3.13 Utilities 6.24 Blank frame cycle
3.14 Typical Room Requirements 7. Operating the AccuTray --------------- 54 - 84
3.15 CCD Alignment Targets - Outer Layer Version 7.1 User Interface
3.16 Standard AccuTray Glass 7.2 Operational Overview
7.3 Scrolling Messages
4. Installation -------------------------------- 23 - 30 7.4 Power Up Sequence
4.1 Removing the AT30 printer from its pallet 7.5 Password Protection
4.2 Remove packaging materials 7.6 Operator and Supervisor Access
4.3 Installing top lamp head (AT30 ONLY) 7.7 Setting Up Passwords
4.4 Work light Adjustment 7.8 Adding Operators
4.5 Connecting Power to Printer 7.9 Deleting Operators
4.6 Electrical Connections 7.10 Changing Passwords
4.7 Cooling Requirements 7.11 Logging On to the System
4.8 Connecting the Chiller 7.12 Initializing the AccuTray
4.9 Filling and Bleeding the Closed Loop System 7.13 Selecting Jobs
7.14 Loading Films and Panels 10.3 Input/Output
7.14.a Film only retry for double-sided soldermask
7.15 Glass Cleaning 11. Eurosys -------------------------------------109 – 114
7.16 Changing PD -Tolerance or Tolerance during a job. 11.1 Camera Test Procedure
7.17 Alignment Results 11.2 Single Camera Test Using PCom
7.18 Film Deviation Results
7.19 Process Deviation and Alignment Results
7.20 Maintenance Screen 12. Camera Calibration ----------------------115 - 124
7.21 Lo Level Maintenance 12.1 Camera Adjust Mode
7.22 Activating The Motors Manually 12.2 Camera Rotation F5
7.23 Input/Output 12.3 Removing and Adjusting Camera Position
7.24 Remote Services 12.4 Pixel F6
7.25 Preferences 12.5 Adjusting Focus F7
7.26 Init Machine 12.6 Perpendicular Adjustment F8. F9, and F10
7.27 Exit
7.28 Help 13. Driver Test For Single DC Driver ----125 – 128
7.29 Explain 13.1 Using PCom
7.30 Settings 13.2 AT Motor Current Measurement
7.30.a Setting
7.30.b Setup 14. Glass Replacement Procedure ---------129 – 137
7.30.c About 14.1 Upper Glass Installation
7.31 Adjust Camera On 14.2 Lower Glass Installation
7.32 Drivers 14.3 Tray Removal Procedure
7.33 Password
7.34 Cameras Out 15. AccuTray Diagnostics -------------------138 - 148
7.35 Error Log 15.1 Ors98 Warning Messages
7.36 Camera Settings 15.2 Error Messages
7.37 Camera Settings - Device Control Screen 15.3 Error Logging
7.38 Camera Settings - Illumination Screen 15.4 Error Log
7.39 Camera Settings - Device Save/Restore Setting Screen 15.5 AT30 Data Analysis Program
7.40 Store Camera Settings 15.6 Highlights
15.7 Operation Instructions
8. Jobs ---------------------------------------- 86 - 100 15.8 Extracted Data File Sample
8.1 Creating Jobs 15.9 Troubleshooting
8.2 Job Screen 15.10.Saving Images That the Processor Failed.
8.3 Job Parameters 15.11 Help Videos
8.4 X and Y Coordinates 15.12 Changes to the ORS98.ini file
8.5 Use Top Film Vacuum For Single Sided Alignment.
8.6 Setting up a job 16. AT30 Integrator Diagnostics -----------149 - 154
8.7 Targets 16.1 Input/Output Diagnostics
8.8 Selecting a job and adding a work order number 16.2 Output Functions Check
8.9 Archiving Jobs 16.3 Functions Table
8.10 PD and PDSL tolerance Instructions 16.4 Input Switch Check
8.11 The Result Screens 16.5 Switch Test
8.12 Changing PD -Tolerance or Tolerance during a job. 16.6 Typical values that when all switches are good.
16.7 Error Handling System
9. Absolute Measure Option -----------101 - 105 16.8 Typical values when a fault occurs.
9.1 Absolute Measure
9.2 Absolute Measure Theory of Operation
9.3 Glass Targets Screen 17. Lamp Changing Instructions ----------155 - 156
9.4 Setting Up Artwork for Absolute Measuring 17.1 Lamp Changing Instructions
9.5 Measuring the Artworks
9.6 Results Screen
18. Assembly Diagrams ----------------------157 - 180
18.1 AT30 Main Frame
10. Low Level Maintenance ---------------106 – 108 18.2 AT30 Lower Frame View A
10.1 Low Level Maintenance 18.3 AT30 Lower Frame View B
10.2 Activating Motors Manually 18.4 AT30 Outer Frame
18.5 AT30 Top Frame 22.1 Path of Power To PC Board
18.6 AT30 Hinge Frame Right 22.2 Interlock System
18.7 AT30 Hinge Frame Left 22.3 Lamp Voltage
18.8 AT32 Main Frame 22.4 Lamp Power Path
18.9 AT32 Lower Frame View A 22.5 Trigger Board
18.10 AT32 Lower Frame View B 22.6 Capacitors And Level Switches
18.11 AT32 Outer Frame 22.7 AL54, 54-480, 64, 84, 84-480, 94 Capacitor Assembly
18.12 AT32 Top Frame 22.8 Opening The Lamp Head
18.13 AT32 Hinge Frame Right 22.9 Shutter
18.14 AT32 Hinge Frame Left 22.10 Shutter Switch
18.15 AT30/32 Air Distribution Block 22.11 Shutter Brake
18.16 AT30/32 Hinge Bar Floating 22.12 Shutter Motor
18.17 Linear Rail Assy. Right 62D6650 22.13 Installing the Motor
18.18 Linear Rail Assy. Left 62D6651 22.14 Shutter Removal
18.19 AT30 Pin Bar Assembly 22.15 LT1 Shutter Assembly Drawing
18.20 AT32 Pin Bar Assembly 22.16 ATH Lamp Head
18.21 AT30 Hinge Bar Assembly 22.17 LT-8 Lamp Head
18.22 AT32 Hinge Bar Assembly 22.18 LT-8 Shutter Assembly Drawing
18.23 Motor Block Assembly X 22.19 Idle Settings
18.24 Motor Block Assembly Y 22.20 Lamp Head Blowers
18.25 Motor Block Assembly Y 22.21 Lamp Head Signals
18.26 AT32 Camera Arm Left 22.22 Light Function States.
18.27 AT32 Camera Arm Right 22.23 PCB layout
18.28 Motor Block Camera XL 22.24 Signal Description
18.29 Motor Block Camera XR 22.25 LED’s
18.30 Motor Block Camera YL 22.26 Circuit Diagram for 407 – 60Hz
18.31 Motor Block Camera YR 22.27 Lamp Head For All Lights
22.28 AL54 Power Supply 60Hz
19. Nose Section---------------------------- 181 - 186 22.29 AL54-480 Power Supply 60Hz
19.1 Removing The Nose 22.30 AL64 Power Supply 50Hz
19.2 Replacing the Display and Keypad boards 22.31 AL84 Power Supply 60Hz
19.3 Replacing the Emergency Button 22.32 AL84-480 Power Supply 60Hz
19.4 Replacing the Stop and Go Buttons 22.33 AL94 Power Supply 50Hz
19.5 Replacing the Gauge 22.34 Interconnect Cable
19.6 Nose Section Auto-former 22.35 Printed Light Checklist
19.7 Work Light 22.36 No Strike Fault Tree
19.8 Nose Fans 22.37 Shutter Rotation Fault Tree.
19.9 Cleaning and Replacing the Nose Filters
19.10 Nose Assembly Drawings. 23. Vacuum System ----------------------- 236 - 243
23.1 Vacuum Pump Description
20. Center/Drive Assembly------------ 187 - 194 23.2 Pump Construction
20.1 Frame Transport System 23.3 Flushing The Pump
20.2 Frame Drive Motor Replacement 23.4 Pump Disassembly
20.3 Frame Drive Clutch Adjustment 23.5 Pump Checkout
20.4 Frame Speed Adjustment 23.6 Pump Replacement
20.5 Adjust the FAST Pot On The Control Box 23.7 Tubing/Fitting Replacement
20.6 Center/Drive Assembly Drawings 23.8 Combined Vacuum Layout
20.7 Upper Light Block Assembly Drawing 23.9 Compressed Air Layout
20.8 Lower Light Block Assembly Drawing 23.10 Pneumatic Layout
20.9 AT32 Light Block Guide 23.11 AT30 E-Vacuum Assembly
23.12 ATH30 and ATH32 E-Vacuum Layout
21. ATH32 System --------------------- 195 - 198
21.1 System Assembly Drawing. 24. Cooling System ----------------------- 243 - 252
21.2 Over Head Light Fixture 24.1 Cooling System Requirements
21.3 Hepa Filter 24.2 Connecting The Chiller.
24.3 Filling and Bleeding The Closed Loop System
22. Light Source -------------------------- 199 - 242 24.4 Verifying the Temperature Settings
24.5 Connecting Power and Verifying the Evaporator 26. Bill Of Materials --------------------- 259 – 302
24.6 Closed Loop System Troubleshooting 26.1 ATH32 Bill Of Materail
24.7 Closed Loop Assembly Drawing 27. Preventive Maintenance ------------ 303 - 305
24.8 AT30 Closed Loop Drawing 27.1 Preventive Maintenance Daily
24.9 ATH32 Closed Loop Drawing 27.2 Preventive Maintenance Monthly
27.3 Preventive Maintenance Semi-Annually
26. Diagrams ------------------------------ 253 - 258 27.4 Optical Cleaning
25.1 Control Box Front View 27.5 Filter Replacement
25.2 60Hz Accutray Wiring Diagram w/sensor 27.6 Vacuum/Pressure Line Replacement
25.3 AccuTray Wiring Diagram
25.4 Tray Wiring Layout 28. Warranty ------------------------------------- 306
25.5 50Hz Filter Wiring Layout – Double 28.1 Limited Warranty
1. Safety
1.1 Declaration of Conformity
The Exposure Station conforms to the Safety Requirements of the EU. Relevant data is inscribed on the ID
Plate near the power cable inlet.
1.2 Explanation
This manual uses the following terms and symbols to indicate important information regarding safety. Should
you have difficulty understanding information preceded by these terms and symbols, please contact your OLEC
representative before proceeding.
= Risk of injury and/or property damage.
= Risk of damage.
Note: = Special information regarding efficient use of the Exposure Station.
1.3 General
This Operation Manual must be read and clearly understood by all operators, supervisors and maintenance
personnel with special attention to safe operation. It must be located near the unit
for ready reference. All new operators and personnel should be trained and be
made familiar with its safe use. The manufacturer and supplier shall not be liable for
any damage arising out of improper or unauthorized use.
Report any malfunction or irregularity in operation to supervisor!
1.4 Electrical
The Exposure Station is connected to the electrical power line. It must be installed in accordance with local
safety codes and kept dry and clean at all times. It is equipped with interlocks and
protective devices to assure operator safety.
Service must be performed by authorized personnel
only!
Never disable or disconnect electrical interlock safety
devices!
1.5 Operating Safety

Power Switching:
By pressing the power button on the Integrator, the High Resolution printer will go into warm-up. When it is
turned off, the unit will go into a cool-down cycle. In the event of momentary power loss or accidental switch
off, the information stored in the integrator memory will be retained. It may be turned on again immediately,
without any damage. However, it will go through the short, forced cool-off cycle before the lamps restrike.
Safety Features:
The exposure units are designed with operator protection in mind. The operator is protected from any direct
light and UV coming from the exposure lamp by the cabinet and light shields. You can remove the side doors or
slide them forward on the unit to access all electrical components, the exposure lamp, power supply, and the
vacuum pumps. The exposure unit side doors have electrical interlock switches, which will suspend operation if
a door is opened while the unit is in operation.
1.6 The Nature of Light

Ultra Violet Rays (UV):
Before operating the high resolution printers, please become familiar with the characteristics of UV exposure
lights. The unit is enclosed in order to remove any exposure to UV. However, never look directly into a UV light
source and avoid overexposures to the direct rays coming from the lamp and reflector.
Electromagnetic Spectrum:
Visible light and Ultra Violet (UV) are electromagnetic waves which exist in a continuous spectrum of energy.
They only differ in wavelengths. Visible energy or light is that part of the spectrum between 700 nanometers
(red) through 400 nanometers (violet). UV energy ranges between 400 nm to 10 nm. For maximum safety the
lights filter wavelengths of UV energy below 320 nm.
Spectramatch Lamps:
The high resolution printers use the unique L1250/L1252/L1261 for the 5kW and L1280/L1281/L1282 for the
8kW metal halide lamps. The additives in the lamps are carefully selected to generate spectral emissions that are
matched for most photo resist materials. The lamps provide the optimum energy for exposure of most films
and resists. In addition, the L 1250/L1280 is also suitable for Diazo materials, sensitive in the 410 nm range as
well as Photopolymer materials most sensitive in the 365 nm area with the L1252/L1261/L1281/L1282. The
energy spectrograph on the next page illustrates the wide coverage of the high resolution printer lamps. This
efficient conversion of electrical energy into effective wavelengths, accounts for the exceptionally short
exposures at great power savings.
1.7 Spectra match Lamps
Relative Intensity L1250 Relative Intensity L1261, L1281
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
340 360 380 400 420 440 340 360 380 400 420 440
Wavelength in nano-meters Wavelength in nano-meters
Relative Intensity L1280 Relative Intensity L1252, L1282

100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
340 360 380 400 420 440 340 360 380 400 420 440
Wavelength in nano-meters Wavelength in nano-meters
1.8 Maintenance and Service

It is safe to open the front door to clean the glass from underneath.
When it becomes necessary to replace a lamp or to remove
the transom the power line must be disconnected. Remove

plug from the wall outlet or from the back of the unit!
Only authorized personnel must perform repair service!
Never disable or disconnect electrical interlock safety
devices!
1.9 Environmental
The Exposure Station is manufactured with great care to protect the environment. The lamps are specifically
designed to eliminate emission of Ozone.
Only original OLEC replacement lamps must be used!

2. Product Overview
2.1 General
High tech, state-of-the-art imaging is introduced to the printed circuit industry in the new fine line high
resolution printers for resists, films, screens, and solder masks. The High Resolution printers expose
photopolymer film resists, dry film solder mask, and liquid photoimageables to high ultraviolet light. The printer
has two exposure lamps and two exposure frames, allowing the operator to expose both sides of the panel in
one frame, while loading the other frame.
Separate vacuum pumps for each frame provide rapid vacuum drawdown. Adjusting
valves are provided below the frames for special applications requiring lower vacuum
levels. Separate gauges on the control panel indicate the vacuum pressure for each
frame.
Metal halide lamps concentrate all the effective energy into the precise spectral range
required to obtain the highest resolution and sharpest image. A large dynamic intensity
range is another reason for greatly improved yields. The printer operates at three light
intensity levels:
AT 30-5K / ATH30-5K 1,000 low, 2,500 medium and 5,000 high.
AT 30-8K / ATH30-8K 2,000 low, 5,000 medium and 8,000 high.
The low and medium intensity modes give finer exposure control for resists requiring short exposure times.
The high intensity mode gives rapid, accurate exposure for high productivity. The lamps automatically switch to
the idle intensity mode between exposures to conserve power and extend lamp life.
The computerized design of the lamp reflectors provides the highest resolution and sharpest image.
Exposure times are controlled by a microprocessor controlled integrator and frame mounted
photocell. This system automatically regulates the exposure on each side of each frame to
compensate for differences in lamp-to-frame distance, providing precise and repeatable exposures.
A "seconds" mode on the integrator allows exposures by time. Both shutters open and close
simultaneously in this mode.
Motor-driven frames and switch locations offer unequaled ease of operation.
Water cooled, closed-loop cooling, in combination with long-life, service-free shutters, guarantee
low maintenance cost and long lamp life.
2.2 Registration
FABCON Corporation, with established sales, factory-trained and certified service technicians, and parts
distribution in 25 countries, is considered the largest manufacturer of contact exposure systems in the world.
Through the strength of our separate divisions, Exposure Systems, Imaging, Screen Graphics, Metal Fabrication,
Registration Systems, and Glass Tools, OLEC is capable of providing total production solutions.
Increased circuit density is leading to constantly greater demands for registration, with the industry forced to deal
with the constant build of tolerances.
These include:
· Film dimensional accuracy
· Panel distortion
· Drill positional error
· Environment - Temperature / Humidity
· Operator influence
In conventional registration, there is the added tolerance of the film punch, and the required clearance between
the pins and the film. Some tooling systems radiate this error from a reference point in the corner or the leading
with corner tooling systems.

Made possible through the development of a number of new technologies and miniaturization, OLEC is
intro
registration system designed for use on drawer-type machines. It can be configured with up to 10-axes of
motion. The tray is able to align in a best-fit manner top-to-bottom-film, and panel-to-film. There are three
fundamental applications: through-hole outerlayer registration, non-tooled innerlayer registration and fiducial
registration.
2.3 Theory of Operation

The following mechanical schematic shows the basic
Imagemotor Y1
Upper Image Imagemotor X
Fixedlower Image
Panel
Imagemotor Y2 The upper image is aligned using the three image motors,
Panel motor Y1 Camera2 motor Y
Y1, Y2 and X. This allows for correction of X, Y and angle.
Camera2 motor X
Camera1 & motorsX& Y
Panel motor X The panel is aligned using the panel motors Y1, Y2 and X,
Panel actuator bar Camera2
which drive the panel actuator bar. Through pins to the
Panel motor Y2
panel, this provides X, Y and angle movement of the panel.
Each of the cameras has an X and Y motor to position the cameras to target positions suitable for the panel size
and tooling type. Each of the motors has an
2.4 Applications
and panel formats. This is accomplished with motion control of the upper photo tool master image relative to
the lower image, as well as the capability to align a panel in relationship with the photo tool masters. The ability
to automatically program and recall the camera positions provides versatility in panel formats and applications.
Reflection and transmission illumination provides for versatility in the targets to observe films, through holes
and surface features.
The capabilities are suitable for inner-layer, outer-layer, solder mask, sequential build, and micro via applications.
(a) Non-tooled inner-layer and chemical machining registration

For the exposure of innerlayers that will be punched after etching, the system is capable of providing upper-to-
lower-film alignment. The cameras are directed to a location outside of the panel, to align the upper and lower
phototool master images.
(b) Outer-layer Registration

By looking at the lower and upper artwork through a drilled reference hole in the panel, it is possible for the
system to optimize the alignment of all three surfaces. On starting the alignment cycle, the targets are observed
and the camera positions are optimized. The system will identify the location of the lower film, the upper film
and the panel. With this information the system will move the panel and upper film to optimize the alignment.
(c) Fiducial Registration

In the event that it is desirable to image relative to a previous image, such as soldermask following circuit
patterns, or laser vias, the system utilizes reflective illumination to compare the film position of the feature with
the panel. The panel is then aligned to best match the film.
The image shows a miniature camera with the illuminator enabled.
NEED NEW PICTURE
(d) Combination registration

The system has a provision for registration of top and bottom image relative to an etched fiducial. This is
valuable when the outerlayer front to back registration is well controlled and/or the case where the fiducial
registration is more critical on one surface.
2.5 Targets
several benefits. They contain large sample areas to ensure accuracy even when the target is partially obscured.
Some targets allow for multiple surfaces to be read with a single image.
Front to back registration targets
The lower film has a cross pattern with a round border. The
upper film has a diagonal cross.
Bottom film Top film All

Outerlayer registration targets
The lower film has a cross pattern. The upper

film has a diagonal cross, and the diameter of the
reference hole provides the positional information
for the panel.
Panel Bottom film Top film All
In operation, a job is selected and the camera moves to a pre-programmed target location. Within the movement
range of the camera, the user can choose the location for the tooling holes considering optimized accuracy and
compatibility with current tooling.
2.6 Panel Registration Tooling
target holes, there are two additional holes to secure locate and position the panel. Located on the leading edge
of the panel the standard tooling has a spacing of 381-mm (15"). These locations are also used to position the
films for tray setup.
2.7 Quality Control Tool

werful quality control tool. Registration limits are
programmed into each stored job. This can be used to prevent the exposure of an out-of-tolerance panel. Since
each panel is measured and results recorded, there is the potential for the registration accuracy of each panel to
be used in a statistical manner. SPC data can be generated and control limits programmed. Information collected
and become a strong tool to implement and measure process improvement.

2.8 Maintenance
The
preventive maintenance with the system. Glass can be changed in minutes in the event of a scratch or damage.
In the open position there is access to all of the motors, electronics and pneumatics. Diagnostics built into the
control allow easy verification of the function of all components.
2.9 Shimming
For fine line applications and the exposure of small panels, it may be necessary to provide glass support outside
of the panel. The recommendations for shimming are:
(a) Shim thickness

For critical line spacing, the shims should be 0 to 125µ (5 mil) thicker then the combined thickness of the panel
plus resist.
(b) Location
The shims should be between 12mm (0.5") to 25 mm (1.0") from the panel in regions where there is
unsupported glass.
(c) Air Flow

The shims must provide for air evacuation from the panel. This can be done with open sections when shim
sections are used. In the event that shim frames are used, the surface texture or machined relief channels may
provide for airflow.
2.10 Statistical registration option
to improve outerlayer registration. The Statistical-

patent pending utilizes a cluster of holes to position the panel.
This significantly reduces the contribution of drilling tolerance to
the ultimate position of the panel. Even the best drilling machines
used today may produce a positional inaccuracy of ± 20 microns,
and many companies use drills that could produce greater than ± 50
microns of positional variability. The Statistical-
conventional camera systems that rely on individual holes to position a panel.
The bell curves illustrated show the benefit of statistical register. The left two curves show the relative accuracy
of a system that registers with two holes. The right two bell curves show the relative accuracy of statistical
registration.
An additional benefit of the Statistical-

collected about film, panel, and drilling accuracy, can produce comprehensive process capability data. It is also
possible to identify drilling machine defects without adding costly inspection steps.
2.11 Features
• Fine line imaging • Quick Memory location
• Long lamp life design • Selectable power
• Low operating and maintenance cost • Low installation costs
• Small footprint • Double-sided exposure, 25” x 30”
• Built for high production • User friendly
• Frame cooling during exposure & load • Excellent service and backup
• Microprocessor controlled light integration • Sliding side panels for easy access
• Reliable motor-driven, double drawers • Exposure programming and analysis
• Memory backup, in case of power failure • Components are UL and TUV approved
2.12 Hybrid Collimation

Hybrid Collimating Mirrors ATH30 Power supply cart
Hybrid Light Source Orientation Hybrid Upper Mirror

Hybrid Lower Mirror Hybrid Exposure

3. Specifications
3.1 AT30 (ATH30 add 6” to depth)
72"/1829mm
38"/965mm
35"/889mm
45.5"/1156mm
45"/1143mm
48.5"/1232mm
78"/1981mm
92"/2337mm with C/L
3.2Crated Dimensions
Length Width Height
102" 60" 80"
2590 mm 1524 mm 2032 mm
3.3 Shipping Weight

Crated 2400 lbs. 1089 kg.
Uncrated 1500 lbs. 681 kg.
3.4 Actual Dimensions

Cabinet welded heavy gauge steel construction with access doors on both sides.
Length Width Height
92" 48.5" 72"
2337 mm 1232 mm 1829mm
Note: The AT30 cannot be disassembled to pass through any doorways or hallways.
Please make sure there is adequate room for its passage.
3.5 Effective Exposure Frame Area

Width 30" 762 mm
Depth: 24" 610 mm

3.6 Applications
Inners(Post or Pre etch).
Lead Frame.
Outers
Resist Dry film or liquid etch resist - Inners & Lead-frame
Type Dry film - Outers
3.7 Exposure Light Source

OLEC Point Source Optics.
Type employed
Double-sided exposure.
Soft contact, typically 8 - 12 inches Hg, monitored
Vacuum
and alarmed.
Two 5 or 8 kW lamp units. Selectable low,
Lamp unit medium and high power.
Lamp change time typically 5 minutes per lamp.
Uniformity +/- 10%.
For example approximately 25 mW/cm2 for 8 kW
Intensity
unit. See note 1 below.
0 to 999 units, selectable. Normally calibrate 1
Integrator range
unit = 1 mJ/cm2.
Exposure time 0 to 999 seconds, selectable.
3 OLEC Spectramatch Halide Lamp options
Spectra
available. See OLEC Spectramatch information
Lamp cooling Forced air cooling. Minimum blower voltage
control.
Exposure 24" x 30" (610mm x 762mm).
window
Resolution <= 2 mil line and space. See note 2 below.
Note 1: Intensity depends on factors such as lamp height, lamp type,
reflector type and type of light meter used.
Note 2: Resolution capability depends on resist type, exposure
energy and other process conditions e.g pre-clean,
lamination or coating and developing.
3.8 Capability
Minimum 9" x 16" (229mm x 406mm) [2 PIN
SYSTEM]
Panel size
Maximum 24" x 30" (610mm x 762mm), Outers
and 24" x 29" (610mm x 737mm) Inners.
Inners. Min. .004", Max. .059". (Min. 0.1mm,
Max. 1.5mm).
Panel thickness
Outers. Min. .030", Max. .118". (Min. .762mm,
Max. 3mm)
Note depending on panel size may need to employ
shims.
Dependant upon exposure time, vacuum delay time
Capacity etc. Mechanical cycle 3 second alignment and
4 second tray transport.
Note: Maximum capacity depends upon panel quality, machine parameters selected,
vacuum delay time, exposure time and reflector/lamp age.
3.9 Registration System

Two hole leading edge tooling system. Tooling hole
diameter .118" (3 mm). Pitch between tooling
Panels holes 15" (381 mm). Outers require two 3mm
diamater holes on the panel within camera capture
range.
Two point CCD camera system. Post main vacuum
confirm mode.
X, Yand theta control via pulsed stepper motor
assemblies.
General
Bottom artwork is employed as a reference. Inner
mode frame top (including glass) articulates.
Outer mode frame top articulates along with panel
pin bar.
Inner - using special pair of over-lapping film
alignment targets.
Target definition Outer - using special pair of over-lapping film
alignment targets along with a pair of 3 mm
diameter drilled holes in the panel.
Inner Film +/- .0004" (+/- 10 microns) best fit.
Outer Panel +/- .001" (+/- 25.4 mircons) best fit.
Repeatability
"Best fit" = must also consider all other tolerances
which may affect registration e.g. drill, artwork etc.
3.10 Glass Tooling

Standard tooling is available. Two pin leading
edge configuration. 3 film sizes: 20" x 26", 23" x
26",
General
26" x 30".
6mm thick "Optiwhite" A grade standard. Other
grades available.
Setup time Artwork setup time < 1.5 minutes
3.11 Temperature Control

System Closed loop feedback system.
Accuracy Setpoint +/- 2 C. Note Setpoint is typically 16 C -
25 C depending on customer.
3.12 General Points

Cleanliness N/A
PC based Windows environment. Touch screen
user interface.
Control
AP unit is controlled via OLEC proprietary
system.
No heat loading to exposure room as closed loop
Heat Loading
cooling is employed.
Safety interlocks on all doors and operator E-stop
Safety fitted.
Meets UL, CE and Ontario Hydro approval.
Closed Loop Unit 92.5" x 48.5" x 72" (2350mm x
Footprint
1232mm x 1829mm)
3.13 Utilities
Compressed Air 90 psi @ 12 cfm.
20 gpm @ 50 F (75.7 lpm @ 10 C) or 10 gpm @
Chilled water
45 F (37.9 lpm @ 7.2 C)
200/208, 240, 480 VAC 3 phase @ 60 Hz,
Power
380/415 VAC 3 phase at 50 Hz.
Weight 2400 lbs (1089 kg) crated.
Exhaust None
3.14 Typical Room Requirements
TOP VIEW
36"
Rear
36" 36"
Front TOP VIEW

3.15 CCD Camera Alignment Targets - Outer Layer Version
3.16 Sample AccuTray Glass Tool Layout

4. Installation
4.1 Removing the AT30 printer from its pallet
The printer weighs approximately 1375 lbs (625 kg) to 2000 lbs. (907 kg) unpacked depending upon exact
model. It is recommended, for your safety and to prevent damaging the equipment, that you have an authorized
person or professional riggers unpack the unit and remove it from the shipping pallet. Check clearances and
obstructions along the route to the installation site.
Remove inside packing and strapping material before operating
printer
• Remove the four (4) 1/2" shipping bolts under the pallet that secure the printer to the pallet.
• Remove the lower rear panel of the printer by unscrewing the 5/32" Allen head screws.
• Using a fork lift from the rear of the printer, raise it off the pallet and install the four adjustable
feet from the parts box.
• Position the printer in place and level it, using the four adjustable feet.
• Allow at least 1-1/2" (38 mm) of clearance from the floor to the bottom of the printer to allow for
efficient cooling.
Note: Position the printer so as to leave 36 inches (914 mm) to the nearest wall on both sides
and to the rear.
Note: For the ATH units, DO NOT remove the protective cover from the bottom mirror
before the unit is installed and is ready to be turned on.
Note: DO NOT touch or clean mirror without proper instructions.
4.2 Remove Packaging materials

1. Remove wrapping from printer.
2. Remove boxes from nose piece.
3. Remove the foam blocks and wrapping from the frame handles.
4. Cut Tie-Wraps that attach the upper and lower frame handles.
5. Install the factory compressed air and turn the airflow to the Accutray ON by turning the large black
knob on the flow meter a quarter of a turn. The airflow should be as high as possible without
exceeding 105 Psi.
On/Off Knob
6. Remove shipping material and protective cover from glass surface.
4.3 Install Top Lamp (AT ONLY)

1. On AT30, 32, and AT42 unpack and install the top lamp head
2. Slide the lamp head in place from the right side of the machine.
3. Install the HF1 box and connect the lamp head and the HF1 power.
4. Connect the photo cell.
5. When needed mount the outer reflectors.

Note: ATH type machines will be shipped with both lamp heads installed..
4.4 Work-light Adjustment

The work light must be properly adjusted to ensure sufficient light for the cameras.
1. Loosen (don’t remove) the 4 mounting bolts.

2. Slide the work-light out until it is 32.5” from the top corner of the cabinet.
3. Tighten the mounting bolts to lock the light fixture into place.
32.5”
Loosen 4 Bolts
4. Route the power cable through the hole in the top of the cabinet, and connect to the corresponding
cable inside.
Green/
Blue
Yellow
Brown
4.5 Connecting power to printer

1. Run the main power cord through the strain relief and into the tube on the lower right rear of the
printer and up to the power control box on the left side (see diagram on right).
DETAIL A
Z
DETAIL K
A Power
Cable
2. Connect the main leads to the 4 position or 6 position terminal block and connect the ground lead
to the single ground terminal (see next page for hook up).
3. Reinstall the lower side door.
4. Energize the main power circuit. You should hear the lamp head and power supply cooling fans go
into a cool-down cycle. Ensure that the voltage select switch on the hinged control panel is
switched to the lit LED.
5. Install the lower front and rear black trim pieces over the forklift channels, using a 5/32" Allen
wrench.
4.6 Electrical Connections

3 wires + neutral +
3 phase (Wye) See Figure A 380/415V~ 50 Hz, 24 amp.
ground
3 phase (Delta) See Figure B 3 wires + ground 208/240V~ 60 Hz, 44 amp.
3 phase (Delta) See Figure C 3 wires + ground 480V~ 60 Hz, 18 amp.
We recommend installing a circuit breaker box within easy reach of the operator.
L1 380 / 415V~ L2 380 / 415V~ 50Hz Connection
OLITE Wye: 3 Wires + Neutral + Ground
Power Supply Terminal Block
L1 L2 L3 N
Blowers
Vacuum
Pumps
Figure A Electronics
Drives
Etc.
Earth
Ground
L3
L1 208V~ L2 208/240V~ 60Hz Connection

OLITE DELTA: 3 Wires + Ground
Power Supply #1 Terminal Block
L1 L2 L3 N
208V~
Blowers
Vacuum OLITE
Pumps
Electronics
Power
Drives Supply #1
Etc.
Earth
Figure B Ground
L3
L1 480V~ L2 480V~ 60Hz Connection

OLITE DELTA: 3 Wires + Ground
Power Supply #1 Terminal Block
X1 X2 X3 L1 L2 L3
H1 480V~
X4 H2 OLITE
X3
H3 Power
X2 H4 Supply #2
X1
Blowers
Vacuum Pumps
Electronics
Drives, Etc.
Earth
Ground
Figure C L3
4.7 Cooling Requirements

Minimum pressure and flow rate of the chilled water depends on input temperature. For proper cooling system
selection, contact OLEC.
If water temperature and water flow do not meet the
following specifications the unit will overheat, one or both

lights sources will shut themselves off randomly under heavy
usage and damage to the unit will be the result.
Cooling
24,000 BTU / hr at idle 65,000 BTU / hr at full load
Requirements:
Compressed Air: 90 psi @ 12cfm
26 PSI - 20 GPM @ 50°F 10 PSI - 10 GPM @ 45°F

Water Pressure:
(75.7 LPM @ 10°C) (37.9 LPM @ 7°C)
4.8 Connecting the Chiller

1. Mount the Flow Meter and Temperature Gauge assembly on a wall in the upright position.
The Flow Meter and Temperature Gauge assembly must be mounted
level or the Flow Meter will not function properly.

1. Connect the hose from the chiller outlet to the to the flow meter.
2. Connect another hose from the temperature gauge to the Closed Loop inlet.
3. Connect the hose from the Closed Loop outlet to the chiller inlet.
TO CHILLER FROMCHILLER
OUTGOING INCOMING
WATER VALVE WATER VALVE
BACK OF SYSTEM
CLOSED CLOSED
2
CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
OPEN
BLEED
FLOW TEMPERATURE VALVE
METER GAUGE
TO DRAIN
INLET
OUTLET
4.9 Filling and Bleeding the Closed Loop System
Make sure that all hoses and fittings are tight before proceeding. When
filling and bleeding the closed loop system, it is recommended that the
chiller be bypassed, so as not to deplete the water level in the chiller
reservoir. Once the air is bled out of the system, the chiller should be
activated.
If the Closed Loop System is not filled properly the unit will
overheat, one or both lights sources will shut themselves off randomly
under heavy usage and damage to the unit will be the result.
4.10 Verify the Temperature Setting

Turn the main power on.
Turn the integrator power on.
[tEMP] On the integrator, adjust the temperature setting from 20º Celsius to 12º
Celsius. Doing this will open all three of the closed loop valves.
Verify that all three of the valves are open by checking the LED indicators on the cooling control PCB.
1. Open the incoming water valve. Leave the outgoing water valve closed.
The system will fill with water.
2. Slowly open the bleed valve. Check the flow of the water until it flows evenly from the bleed valve
(no air bubbles).
3. Close the bleed valve.
4. Open the outgoing water valve.
5. Activate the chiller.
TO CHILLER FROMCHILLER
OUTGOING INCOMING
4 1 BACK OF SYSTEM
CLOSED CLOSED
2 3
CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
OPEN
BLEED
METER GAUGE
TO DRAIN
INLET
OUTLET
6. Returning to the integrator, reset the temperature from 12º Celsius to 20º Celsius.
Installation complete.
4.11 Closed Loop System Troubleshooting.

1. Make sure temperature and pressure in the system meets those in the Cooling Requirements
section.
2. Make sure the air in the system is properly bled.
3. Make sure the four blowers in the back of the unit are all spinning.
4. Turn the unit off and wait for the cool down cycle to finish.
5. Remove the upper and lower rear panels.
6. Remove the rear plate and turn the unit on to inspect the blowers.
7. Check the 3 flow solenoids feeding the heat exchangers to make sure they are operating.
8. Turn the unit off and wait for the cool down cycle to finish.
9. Open each side door and unplug the 5 pin din plug in the front of each light source power supply then close
both doors.
10. Remove the bottom rear panel in the back of the unit.
11. When looking at the back of the unit locate the 3 flow solenoids on the left side just at the bottom of the top
rear panel .
12. Pull the solenoid coils off the solenoid valve base. The coils are retained by a spring clip and should pull off
easily. Do not remove the spring clip from coils.
13. Set the temperature of the unit to 100°F (20°C) and turn the unit on. The flow meter should read no flow.
14. Turn the unit off and reconnect one of the coils and turn the unit back on. The flow meter should show
water flowing through the unit. Turn the unit off and disconnect the coil. Repeat for each of the other two
coils.
15. If water does not flow with any of the coils connected, go to the J1 connector on the 64AX501V01 PCB
and measure for 240V~ from pin 6 (white) to pin 3 (black) for valve #1, pin 6 (white) to pin 2 (green) for
valve #2, and pin 6 (white) to pin 1 (red) for valve #3.
5. Integrator Functions and Features

5.1 Integrator
Microprocessor-controlled light integrator with LED display, 40 memories, battery backup, single button
control, lamp statistics and self-diagnostics. The operator control panel is composed of two sections, the display
board and the memory board.
Note: The number of digits in each window.
[39] Memory Window
[u10.0] Vacuum Window
[_34.5] Exposure Window
__________________________________________________________________________
This key is used as the auto-step indicator and for the continuous vacuum feature.
5.2 Feature Quick Reference

The following feature descriptions appear in the exposure window while setting each feature. In order to select
or setup the following features you must first be in the setup mode.
[LocK] Lock Level Feature
[codE] Lock Code Feature
[2UAL] 2 (two) Value Exposure Feature
[SPgt] Motorized Filter Feature
[SSur] Single Surface Exposure Feature
[bcnt] Exposure Count Feature
[FrCl] Frame Control Switch Feature
[AUAC] NOT USED. Must be set OFF

[AStP] NOT USER. Must be set OFF.
[dUAC] Vacuum Delay Feature
[trAY] Frame Speed Feature
[ALMt] High Temperature Alarm Point Feature (Optional Feature)
[tEMP] Set Point Temperature of the Cooling System (Optional Feature)
[HYSt] Hysteresis in the Temperature Control System (Optional Feature)
[tYPE] System Type Setting Feature
5.3 Operator Control Panel
The AT30 heavy duty exposure system has a power key on the integrator.
• Press the key to turn on the unit.

• Press the key again after use, and the system will run through a 2
minute cool down cycle and then turn off all blowers.
STOP Button
• Press the button once. Frame movement will stop.

• Press the button once more, the frame will return, at slow speed, to
the original position and vacuum will turn off.
• Press the button twice to cancel an exposure.
• Holding the button down then pressing the button starts a
blank cycle - no vacuum or exposure.
GO Button
• Press the button once to initiate vacuum drawdown on the exposure

frame.
• Press the button a second time to move the frame into the unit and
start an exposure.
• If frame switch [FrCl] and auto vacuum [AUAC] are turned on, press the
 button once to move the frame into the unit and start an exposure.
• If frame switch [FrCl] and auto vac [AUAC] are turned on, press the 
button once without opening the upper or lower frame will start a blank
frame cycle - no vacuum or exposure.
Note: If a vacuum delay [dUAC] is used, the exposure will not begin
until the vacuum delay time has counted down.
5.4 Table Showing the 12 Calibration Positions
5.5 Calibration Procedures

Note: TheAT30 high resolution printer has been calibrated at the
factory.
Note: The following calibration procedures can be applied to all three
light intensities, if starting calibration from scratch. To adjust
existing calibration set the integrator to 500 mj and make the
exposure. Increase or decrease the calibration number the same
percentage the 500 mj is off.
• Press the key on the integrator to power up the lights, the front
switches, and the printer's computer system.
Note: Allow the printer a 5 minute warm-up period before any
calibration procedures. This will allow for complete and accurate
light level stabilization.
• Press the integrator key to select the desired light level to be
calibrated, always start at Low Intensity.
• In order to prevent possible damage to the high resolution printers

Mylar® while calibrating we recommend you set the no vacuum feature.
• Press the key on the keypad, the Memory and Exposure windows
will dim.
• Press the key three times.
• Press the key once. This will prevent vacuum while calibrating.
The Vacuum window will read [_---].
• The high resolution printer's calibration has been set at the factory.
[Ut] Upper frame top surface
[Ub] Upper frame bottom surface
[Lt] Lower frame top surface
[Lb] Lower frame bottom surface
Note: Preset all 12 calibration factor numbers to 500 units. Place a slim
UV meter facing up on the center of the top frame, below the
Mylar®.
• Enter a 500 unit exposure into the integrator. Be sure the seconds mode
is off.
• Press the button twice. This will send the frame into the unit and
start the exposure.
• After the exposure, retrieve your frame by holding down the  button
and press button. When the frames start to move, release both
buttons.
• Record the resulting mj reading from the meter.
Example: Let's say our 500 unit exposure gave us 600 mj. That
means we got 1.2 mj per unit or a 1.2:1 ratio. The objective is to
get a 1:1 ratio. To get that we would multiply our current
calibration number of 500 by 1.2, 500 x 1.2 = 600.
• Since we are working with the Upper Tray Top Surface or [Ut], we have
to change the preset 500 to 600.
• Change to 600 as described earlier in Calibration Procedures Section.
Remember: The lower the CAL number, the longer the exposure and
the higher the mj reading.
• Now make a 500.0 unit exposure with the UV meter and record the
resulting mj reading. It should be 500 ±3%. Perform this procedure on
the remaining three surfaces.
[_SEL]
5.6 Changing the Calibration Number
• Press the key on the integrator. The Memory window will read [Ut] ,
the Exposure window will show the existing calibration number for the
top surface of the upper frame at the selected intensity.
• Press the key to select frame surface ( [Ut], [Ub], [Lt], [Lb]).
Remember: For top frame calibration use [Ut] and [Ub] and for bottom
frame calibration use [Lb] and [Lt]. Also, the larger the calibration
number the faster that surface will count and the less
accumulated energy will result on the frame.
• Enter the new calibration number on the desired surface by pressing

key to open the program, then use numerical keypad.
Example: To change [Ut] from 500 to 650 simply press
• Press the key to close the program.

• Press the key twice to return to the operating mode.
5.7 Matching Exposure Surfaces

• Do a test exposure in the frame being calibrated to the reference frame.
• Determine the correction necessary to make each surface the same at the
reference surface. If this is done with a step scale the correction is as
follows.
.15 Density Scale .05 Density Scale
Step Correction Step Correction
-2.00 0.50 -2.00 0.79
-1.75 0.55 -1.75 0.82
-1.50 0.60 -1.50 0.84
-1.25 0.65 -1.25 0.87
-1.00 0.71 -1.00 0.89
-0.75 0.77 -0.75 0.92
-0.50 0.84 -0.50 0.94
-0.25 0.92 -0.25 0.97
0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
0.25 1.09 0.25 1.03
0.50 1.19 0.50 1.06
0.75 1.30 0.75 1.09
1.00 1.41 1.00 1.12
1.25 1.54 1.25 1.15
1.50 1.68 1.50 1.19
1.75 1.83 1.75 1.22
2.00 2.00 2.00 1.26
[_SEL] Press on the numerical keypad. The Vacuum window
will read [_SEL]. This places you in select mode.

• Then press the key and the exposure window will show previous
calibration number. There is a separate number for each intensity.
Select the intensity to be adjusted with the key.
• Read the current calibration number and multiply it times the correction.
For example if you double the calibration number, the integrator will
count twice as fast consequently the exposure energy will be cut in half.
[_SEL] Press on the numerical keypad. The Vacuum window
will read [_SEL]. This places you in select mode.
[0163.] Then press the key and the exposure window will show previous
calibration number. (for example [1063.]).

• Press the key, the memory window will dim and you will be able to
enter the new calibration number by pressing the new number into the
key pad.
5.8 Splitting Steps

A densitometer can be used to assist in determining a fractional difference in step scales. When measuring
density, make several measurements to avoid being influenced by pinholes.
Example
Original Reference Second Scale
• Pick a step from the reference with a density greater than .15 and less
than 2.0.
• Find the steps on the second scale that straddle the first. In the example
the reference is .30, step "A" is .24 and step "B" is .40. (Ref. - A) / (B -
A) = .06 / .16 = .375. The example step is .375 steps under the
reference.
5.9 Matching with a meter

If an integrating meter is available that has a photocell that matches the film, it can be used to match the
surfaces. We recommend that the results be verified on film.
• Make a reading on the reference surface and then the surface to be

adjusted.
• Divide the reading on the surface to be adjusted by the reading from the
reference surface.
• Multiply the current calibration number by the result above.
6. Integrator Program Set Up

6.1 To Enter the Select Mode
Note: This step must be followed in several of the program set ups.
• Press the key on the integrator to power up the light, the front remote
switches, and the exposure unit's computer system.
[SEL_] Press in sequence. The Vacuum window will read
[SEL_]. This places you in the select mode.
6.2 Lock Level Feature

The lock levels are provided to keep operators from accessing any features and functions that should be left
alone. There are five different lock levels available. Lock levels 1 - 3 allow the locking of individual memory
locations, while lock levels 0 and 4 apply to all of the memory locations.
• Level 0 - No locks. Most of the features and functions can be accessed

by any operator.
• Level 1 - Locks functions per memory (seconds, exposure, vacuum,
intensity, filter, diffuser) to prevent accidental changes to these settings.
Locks on individual memories may be turned ON and OFF without the
need to enter a code.
• Level 2 & 3 - Locks functions per memory similar to lock level 1, except
once lock is turned ON for a particular memory, it may not be turned
OFF again without entering the lock code. Also locks the parameters on
the set up menu so they cannot be changed without entering the lock
code.
• Level 4 - Locks all functions. A code is required to change any operating
parameters.
Note: You must ensure the lock level is set to 0 before continuing with
the Integrator Program Set Up Features and the exposure
memory options detailed below in Lock Level Description and
Operation. When programming is completed return to Lock
Level Feature and set the desired lock level.

[LocK] Press the key once, the Exposure window will read [LocK].
• Press the key once.

• If the Lock Level is set at 0 or 1 the Memory and Exposure windows
will dim. Enter the lock level desired.
• Press the key to set entry.
• If the Lock Level is set for 2, 3 or 4, the Exposure window will read
[codE]. Enter your 3 digit code.
• Press the key.
• Press the key.
• Press the key.
Note: If you want a higher Lock Level after you have completed the
Integrator Program Set Up and/or made any changes return to
Lock Level Feature and set the lock level described in Lock
Level Description and Operation).
6.3 Lock Level Description and Operation
[0000] Lock Level 0
The Vacuum window will read [0000].
[0001] Lock Level 1
The Vacuum window will read [0001]. Locks functions for seconds, enter, vacuum and intensity per memory.
Once this mode is turned ON and the set up programing has been completed, enter all needed information into
a memory location. Then press the key, the Memory window will read [Ac] and the Exposure window will
read [LocK]. Press the key to turn the lock for this memory ON or OFF, then press the key. When the
lock is turned ON, a decimal point will be displayed after each digit in the Memory window.
[0002] Lock Level 2, 3
The Vacuum window will read [0002] or [0003]. Locks functions for seconds, enter, vacuum and intensity per
memory and Integrator Program Set Up Features. Before this mode is turned ON, enter all needed information
into a memory location. Then press the key, the Memory window will read [Ac], the Vacuum window will
read [_oFF] and the Exposure window will read [LocK]. Press the key to turn the lock ON or OFF for this
memory. When the lock is turned ON a decimal point will be displayed after each digit in the Memory window.
Once this level is turned ON you will not be able to unlock the features described above without the Lock
Code. See Setting or Changing your Lock Code Feature.
[0004] Lock Level 4
The Vacuum window will read [0004]. This locks all functions. When the lock is turned ON, a decimal point
will be displayed after each digit in the Memory window. Once this level is turned ON and the set up
programing has been completed, before you can change any programed features or the exposure statistics you
must use the Lock Code to set the Lock Level back to 0, see Setting or Changing your Lock Code Feature.
6.4 Setting or Changing your Lock Code feature

Note: If you are setting the code you must know the existing code.
Note: Lock Level must be set to 0 to program this step and reset when
finished see Lock Level feature.

• Press the key once. The Memory window will read [Su].
[codE] Press and release the key until the Exposure window reads [codE].
• Press the key the Memory and Exposure windows will dim. Enter
your new 3 digit code
• Press the key to set entry.
• Press the key twice to exit this mode.
6.5 To Clear Lamp Statistics
This step clears all lamp statistics explained in sections Lamp Statistics.
Note: You can abort clearing the lamp statistics by pressing the key
before the display counts down to [SEL_] and you will not change
any memory and exposure statistics.
Note: Lock Level must be set to 0 to program this step and reset when
finished, see Lock Level feature.

• Press the key five (5) times.
• Press the key once to exit this mode.
6.6 To Clear Memory and Exposure Statistics
This step clears all information stored in the memory.
Note: You can abort clearing the memory by pressing the  key
before the display counts down to [SEL_] and you will not change
any memory and exposure statistics.

• Press the key five (5) times.
• Press the key once to exit this mode.
6.7 Two Value Exposure Mode

Note: The two value mode enables the operator to run a different job or
resist on each frame. With this feature turned ON, a value entered
in the Vacuum window becomes an exposure value. For instance,
if you enter 800 in the Vacuum window and 450 in the Exposure
window, during an exposure both surfaces on the upper frame
will receive 800 mj while both surfaces on the lower frame will
receive 450 mj. To activate this option:

[2UAL] Press and release the
window.
key until [2UAL] is displayed in the Exposure
• Press the key to cycle mode ON or OFF.

6.8 Split Exposure Mode

The split exposure mode works in conjunction with the previously mentioned two value mode. It enables the
user to select separate exposure values for the upper and lower surfaces of each frame, in case different
exposures are required for each surface of the panel. An exposure can be entered in the center display which will
be used on the top surface of each frame and a separate exposure value can be entered in the lower display
which will be used on the bottom surface of each frame.
Note: The two value mode MUST be selected ON for the split exposure
mode to function.

[SPgt] Press and release the
window.
key until [SPgt] appears in the Exposure
This places you in the split exposure option.

• Press the key to cycle the split exposure mode ON or OFF.
6.9 Single Surface Mode

The printer may be programmed to use the top light only, the bottom light only, or both lights. For exposing
phototools or single sided exposures, you may want to use only one light. Each of the 40 memories is
independent, to allow for any combination you wish on a particular memory. While programming:

[SSur] Press and release the
window.
key until [SSur] appears in the Exposure
This places you in the single surface mode.

• Press the key to turn the single surface option ON or OFF.
Note: Press the key to activate feature in operating mode so that

the Memory display reads [Ac] and the Exposure display reads
[SUrF]. Press the key to select bottom [bot_], top [toP_] or
both [both]. Now press the key. If you have selected both
lamps, the left memory digit is complete and means upper and
lower lamps are selected. If you have top lamp only, the left
memory digit displays upper segment only and means only the
upper lamp is selected. If the left memory digit displays lower
segment only it means only the lower lamp is selected.
6.10 Board Count Display Mode

The printer will constantly display all the exposure information. With the board count display option turned
ON, the Vacuum window will show a running total of the number of exposures that have taken place. This can
be very useful in verifying that all exposures were made for a particular job.
Note: It is recommended to leave this feature OFF when the two value
or split features are activated. To activate the board count display
option:

[bcnt] Press and release the
window.
key until [bcnt] appears in the Exposure
This places you in the board count option.

• Press the key to cycle the board count ON or OFF.
6.11 Frame Control Interface Mode
The frame control interface works in conjunction with each frame's magnetic switch. If either frame is open,
motorized transport will not function. This prevents inadvertent frame movement with the outer frame open. It
is recommended that this safety feature be turned ON at all times. In the event of a switch failure or a unit
without switches, it can be bypassed.
Note: This safety feature will always be ON unless you turn it OFF. To
deactivate the frame control interface mode:

[FrCL] Press and release the
window.
key until [FrCL] appears in the Exposure
This places you in the frame control interface mode.

• Press the key to cycle the frame control interface mode ON or OFF.
6.12 Set Default Vacuum Delay

Note: This feature is used to provide sufficient vacuum drawdown time
before exposure. The time begins when the frame lid is closed
with the [AUAC] turned ON, or when you press the button for
the first time. If you press the button again before the
vacuum delay counts down, the frame will move into the cabinet,
but the exposure will not start until the time is completed.
Note: This default delay time will be ignored if a delay time other than
0 has been programed into the memory location being displayed.

[dUAC] Press and release the key until the Exposure window reads [dUAC].
• Press the key and enter the time you wish the vacuum turned ON
before the exposure begins. The time you selected has now been
programed for all memories.
6.13 Tray Mode
The default tray speed is set at the factory to 5 seconds. OLEC does not
recommend changing this setting without consulting the

OLEC factory. Damage to the transport can occur.

[trAY] Press the key until [trAY] appears in the Exposure window.
• Press the key once. The Vacuum window will read [----] and the
Exposure window will read [codE]. If lock mode was turned ON, enter
your code now, then press the key, (If the lock code has never been
changed section 4.3, the default code is 000).
• Enter the time you wish to have the tray speed set for. For example, for a
5.0 second travel time, press and then press the key again the
Memory window and Exposure window will return to normal brightness.
6.14 High Temperature Alarm Point

There are three parameters in the setup menu to control the operation of the cooling system.

[ALMt] Press the key until [ALMt] appears in the exposure window. This is
the high temperature alarm point. If the measured temperature exceeds

this setting (in degrees Celsius), the controls will beep and the
[Err_] Vacuum window will read error [Err_] and the Exposure window will
read [0012]. This message must be cleared before any other operation
may be performed.
[0012]
Note: No exposure may be done as long as the temperature remains
above the high temperature alarm point.
The error message will be displayed about every 30 seconds as long as the temperature remains above the alarm
temperature.
6.15 Set Point Temperature
[tEMP] The second parameter is [tEMP].
This determines the set point temperature of the cooling system and is entered in degrees Celsius.
To enter the desired temperature:
[SEL_] Press the keys in sequence. The Vacuum window
will read [SEL_]. This places you in the select mode.

• Press the key once, the Memory window will read [Su].
[tEMP] Press the key until [tEMP] appears in the Exposure window. This
places you in the Set Temperature mode.
[__30] To enter a new temperature setting, press the
temperature (such as 30º Celsius )by pressing the

key and then the desired
keys in
sequence, then press the key again.
To display the actual current temperature:
[032.0] Press the key and the temperature inside the unit will be displayed in
ºCelsius in the vacuum window.
[tMP=]
6.16 Hysteresis Setting
This determines the amount of hysteresis in the temperature control system, or how much the temperature must
change between the point where the cooling system turns on, and the point where the cooling system turns off
again. It also determines how far the temperature must rise above the set point before the cooling system
automatically changes from medium cooling to high cooling.
Note: This is factory set to 2º Celsius in order to keep the cooling

system from cycling on and off too often.

[___2] Press and release the
window.
key until [HYSt] appears in the Exposure
This places you in the set hysteresis option.
[HYSt] To enter a new hysteresis setting, press the key and then the desired
hysteresis (such as 2º) by pressing the  key, then press the key
again.
6.17 Type Mode
The type has been set at the factory and should not be changed. Proper
operation of the unit will be affected if changed.


[tYPE] Press the key until [tYPE] appears in the exposure window. This
places you in the System Type option.

• Press the key once. The Vacuum window will read [----] and the
Exposure window will read [codE]. If lock mode was turned ON, enter
your code now, then press the key, (If the lock code has never been
changed, the default code is 000).
[AP30] Press the key to cycle the Vacuum window to read [AP30]. This
setting applies to both the AP30 5kW and AP30 8kW, air conditioned
and closed loop models.
6.18 Exposure Statistics (Elapsed Hours)

Note: The exposure statistics should be reset to zero when the lamps
are changed.
Note: This provides the operating hours on the lamps in total and at
each intensity since the last reset. This function should be used
whenever the exposure lamps are replaced.
[LE__] Press the key. The letters [LE__] will appear in the Vacuum window.
The Exposure window will display the exposure time, in seconds, of the
last exposure, regardless of its memory position or intensity.
[tot_] Press the key a second time, the letters [tot_] will appear in the
Vacuum window. The total elapsed time, in hours, that the unit has been
ON will be displayed in the Exposure window.
[tCr_] Press the
Vacuum
key a third time. The letters [tCr_] will appear in the
window. The elapsed time, in hours, that the lamp has been used at
medium power will show in the Exposure window.
[tLo_] Press the key a fourth time. The letters [tLo_] will appear in at the
Vacuum window. The elapsed time, in hours, that the lamp has been
used at low power will show in the Exposure window.
[tHi_] Press the
Vacuum
key a fifth time. The letters [tHi_] will appear in the
window. The elapsed time, in hours, that the lamp has been used at high
power will show in the Exposure window.
6.19 Exposure Statistics (Total Exposures)

Note: To find out how many exposures your system has made since the
last reset.
Note: The exposure statistics should be reset when the lamps are
changed.
[EHI_] Press the key. The letters [EHi_] will appear in the Vacuum window.
The Exposure window will display the number of exposures made at high power.
[ELo_] Press the key a second time. The letters [ELo_] will appear in the
Vacuum window. The Exposure window will display the number of

exposures at low power.
[ECr_] Press the key a third time. The letters [ECr_] will appear in the
Vacuum window. The number of exposures at medium power will be

displayed in the Exposure window.
6.20 Selecting a Memory Location
• Press and release the key on the operator control panel to cycle
through the 40 memory locations (0-39).
• You may go to a particular memory by entering the desired memory
number on the numerical keypad on the integrator.
EXAMPLE: Enter a desired memory number, e.g. 12. Press the corresponding keys, then on the
numerical keypad, then press the  key.
6.21 Quick Keypad

Instant access by pressing any of the memory locations from 0 to 9.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6.22 Entering an Exposure Time

Press the key on the integrator.
Note: The Memory and Vacuum windows will dim.
[1825] Enter desired exposure time by depressing corresponding number on key
pad. For example

• Press the key to confirm the entry.
6.23 Setting the Light Intensity
• Press the key to set intensity. Press for the first time. The first
LED on the left indicates the intensity is set to low ( 1kW on 5kW units,
2kW on 8kW units).
• Press: I for the second time. The first two LEDs light to indicate the
intensity is set to medium ( 2kW on 5kW units, 4kW on 8kW units ).
• Press: key for the third time. All three LEDs light to indicate the
intensity is set to high (5kW on 5kW units, 8kW on 8kW units ).
O ptional: Press the key to set for time or integrate mode. The LED ON indicates a
timed exposure and OFF an integrated exposure.
Note: During operation, ensure that the mode is OFF.
6.24 Blank frame cycle

To change frame position with no vacuum or exposure:
Note: If [FrCL] is turned ON and you do not open the frame, press the
button and the frame will move in without vacuum or
exposure.
• Press and hold the button.

• Press the button.
• Release both buttons when the frames start moving

7. Operating the AccuTray

7.1 User Interface
achine with step by step prompts. The supervisor or lead
view the historical

alignment and optimize production by scaling. Setup diagnostic and maintenance functions can be performed
directly from the user display.
7.2 Operational Overview

onventional glass tool. The powerful alignment functions are
performed by the computer. The operator is assisted by the informational display with graphics prompts and
built in instructional videos. Basic operation is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Power-up machine
initialization
Yes
Select Job
from list
Film load
sequence Expose
Insert first panel Swap Panels

No
Automatic Automatic
aligment setup Alignment
Last Panel?
The control system will guide and prompt the operator through the setup of the alignment trays. The scrolling
message at the lower right hand corner of the touchscreen describes the next action to be taken.
7.3 Scrolling Message

The sequence and delays are programmed to ensure simplicity and security. When the program is working, the
pop-up window shows the current status of the program.
7.4 Power Up Sequence

1. Press the POWER button on the integrator control panel. This will apply power to the AT30 and
to the Accutray frames.
2. Press the Power bottom button on the computer located underneath the AT30.
3. Press the “Power” button on the computer touchscreen.
3. Wait for Windows to start up.

4. The “ORS98” program will activate automatically.
Note: If the program needs to be re-started at any point, simply double click on the
icon shown above (from the Windows desktop).
When the start-up sequence is complete, the screen will appear as below.
7.5 Password Protection

There are two kinds of users; operators and supervisors. There are separate passwords for each.
7.6 Operator and Supervisor Access

Operators have access to all functions needed to run the AT30. The operators select their own passwords, but
only the supervisor can change passwords and create new logon names. Supervisors also have access to create
new jobs or edit existing jobs, and to the maintenance mode.
7.7 Setting Up Passwords
upper right side of the screen. Note that most of the buttons on the screen are disabled.
The Log On dialogue box will appear. Click on the arrow

prompt will appear.
You will be asked to enter a password. The default supervisor password is *O LEC17112. Enter the password
and click on OK or press enter.
Note that the buttons that were disabled become active.
7.8 Adding Operators

Note: This function can be performed by the supervisor only. The supervisor password must be
entered to gain access to the Password Maintenance screen.
Press the Maintenance button on the main screen.
 
Press the password button on the Maintenance screen.
Enter the name of the new user, then enter the password for that user.
Re-enter the password for verification, then press the Create button.
The system confirms the creation of the new user. This name will now appear in the list of users displayed at the
7.9 Deleting Operators


Select the user name to be deleted.
Press the delete button.
The system asks you to confirm the deletion. Once the user is deleted, the name will no longer appear in the list
7.10 Changing Passwords


Select the user or supervisor name that requires the password change.
Type the new password in the password box, then re-enter the password for confirma
button.
password will no longer be valid when logging on.
7.11 Logging On to the System

lower right side of the
screen.
The Log On dialogue box will appear.

select your name from the list that is shown.
buttons that were disabled become active.
Note: Initially, the user name will display “operator”. The default password for this is also operator.
This will remain in the user list until the supervisor removes or changes it.
Once the proper password has been entered, the display should look as it does below.
7.12 Initializing the Accutray

Note: Remember to refer to the scrolling message in the lower right hand corner of the
touchscreen.
1. Press the TRAY SETUP or the GO button on the touchscreen, or the GO button on the machines
nose section to initialize the Accutray.
OR
2. The cameras will move to their home position and the axis for the upper frame and the alignment
pins will initialize and move to their home positions. A window displays the initialization
sequence.
3. Once the initialization sequence is complete, the dialogue box will disappear.
7.13 Selecting Jobs

Press the JOBS or GO button on the touchscreen, or the GO button on the AT30 nose section to select a job
and in-put the work order number.
Note: Each job has its own set of parameters that must be assigned when the jobs are created. Refer
to Chapter 8 - “Creating Jobs”.
Select a job from the list on the left side of the touchscreen. You can select a job for the upper tray only, lower
tray only, or both trays.
1. Select the job from the job table on the left of the touchscreen and click on it. It will be highlighted
in blue.
2. Assign the job to the proper tray by pressing the arrow next to the upper or lower tray text box.
3. Assign a Work Order number in the text box.
4. Press Enter. The touchscreen will display the panel thickness verification screen.
1. Verify that the actual panel thickness match the panel thickness for the job/tray for the job selected.
If the Panel Thickness is incorrect, then type the correct thickness (in mm or inch).
2. Press OK and the touchscreen will automatically return to the Main Screen, and the cameras will
move into place. The Job Title and Work Order number assigned will appear in the upper left hand
corner of the display.
You are now ready to load film into the AccuTray.
7.14 Loading Films and Panels

1. Press the GO button on the touchscreen, or on the AT30 nose section to begin the film installation
procedure.
2. The alignment pins on the AccuTray will rise up and be used as the film installation pins.
3. Open the frame.
4. Place the bottom piece of film on the Film installation pins, emulsion side up. Place the top piece
of film on the alignment pins, emulsion side down.
5. Close the frame.
6. Press the Go button on the window, or the GO button on the AT30 to start the film setup
procedure.
7. The main vacuum and film vacuum will turn on at this point.
8. Once vacuum has been successfully achieved, the main vacuum will release and the blow-back
will turn on for a short time. The window prompts you to open the tray.
9. Load a panel onto the alignment pins. Close the frame.
10. Press the Go button on the touchscreen, or the GO button on the AT30 so the AccuTray can
prepare the new job.
11. During the Job Setup the software is checking the alignment targets, making a rough alignment,
checking the target positions, drawing main vacuum, checking the target positions again to learn
how the frame moves from a no vacuum state to a full vacuum stage. This information is used for
the alignment procedure during production.
12. Press the Go button on the touchscreen or the GO button on the AT30 to align the films with the
panel.
7.14.a Film only retry for double-sided solder mask

Note: If, in an attempt to align a double-sided solder mask panel the alignment fails
due to a misalignment between the lower artwork and the panel, an error
message reading “Open tray and release panel from lower artwork” will appear.
The operator must at this point open the tray and release the panel if stuck to the
film(s). When the tray is closed again the alignment will automatically restart. If
the alignment fails due to film to film misalignment, the panel to lower artwork
alignment position will stay the same, but the film to film alignment will be
retried.
13. Once successful alignment has been achieved, press the Go or GO button to move the frame into
the cabinet for exposure.
Note: Pressing the GO button twice at step #11 will automatically send the frame in
once alignment is achieved. This action can be stopped at any time by pressing
the Cancel button on the touchscreen.
14. Repeat the above process on the other frame (if used) at this time.
15. Once the exposure is complete, press the STOP/GO button to send the other frame into the cabinet.
7.15 Glass Cleaning

During a job it is possible to move the cameras outside the image area and have easy access for cleaning of
the bottom glass surface. In the maintenance screen by pressing the “camera out” button the cameras will
move out of the way and allow the operator to clean the bottom glass surface. After the glass is cleaned the
operator can place the next panel in the tray and press the “go” button to align the panel. The cameras will at
this point automatically move back to their desired positions.
7.16 Changing PD -Tolerance or Tolerance during a job.

If a situation arises during production where one panel in a lot is not aligning because it is off by microns,
the Tolerance value needs to be changed. It is no longer necessary to go to the jobs screen to change the PD
Tolerance or the Tolerance during production. To change the tolerance value, press Ctrl+T and a dialog box
will appear. Type in the new PD-Tolerance or Tolerance number in this box. This new number will be used
until the next time the jobs screen is accessed or the software is turned off. The new number is not being
stored permanently with the job.
Note: The Ctrl+T function can only be used in the supervisor mode or on machines
that are not using the supervisor/operator log in feature.
Type the new Tolerance number in the provided space. If the job is created in um the information must be
entered in um. If the job is set up using mils, the change must be entered in mils.
7.17 Alignment Results
The alignment results are displayed in a box located on the lower right side of the screen.
It will display the results calculated from both the left and right cameras.
Example: BF[X6 L-6 R-12] UF[X3 L5 R-4]

X means in the X-axis.
L means left camera Y-axis.
R means right camera Y -axis.
Result numbers can be positive or negative.
Numbers proceeded - -axis and down in the Y -
axis.
The type of job selected determines the information that is shown.
For Double-Sided (Outer Layer) jobs,
BF is the result between the board and bottom film.
UF is the result between the board and the upper film.
For Single-Sided or Single Sided Solder-mask jobs,
BF is the result between the board and bottom film.
For Inner Layer jobs,
F is the result between the top film and bottom film.
7.18 Film Deviation Result
This part of the result is displayed in the upper right side of the main screen if the operator selects to
view the result screen as the machine is aligning.
Camera Q1 = Rear Right camera
Camera Q2 = Rear Left camera
Camera Q3 = Front Left camera
Camera Q4 = Front Right camera
The film deviations are shown in the main result screen.

A = measurement(s) between camera Q1 and Q2
B = Measurement(s) between camera Q1 and Q4
C = Measurement(s) between camera Q3 and Q4
D = Measurement(s) between camera Q2 and Q3
X = Result for the Top film.
+ = Result for bottom film.
Film deviation is the measured deviations between two targets on the panel and the corresponding two
targets on the film.
Example: X (Top film), A (measured between Q1 and Q2) = 12.
The distance between the two targets on the top film is 12um further apart than the two targets on the
panel.
+ (Bottom Film), A (measured between camera Q1 and Q2) = 24.
The distance between the two targets on the bottom film is 24um further apart than the two targets on
the panel.
NOTE: The film deviation is the deviation between panel and film(s). The example above does not
mean that the films are too large it is only an indication that the films are larger than the panel. It does
not verify the actual size of the panel.
7.19 Process Deviation Results
DT = Deviation Tolerance. The maximum allowed size deviation between the film(s) and
panel.
AT = Alignment Tolerance. The maximum allowed miss-alignment from Best Fit alignment.
Note: Best Fit is the calculated best possible alignment considering the size deviation
of film(s) and panel.
The result of each alignment can be viewed on the top part of the main screen. By double clicking the OLEC
area on the main screen and selecting the result button, an image of the last alignment will appear on the top part
of the screen. For all panel alignment process types the results includes the deviation between the panel and the
top film, the deviation between the panel and the bottom film, right and left camera positions relative alignment
in [x, y] coordinate style. For inner-layer the results includes film to film deviation, and relative alignment for
both camera positions. For single sided and single sided solder mask the results includes panel to bottom film
and relative alignment for both camera positions.
7.20 Maintenance Screen

Note: The supervisor password must be entered to gain access to the Maintenance
screen.
7.21 Lo Level Maintenance

Used to activate Camera Motors, Valves, Vacuums, Pins, and Stop/Go buttons manually. This screen
is used to test motors and drivers. It is also used to test functionality of inputs and outputs.
Note: An advanced Lo Level maintenance screen is available. For details see service
manual.
7.22 Activating Motors Manually

The 10 motors in each AccuTray can be moved manually. Select the motor to be moved by clicking on the
appropriate button (see diagram below for actual motor locations). Click on the Min/Max Pos Range indicator
and slide left and right to move the selected motor. The End switch box will light whenever the motor reaches
BrdHolder X
BrdHolder YL BrdHolder YR
Motor Locations
As Seen From Below
Camera YL Camera YR
UpFrame YL UpFrame YR
UpFrame X Camera XL Camera XR
27.23 Inputs/Outputs
Activate Valves, Vacuums, Pins, and Stop/Go buttons by clicking on the highlighted indicators in the
Inputs/Outputs section of the touchscreen.
Click again to turn off.
The boxes that are not high lighted are status indicators. A check mark will appear in the box whenever that
feature is active.
The Go inhibit - OUT indicator should always be activated. Deactivating this will disable the Stop
and Go buttons in normal operation.
Press the Settings button on the Maintenance screen.
7.24 Remote Service

Not used at this time.
7.25 Preferences
Shows a listing of all Accutray setup parameters. This screen is “read only” - settings cannot be
changed from this screen.
7.26 Init Machine

Used to initialize the machine if it is already initialized.
7.27 Exit
Press the Exit button to exit the maintenance screens.
7.28 Help
Help button not used at this time
7.29 Explain
This feature allows the user to view short videos of operation and maintenance of the machine.
7.30 Settings
Selected parameters can be set from this screen.
7.30.a AT Settings -> Settings
Enhanced Fast Alignment Mode:

Frame: If the Frame box is checked, then the film-to-film alignment will work as Fast Inner layer
process type, even when used for outer layer and double sided soldermask alignment. The films will be
aligned to the same position every time. The alignment of the films will be checked every time. If the
film alignment is within the alignment tolerance the alignment of the films will pass and no further
action will be performed. If the film-to-film alignment does not fall within the set parameters, main
vacuum will be released and the films will be realigned.
Panel: If the Panel box is checked, then the panel to film alignment will work as Fast inner layer.
When pressing GO to align the panel the panel will be moved to the position of the prior passed
alignment position. After main vacuum is drawn the alignment will be checked and if the alignment
falls within the set parameters the panel will be ready to be exposed. If the alignment fails, main
vacuum will be released and the panel will be realigned.
Enhanced Before CV Position Verification:
Number of attempts: The maximum number of tries the panel and film will be moved to achieve Best
Fit alignment before main vacuum is activated.
Enable: Turns the enhancement before contact vacuum feature on or off. If the check box is checked
the feature is turned on.
Square: If the square check box is checked the panel and films will move in two steps. First alignment
in the X-axes, then alignment in the Y-axes.
Statistics:
Align (Align/Idle) Time / Number of Attempts / (CNTR/Errors)
Ex:
Align (2:20/1:12) 3:32 / Number of Attempts (1.2/1)
Align 2:20 = the time the machine has been in use since the software was initialized.
Align 1:12 = the time the machine has been idling since the software was initialized.
Align 3:32 = the total time the software has been initialized.
Number of Attempts 1.2 = The average number of alignment attempts during each cycle.
Number of Attempts 1 = the number of time the procedure has been stopped due to an error.
Statistics:
Current / Estimated panels per hour
Ex:
123 / 59 panels per Hour
123 panels per hour = the number of panels the machine can print an hour at the speed the machine is
currently running at.
59 panels per hour = the actual number of panels per hour including the time the operator use to
replace panels, clean the films, etc.
Note: To view and change the Enhancement settings go to the settings ->settings
screen and press CNTR+Alt. To hide the enhance settings press Shift.
Note: Statistics are shown for the upper tray and lower tray separately.
7.30.b Settings->Setup
Type of Tray - Select Accutray or Standard tray.

Note: ORS98 must be restarted when changing Tray Types.
Glass Vacuum - Enable/Disable glass vacuum.
Ask to ignore Align Error - Allows a panel to be printed even though it is not aligned within the
alignment error settings in the job menu.
Camera Movement prior to exposure - Once alignment is complete, the cameras move out a
specified distance prior to exposure. Once exposure is complete, the cameras move back to their
original position (distance in millimeters only - default value is 15mm).
Pixel Adjust Hole Diameter -
Specifies the hole diameter that is used to adjust pixel size. The diameter is in millimeters only (default value
is 3mm).
Statistical target Definition – When statistical registration is used it is necessary to specify the
configuration for the target used. See the Creating a Job section for details.
Note: ORS98 does not need be restarted for Glass Vacuum, Ask to ignore Align Error,
Camera Movement prior to Exposure and Pixel Adjustment Hole changes to
take effect..
7.30.c AT Settings->About
The about screen shows detailed information about software version, activation and options
7.31 Adjust Cameras - On/Off

This button must be On to perform the following adjustments: camera, perpendicularity, focus, pixel,
and blackout/rotation.
7.32 Drivers
Each motor driver board has a unique value. These values can be viewed and maintained using the
following procedure.
The driver board value must be updated whenever a driver board is replaced.
1. Press the Drivers button and the driver configuration screen will appear..
First time the Driver screen is activated the touchscreen will display "?" values for all drivers and camera serial
numbers. To display the driver and camera serial numbers for the upper tray, press the Load Current button.
To display the driver numbers for the lower tray, click on the Lower Tray indicator.
BHYL BHX BHYR
BHYL Board Holder Y Left

BHX Board Holder X
BHYR Board Holder Y Right
UFYL Upper Frame Y Left
UFYR Upper Frame Y Right
UFX Upper Frame X
CLY Camera Y Left
CLX Camera X Left
UFYL UFX CLY CLX CRX CRY UFYR
CRX Camera X Right
CRY Camera Y Right
The driver board serial number is written on the board itself. Once the new driver is installed, enter the driver
serial number into its appropriate position on the touchscreen.
1. Press the Write to INI button.

2. Press the Exit button.
3. Press the Exit button on the menu bar.
4. Exit the ORS98 program and reopen to activate the new driver numbers.
7.33 Password
Used to assign and change operator and supervisor passwords. See the page 7-4 for details.
7.34 Cameras Out

Press this button to move the cameras to their outermost position. This allows easier access to the glass
for cleaning.
7.35 Error Log

Used to keep a record of errors for analysis.
This screen displays a list of all errors, with the latest error listed on top. Information displayed:
• Date and Time that the error occurred
• Job Name
• Work Order Number
• Tray - (upper or lower)
• Error message
7.36 Glass
This screen displays the configuration for the Absolute measure feature. Note, this is an option and
will not be available on all machines. See Chapter 9, section 2 for details.
7.37 Camera Settings

The cameras can be moved manually and, doing the following can alter the camera settings:
Double click on the upper left hand corner of any of the four camera images
The cameras can be moved manually with the mouse by clicking and dragging the camera into position.
Touching and dragging the cameras into position using the touchscreen can also move the cameras.
After the cameras are moved to the correct position press the STO P button and from the pop-up menu select
SAVE.
The camera settings can be modified by

7.38 Camera Settings - Device Control Screen
AGC Auto Gain Control. Check the AGC box to use auto gain. If the box is not checked
use the track bar to control the gain. Default value is 18.
AGC Range Four ranges for the auto gain control - (1x-4, 2x-8, 1x-8, 2x-1)
Brightness Track bar to control brightness. Currently inactive. Default value is 50.
Contrast Track bar control contrast. Default value is 25.
AEC Auto Exposure Control. If the box is checked, the adjustment is automatic. If the
box is not checked, the setting is controlled by the customer with the track bar.
Gamma Gamma on/off. Default value is 0.
CEXP Central Exposure. The center area of the image is used for camera settings. Default
value is 1.
BPSHP Bypass Sharpness. Currently inactive. Default value is 0.
BKLT Back Light. Backlight compensation. Default value is 0.
Camera Connect Check this box to activate the camera.
Set Default Press Set Default and the default settings from the ORS98.ini file are used.
7.39 Camera Settings - Illumination Screen

Manual Track bar to control the intensity of the LED’s.
LED’s LED’s on/off buttons.
Set Default Use default setting from ORS98.ini. LED Default Brightness = 25.
7.40 Camera Settings - Device Save/Restore Settings Screen
Settings Label The name for each custom setting is saved in the Saved Settings Log. It is possible
to save 8 different settings.
PT Specific Process Specific setting
Custom Customer setting. Use the names and settings from the Saved Settings field.
One/All Save the setting for one camera or all of the cameras on the tray in the front
position.
Selected storage For Process Type specific settings use the scroll down menu to select what process
type the setting is to be used with. For Custom settings use the scroll down menu to
select or change a name for a camera configuration.
Load Load a current setting.
Save Save a setting.
BPSHP Bypass Sharpness. Currently inactive. Default value is 0.
BKLT Back Light. Backlight compensation. Default value is 0.
Set Default Returns to the default setting in the ORS98.ini file.
7.39 Store Camera Settings

The settings for each camera can be stored in two different ways. A camera setting can be stored as a process
specific setting or a custom setting. First the camera must be adjusted using the camera settings Device Control
and Illumination screens. After the desired camera adjustment is reached the setting must be saved using the
Save / Restore Settings screen.
After the settings for each camera is stored and it is decided if the setting is a process specific setting or a custom
setting, in the Jobs Edit screen it is necessary to specify for what job the setting is to be used.
Select the job in the jobs screen, press the Target button, then press the Camera Mode button. The screen will
appear as above. If the Custom or the PT Specific box is checked, it is necessary to use the scroll box to select
the process or setting name that is to be used for the job.
8. Jobs
8.1 Creating Jobs
This section will explain how to create a job, and how to assign the parameters, which make up each job.
When the power up sequence is complete, the screen will appear as below. Press the Jobs button on the
touchscreen.
8.2 Job Screen
Waiting/Archived Jobs Select whether the jobs in process or all archived jobs should be listed.
Sort Jobs Select whether the jobs be listed by name, creation date, or process type.
The selected job is copied and is inserted in the job table as new entry with the new name “new job”.
If jobs were prepared as text files, you can import these text files into the job table by
using this button.
Press this button to delete old jobs, or change job status from “Waiting” to “Archived”,
or “Archived” to “Waiting”.
Press this button to open the offset input field.
Press this button to store changes and return to the main screen
Press this button to open the Help Program. See chapter 10.
Save the current camera positions into the selected job. Note, this feature is only
accessible when a job is selected.
The memo field in the job edit screen can be used to convey
process information to the operator, i.e. lamp setting, vacuum delay, mj / cm 2, etc. If the memo field
has information written in it and the “show operator info during job setup” button is marked, the
information from the memo field will be displayed in the upper part of the main screen. If the button is
marked but the memo field does not have any information written in it the OLEC image will be
displayed. It is possible to import information to this field same time as importing a new job.
Press this button to go to the Edit Job screen

Press the Thickness button to verify or change the panel thickness for the job selected.
______________________________________________________________________
NOTE: For AT42 machines this feature must be turned on and must be used. The panel
thickness must be entered for each job. There are 2 sets of lifting pins on the
AT42. Depending on the panel thickness, the low or high pins can be selected.
Its is recommended that the Lifting Pins be set to “Auto”.
For operator log-on, if a panel thickness is not specified, the program will display a panel thickness confirmation
box.
First - Press this button to move to the first job in the job table.
Prior - Press this button to scroll backward through jobs in the job table.
Next - Press this button to scroll forward through jobs in the job table.
Last - Press this button to move to the last job in the job table.
Press this button to deselect any field on the screen
Press this button to clear all text in the text box.
Press this button to backspace the cursor in the text box.
Press this button to enter information in the text box.
 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor forward or backward one space.
HOME Pressing HOME sends the cursor to the beginning of the text box.
END Pressing END sends the cursor to the end of the text box.
8.3 Job Parameter
Press this button to reset Film/Board/Camera Position offsets to zero.
Press this button to select the highlighted job in the job table.
Press this button to select millimeters or inches as the unit of measure.
Date The date and time that a job is created.

Panel Type Dimensions of the panel.
Process Type See configuration below.

Number Process Type Description
0 No Marks Does not align to anything.
Aligns the panel to the Bottom Film only. It aligns a copper pad on the
1 Single Sided
panel to the Bottom Film Target X.
Aligns the Top Film Target x to the Bottom Film Target X through a
2 Double Sided
hole in the panel.
Aligns the panel to the Bottom Film only. It aligns a copper pad on the
3 Single Sided/Soldermask
panel to the Bottom Film Target X.
Double
4 Not available at this time.
Sided/Soldermask
5 Inner Layer Aligns the Top Film Target x to the Bottom Film Target X only.
The fast inner layer process will align the top and bottom artwork
during the first production panel alignment segment. For subsequent
panels, after the go button is pressed to align the films, the upper
frame will move to the position of the prior alignment, draw main
vacuum, and check if the film-to-film alignment is within the alignment
6 Fast Inner Layer
error tolerance. If it is the tray will move in to the exposure area. If
the film-to-film alignment does not meet the alignment error tolerance,
main vacuum will be released and the alignment will be repeated.
When the alignment is achieved the tray will move in to the exposure
area.
Standard double sided alignment with LED’s on. This feature can be
7 Laminated - CL used if the alignment holes are partially obscured i:e partially filled
with glue or some other obstrcution.
Combination of Fast inner layer and Single/Double sided solder mask.
The films are aligned looking through the alignment holes, after the
film-to-film alignment is done the LED’s will turn on and the panel is
aligned to the bottom film. After the first panel the film-to-film
8 C-DoubleSide
alignment works as Fast inner layer. Only aligning if the film-to-film
alignment is no longer within the specified alignment tolerance. This
process type can be used for both outer layer panels and statistical
alignment.
8.4 X and Y Coordinates
dXC Distance between the center of the frame and the center of the panel.
Enter a (+) value for panels that are right of center.
Enter a (-) value for panels that are left of center.
XL/R Distance between the left film target and the right film target (X-Axis).
YL Distance between the left film target and the left film pin (Y-Axis).
YR Distance between the right film target and the right film pin (Y-Axis).
Center of Frame
Film
Center of Panel
Panel
DXC
Film Target Film Target
XL/R XL/R
YL YR
Film Pin Film Pin

Tolerance
“Tolerance” is the allowable difference between the board and the bottom film,
and between the top film and bottom film. The machine has no control over
these factors. They are determined by how well the panels are drilled, the film is
plotted, and the stability of the environment. The machine simply uses this
number to accept or reject a board or set of film. The number entered here will
also be used as the upper and lower limit on the graph chart.
Align Tolerance The allowable difference from best-fit alignment between the board and the
bottom film, and between the top film and bottom film. This is checked after
alignment, and after vacuum is drawn, to determine if it is OK to expose. Use
lower numbers for tight registration jobs, and higher numbers for shorter cycle
time. The AccuTray will not expose a panel when the alignment results are
greater than the align error tolerance. See page # for an explanation of alignment
results.
Panel Number of panels in the job.
Counter Actual number of panels exposed in job.
PD Tolerance Process Deviation Tolerance - see next page.
Use Align Tolerance Check this box to use the Tolerance setting as a dimensional deviation between
films and panel, and the Alignment Tolerance as Alignment accuracy. Note that
when the new version of ORS98 is installed, all existing jobs will default to this
setting.
Thickness Panel thickness (See above)
Laminated Holes Select laminated holes if you are using holes covered by dry film and deselect
laminated holes if the holes are not covered by dry film. Accuracy is higher
without tented holes. This is because the camera does not as precisely define the
hole edge when looking through two layers of dry film.
Use Film Vacuum Enables/Disables Film Vacuums.
Blow When Aligning Air is blown back into the frame to assist in the alignment process.
Statistical Targets The statistical target button can only be activated on systems that are outfitted
with the statistical alignment option. On all other systems the button is visible,
but inactive. A special target must be used to align panels using statistical
targets.
Measure Film Optional feature not used at this time.
Panel Type Dimensions of the panel.
8.5 Use Top Film Vacuum For Single Sided Alignment.

By checking the U-Film Vacuum box in the Jobs edit screen, the program will use upper film vacuum when a
single process type is selected. The alignment and exposure is still single sided only. Expose bottom side. This
can help not leaking main vacuum.
When a job with a single sided process type is selected, the UFilm vacuum check box is active. It is at this point
possible to check the box if it is desired to use upper film. The upper film does not have any target.
8.6 Setting up a job
To use the existing alignment parameters (Tolerance and Alignment Tolerance) the PD Tolerance and the
Alignment Tolerance box must not be checked. Using this option, the AT30 will work the same as in software
versions ORS98 v2.04 and older.
On the Job screens, Edit Job menu it is necessary to have a check mark in the PD Tolerance box to use the PD
Tolerance as the alignment acceptance criteria. If the PD Tolerance is checked, and the PD Tolerance is set at,
for example 35um, a successful alignment will only be achieved if at all the camera positions the distance
between the drilled hole or etched fiducial target and the alignment target(s) on the film(s) are less than or equal
to 35um. In this case the Alignment Tolerance is not considered.
To consider PD Tolerance, Alignment Tolerance, and PDSL (Process Deviation Size Limit) as alignment
criteria, both the PD Tolerance box and the Alignment Tolerance box must be checked. This will automatically
turn on the PDSL. If for example the PD Tolerance is set at 35um, and the Alignment Tolerance is set at 15um,
then the PDSL is automatically 20um, and a successful alignment will only be achieved if the distance between
the drilled hole and the alignment target(s) on the film(s) are less than or equal to 35um, and the Best-Fit are less
than or equal to 15um, and the size between panel and film(s) does not exceed 20um. This means that the
alignment between for example the upper and lower film can not be further apart than 15um from a Best-Fit
alignment. Best-Fit is calculated from measured distances between films and panel at the four corners. If due to
size deviation the calculated Best-Fit alignment is exceeding 20um the program will stop aligning and display an
error message.
Type the new Tolerance number in the provided space. If the job is created in um the information must be
entered in um. If the job is set up using mils, the change must be entered in mils.
8.7 Target
Press this button to define target sizes.
Pad on the BFilm This box must be checked if the alignment target on the
bottom film is a pad. The diameter of the pad on the bottom
film must be entered in the box below the check box.
Use Long hole It is possible to do double sided alignment using oblong
holes in the panel. This option is available for double
sided and double sided solder mask alignment only. The
default hole size is 5mm x 7mm. Note: The oblong/long
hole must have straight sides. This option is not available
for slotted holes with round ends. IF this option is used it is
necessary to cerify and or change the value for the hole size
in the OR98.ini file.
From ORS98.ini file [General]
OblongXSize=7000
OblongYSize=5000
Use X on BFilm If the X target is used for the bottom film for single sided
alignments or the X target is used on the bottom film and
the + target is used on the top film for double sided
alignments then the Use X on BFilm box must be checked.
Target diameter Hole or Pad diameter in the panel.
Cross line thickness Cross Line Thickness on the film(s).
Tight/Regular/Loose Tight, regular, and loose is used to define how precise an
alignment hole the software should be searching for.
Tight = + 0.1mm, - 0.1mm
Regular = + 0.1mm, - 0.2mm
(NOTE, Regular is standard on older software versions)
Loose = + 0.2mm, - 0.5mm
Use Circles Only Check this box when aligning to a pad on the film(s)
instead of the cross hair targets.
Use 4 Cameras This box must be checked to use all four cameras. If the
box is not checked the two rear cameras (Camera Q1 and
Q2) will be used. To use the two front cameras (Camera Q3
and Q4) only see Only X Cameras below.
Only X Cameras This box must be checked to use the two front cameras
(camera Q3 and Q4) only. It is necessary to uncheck the
Use 4 Cameras check box as well.
Statistical Targets The statistical target button can only be activated on
systems that are outfitted with the statistical alignment
option. On all other systems the button is visible, but
inactive. A special target must be used to align panels using
statistical targets. To configure the statistical targets go to
Maintenance->Settings->setup->StatisticalTargetsChange.
A = Diameter of the four satellite holes in the panel.

B = Diameter of the upper film targets at the four satellite holes.
C = Distance between the center alignment hole and the four satellite holes in the X axes.
D = Distance between the center alignment hole and the four satellite holes in the Y axes.
8.8 Selecting a Job and Adding a Work Order Number
Select a job from the list on the left side of the touchscreen. You can select a job for the upper tray
only, lower tray only, or both trays, depending on where the AccuTray(s) is installed.
1. Select the job from the job table on the left of the touchscreen and click on it. It will be highlighted
in blue.
2. Assign the job to the proper tray by pressing the arrow next to the upper or lower tray text box.
3. Assign a Work Order number in the text box.
4. Press Enter. The touchscreen will automatically return to the Main Screen, and the cameras will
move into place. You are now ready to load film into the AccuTray.
8.9 Archiving or deleting a Jobs

Once a job has been created and named, the job parameter information can be stored in two areas: Waiting
Jobs, and/or Archived Jobs. Waiting Jobs are jobs that are currently in use, or are used frequently. Archived jobs
pressing either the
Archived Jobs list can be viewed in the Job Name table.
To retrieve a job follow the below instructions.

1. Select the job to be moved from the Job Table. In this example, we will use the “Test Upper” job.
Press the Delete Job button.
2. A prompt will appear asking weather you want to store the job in archive. Pressing YES will save
the job to the Archived Job list. Pressing NO will delete the job entirely. A confirmation prompt
will appear to verify that the job is to be deleted.
3. Pressing YES on the confirmation prompt will delete the job from the Waiting Jobs list, and move
it to the Archived Jobs list. Pressing NO will retain a copy of the job in both the Waiting and
Archived Job lists.
4. Follow the same procedure when retrieving Archived Jobs for the Waiting Jobs list.
8.10 Process Deviation Tolerance and Process Deviation Size Limit Instructions
Process deviation (PD Tolerance) allows the user to specify the maximum distance between the center of the
drilled alignment hole in the panel to the center of the alignment target on the film.
Process Deviation Size Limit (PDSL) informs the user how much of the combined PD and Align Tolerance
that is strictly used to approve or reject the alignment due to the size deviations between film(s) and panel.
The following instructions are to familiarize users of ORS98 how to use the new PD/PDSL Tolerance with
both new and existing jobs. It is also an instruction on how to read the applicable result screens and error
messages.
1. For existing jobs the PD Tolerance box should not be checked for the job to run without any
changes. This will use the Tolerance setting as a dimensional deviation between films and panel,
and the Alignment Tolerance as Alignment accuracy. Note that when the new version of ORS98 is
installed, all existing jobs will default to this setting.
2. If an existing job or a new job is to be run using the PD Tolerance and the Alignment Tolerance,
both the PD Tolerance box and the Alignment box must be checked and the PDSL will
automatically be used.
3. If an existing job or a new job is to be run using PD Tolerance only the PD Tolerance box must be
checked and the Alignment Tolerance box must be unchecked.
Note: All existing jobs will default to the standard Tolerance and Alignment tolerance
process. Jobs created using ORS98 V2.04b and older will run with no changes.
However, it is possible to change the alignment parameters for existing jobs.
8.11 The Result Screens
PD Tolerance;
Process Deviation (TFilm) 12/6. The first number, 12, is the process deviation result for the upper film
to the panel alignment. It shows that the largest distance between the center of the alignment hole in
the panel to the center of the alignment target on the upper film is 12um. The second number, 6, shows
the best possible process deviation considering the size and shape of both the upper film and the panel.
Process Deviation (Bfilm) 22/13. The format of the result for the bottom film to panel is the same as
for the upper film to panel. Achieved process deviation equals 22um. Possible process deviation equals
13um.
Film deviation:
The first row of letters corresponds to the distances between the alignment targets, or the camera
positions. "A" is the distance between the two rear cameras, camera Q1 and Q2, “B” is the distance
between the two right cameras, camera Q1 and Q4 adjustable cameras. "C" is the distance between the
two front cameras, camera Q3 and Q4, “D” is the distance between the two left cameras, camera Q2
and Q3.
The firs row of numbers is the dimensional deviation between the upper film and the panel. Note that
the panel alignment holes are used as the reference points. For example, at "A", the distance between
the two alignment targets on the upper film is 12um further apart than the alignment holes on the
panel. B indicates that between the two right side upper film targets (cameras Q1 and Q4) the top film
is 6um shorter than the distance between the panel targets at the same positions. Note, this information
does not provide information about absolute film and panel size, it use the panel as reference only.
The second row of numbers shows the dimensional deviation between the lower film and the panel,
using same format as for upper film to panel deviation.
Deviation Tolerance and Align Tolerance Result Screen:

DT = 35 AT = 15
DT and AT will be displayed when Alignment Tolerance and Tolerance is used in the job setup as
alignment criteria’s.
DT is the allowed size deviation between a panel and the film(s). Example, if in this case the top or
bottom film between any two targets is longer or shorter than the panel by more than 35um the
program will stop aligning and display an error message.
AT is the allowed miss alignment from the calculated Best-Fit alignment. This means that the panel for
example can be shifted, in this case, a maximum of 15um in X and or Y from the calculated Best-Fit
alignment position.
PDT = 35
PDT will be displayed when PD (Process deviation) is used alone.
PDT is the allowed maximum distance between the center of the alignment target on the panel to the
center of the alignment targets on the top and or bottom films at all camera positions.
PDSL = 20 PD = 35 AT = 15
PDSL, PD, and AT will be displayed when PD (Process Deviation) and AT (Alignment Tolerance) is
used together.
PDSL (Process Deviation Size Limit) is the allowed size deviation between the panel and the top and
or bottom film.
PD is the allowed maximum distance between the center of the alignment target on the panel to the
center of the alignment targets on the top and or bottom films at all camera positions.
AT is the allowed miss alignment from the calculated Best-Fit alignment. This means that the panel for
example can be shifted, in this case, a maximum of 15um in X and or Y from the calculated Best-Fit
alignment position.
Example, if the PD is set to 35um in the jobs screen and the AT is set to 15um in the jobs screen then
the PDSL is automatically calculated to be 20um ((PD-AT=PDSL)(35-15=20))
During the alignment verification the program will first look if the distance between the alignment
targets on the films are within the PDSL of the panel, if it is not the alignment will stop and an error
message will be displayed, if it is the program will verify if with the current panel and films it is
possible to align panel and films within the PD tolerance of 35um, if it is not the program will stop and
display an error message, if it is the program will continue checking if the alignment is within the AT.
If it is not it will release the main vacuum and make another alignment attempt. It will by default try to
align the panel a maximum of 5 times, if it is not aligned within the AT after 5 attempts the program
will stop and display an error message. If the alignment satisfies all 3 alignment parameters the
alignment is a success and the panel is ready to be exposed.
Alignment Tolerance Result Screen:
Note: The alignment tolerance is displayed in the lower right corner of the main
screen, not as shown in this document. The alignment tolerance result will only
be displayed if the alignment tolerance check box in the jobs screen is checked.
The BF(X0 L-1 R-2) part of the result shows the alignment error from a Best-Fit alignment between
the lower film and the panel. In the X-axis the alignment is Best-Fit considering the film and panel size
and shape differences. In the Y-axis in the left side the error is 1um, meaning to achieve Best-Fit
alignment the panel should been moved down by 1um. In the Y-axis in the right side the panel should
have been moved down by 2um for Best-Fit alignment
The UF(X1 L-4 R-5) part of the result shows the alignment error from a Best-Fit alignment between
the upper film and the panel, using same format as for upper film to panel.
Line 1: Reason for error.

Line 2: Achieved Film(s) to panel PD.
Line 3: PD Tolerance from job screen
Line 4: Hint
If the PD Tolerance that is specified in the Jobs setup screen can not be achieved due to dimensional
deviations, the above error will be displayed after the first alignment attempt.
Line 1: Hint as to why the alignment failed.
Line 2: Position of the worst case of alignment

failure. The result at that position and
the alignment tolerance set by the user.
If Alignment Tolerance is used by it self or both PD tolerance and Alignment Tolerance is used
together and the PD tolerance can be reached, but the alignment tolerance was not reached after first
alignment attempt, the program will retry the alignment up to five times. After the fifth attempt, if the
alignment tolerance and or PD tolerance is not meet, the program will error out. The error will be
specific to the reason for why the alignment failed. For example, if the Alignment Tolerance is set at
2um and the result from the last attempt is misaligned by 10um, the error will display a message
stating so.
8.12 Changing PD -Tolerance or Tolerance during a job.

If a situation arises during production where one panel in a lot is not aligning because it is off by microns, the
Tolerance value needs to be changed. It is no longer necessary to go to the jobs screen to change the PD
Tolerance or the Tolerance during production. To change the tolerance value, press Ctrl+ T and a dialog box will
appear. Type in the new PD-Tolerance or Tolerance number in this box. This new number will be used until the
next time the jobs screen is accessed or the software is turned off. The new number is not being stored
permanently with the job.
Note: The Ctrl+T function can only be used in the supervisor mode or on machines
that are not using the supervisor/operator log in feature.
9. Absolute Measure Option

9.1 Absolute Measure
The Absolute Measure option is only activated if purchased by the customer. For customers not purchasing this
option, the buttons related to Absolute Measure will appear on the jobs screen, but will not be active.
To measure the film, the Measure film box must be checked
9.2 Absolute Measure Theory of Operation

The absolute measure target style is the same as those used for inner layer alignment. The absolute measure glass
tool will have four targets engraved in the glass. The upper and lower films will have targets that match the
position of the glass targets. When a job with the Measure film feature selected (see above) is started, the
absolute measure program will (prior to the first job set-up):
1. Move the cameras to the absolute measure targets.

2. Draw main vacuum.
3. Measure the real distance between the targets on the film.
The measured distance will be compared to distances in the glass screen (see below). After the measurement the
result will be displayed on the top part of the main ORS98 screen.
X-Y coordinates for

absolute measure targets
Camera positions for when

the cameras are directly
below the absolute measure
targets.
9.3 Glass Targets Screen
Check box for glass X-Y coordinates for

or film target position. absolute measure targets
Camera positions for when

the cameras are directly Visual aid for setting up
below the absolute measure target position for the film.
targets.
Load new dimensions for

glass tool targets. Used
Tray selection only when the glass is
replaced or targets are
Load the camera position moved from their original
to the program. position.
Note: The glass target X-Y coordinates are loaded using a glass tool specific data file
created at OLEC when the glass is measured.
Note: The settings are tray specific, so it is necessary to do the original setup for both
trays. After the setup is completed it is not necessary to make any further
changes. To use the feature however, it is necessary to check the Measure Film
check box in the Jobs Edit screen.
9.4 Setting Up Artwork for Absolute Measuring

1. Lower artwork must have four targets as for inner layer alignments
The targets must be placed at the same location as the Absolute Measure targets engraved on the
bottom glass tool.
2. Top artwork must have four targets as for inner layer alignments 
The targets must be placed at the same location as the Absolute Measure targets engraved on the
bottom glass tool.
Note: If the artworks are used for inner layer production it is possible to use the same
targets as for the Absolute Measure targets.
9.5 Measuring the Artworks

1. Start ORS98 and initialize the tray that’s in the front (out) position.
2. Select a job and then press the Edit Job key.
3. Check the Measure Film box, then press the Select Job key.
4. Use the steps below to assign a job to the proper tray. You can select a job for the upper tray only,
lower tray only, or both trays, depending on where the AccuTray(s) is installed.
A. Select the job from the job table on the left of the touchscreen and click on it. It will be highlighted
in blue.
B. Assign the job to the proper tray by pressing the arrow next to the upper or lower tray text box.
C. Assign a Work Order number in the text box.
D. Press Enter. The touchscreen will automatically return to the Main Screen, and the cameras will
move into place. You are now ready to load film into the AccuTray.
Note: If asked to confirm the panel thickness, press OK if the panel thickness is
correct, press Cancel if the panel thickness is incorrect. Once the panel
thickness ic corrected, press OK again. See pages 8-3 for details on panel
thickness.
5. The cameras will move to the target position for the job, and NOT for the Absolute Measure
targets. If the job targets and the Absolute Measure targets are at the same location, the cameras
will move to the target positions.
6. Place the first panel in the tray, press GO, and the cameras will move to the Absolute Measure
targets. For a 4 camera system, the cameras will move to the Absolute Measure targets and draw
main vacuum. It then measures all 4 targets at once and displays the results on the results screen.
For a 2 camera system, the cameras will move to the back targets first, draw main vacuum, move
to the front targets, and then display the results on the results screen.
7. Press the GO button to do the first panel setup. The AT30 is now ready for production.
9.6 Results Screen
Film deviation result for bottom film Film deviation result for top film
After the film is measured, the result will be displayed in the top part of the main screen. The first half of the
screen is the deviation between the expected distances to the absolute distances of the bottom film; the second
half of the screen is the results for the top film.
There are four parts to the result screen. From left to right top, then from left to right bottom,they are:
1. A visual display of the lower film to Absolute Measure targets on the glass tool. To help the user
recognize if the film is oversized or undersized, the targets on the image part of the screen will
move further apart if the film is over sized and closer together if the film is undersized.
Note: The image is not to scale, but the position of the green plusses  indicate if the
film is larger or smaller in each direction.
2. A visual display of the upper film to Absolute Measure targets on the glass tool. To help the user
recognize if the film is oversized or undersized, the targets on the image part of the screen will
move further apart if the film is over sized and closer together if the film is undersized.
Note: The image is not to scale, but the position of the red crosses  indicate if the
film is larger or smaller in each direction.
3. Deviation between the expected and actual distance between the Absolute Measure targets on the
lower film. The A, B, C, and D in the first column correspond with the A, B, C, and D in the visual
result area. “A” is the absolute distance between the two rear targets; “B” is the absolute distance
between the two right targets, and so on.
4. Deviation between the expected and actual distance between the Absolute Measure tragets on the
top film. The A, B, C, and D in the right hand column correspond with the A, B, C, and D in the
visual result area. “A” is the absolute distance between the two rear targets; “B” is the absolute
distance between the two right targets, and so on.
10. Low Level Maintenance

10.1 Low Level Maintenance
The Low Level Maintenance Mode allows for manual activation of the
various motors, vacuums, and pins within each AccuTray.
Note: Low Level Maintenance can only be accessed from the Supervisor Mode.
1. Log into the computer using the Supervisor password.
2. Press the Maintenance button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the LoLevel Maintenance button.
10.2 Activating Motors Manually

The 10 motors in each AccuTray can be moved manually. Select the motor to be moved by
clicking on the appropriate button (see diagram below for actual motor locations). Click on the
Min/Max Pos Range indicator and slide left and right to move the selected motor. The
Endswitch box will light when the motor reaches the end switch. The offset button can be used to move
the motor a set number of steps. The number of steps to move can be changed by clicking on the box
above the offset buton and typing in the desired number of steps to move. Negative numbers will move
the motor in the other direction.
When a motor selection button is pressed the the actual location of the motor will be displayed on the
white bar below the motor selection buttons. If the motor is in the middle position the loation value on
the left side will be for example -975 and the right side 975. The total of the two numbers will add up
to the maximum movement of that specific motor, in this example 975+975=1950 which translates
into 1.95mm
BrdHolder X
BrdHolder YL BrdHolder YR
Motor Locations
As Seen From Below
Camera YL Camera YR
UpFrame YL UpFrame YR
UpFrame X Camera XL Camera XR
10.3 Inputs/Outputs
Activate Valves, Vacuums, Pins, and Stop/Go buttons by clicking on the highlighted indicators in the
Inputs/Outputs section of the touchscreen.
Click again to turn off.
The boxes that are not high lighted are status indicators. A check mark will appear in the box whenever that
feature is active.
The Go inhibit - OUT indicator should always be activated. Deactivating this will disable the Stop
and Go buttons in normal operation.
Press the Settings button on the Maintenance screen.
11. Eurosys - AT30 Four Camera System

11.1 Camera test procedure.
1. To display all cameras active in the eVision program, turn on ORS98 and initialize one or both
trays.
2. Minimize ORS98.
3. From the Start menu, click All Programs, Eurosys MultiCam.
4. Select the eVision Evaluator program from the drop down menu.
5. Click Source->New.
6. Check “Standard camera operated with Picolo series or Junior 4”, click next.
7. Select the camera standard NTSC.

8. Select the color format RGB24.
9. Click Next.
10. The video board installed in the PC will be displayed.

11. Select video channel to be connected. Ex. VID1, VID2, VID3, and so on.
12. Click Finish.
13. The display screen for the video source will be displayed on the main screen.
14. Repeat step 4-11 for each camera for the specific video channel for each camera as needed.
a. Typical configuration:
TOP TRAY:
Q2 Q1
Q1 = VID1
Q2 = VID2
Q3 = VID3
Q4 = VID4
BOTTOM TRAY:
Q1 = VID5
Q2 = VID6
Q3 = VID7 Q3 Q4
Q4 = VID8
15. Click the Tile Window button to display each camera side by side.
16. Click the “Set all sources to active” button to get live image from all video channels.
NOTE: if a video channel is not displaying an image the screen will display “No
Video” and it is necessary to find the reason for no video signal.
11.2 Single Camera test using Pcom

1. Turn off ORS98.
2. Turn on Pcom and Select the COM port for the top or bottom tray (Typ. COM1 = top tray.
COM2 = bottom tray)
3. Click Tray Drivers.
4. Initialize the camera that should be active with live video in the eVision program by clicking
on the serial number for the camera to activate. The camera will now be initialized and the
camera number will be displayed in the Serial Nb. Box. Click Exit.
5.
6. On the main screen click the Camera button.

7. On the camera screen check the Camera Connect and then press the Set Default button.
8. Turn on the eVision Evaluator program.

9. Follow step 3-13 above.
10. In step 13 select the video channel for the camera that should be activated.
11. Click “Set all sources active” to get a live image from the camera selected.
12. When done Click Source->Exit.
13. Maximize Pcom.
14. Uncheck the Camera Connect button.
15. Press Reset Program, wait 8 seconds and follow step 3-14 for the next camera.
16. When done turn off Pcom and eVision Evaluator.
12. AT30 Camera Alignment

12.1 Camera Adjust Mode
Note: Camera Adjustments can only be performed from the Supervisor
Mode.
Tools and Equipment needed to perform this alignment procedure: ilm set with +/x alignment targets
at camera positions.
 Alignment tool (supplied with unit) Part number: 12D7175A07
 1.5mm and 2.5mm metric Allen keys.
 3/16 x ¼” flat head screwdriver.
1. Start Ors98 program. Press the Tray Setup key - initialize the tray.
2. Select a single side job and click OK back to Ors98 main screen.
3. On the main screen press the Maintenance button.

4. From the maintenance menu press Camera Adjust ON
5. Then click the Exit box. Camera adjust mode-set camera manual move will appear on the top.
6. Double click in the upper right corner of one of the image areas to activate the Move menu.
7. The camera Adjust menu will be displayed on the top line of the main screen.
F4 = Not used
F5 = CrossRegistrationMarks. Used for in-line adjustment between all four cameras.
F6 = Pixel Size. Used to calibrate the pixel size for all four cameras.
F7 = Sharpness. Used to adjust the sharpness of each image.
F8/F9/F10 = Adjust 90 Degree. Used to adjust the perpendicularity of the cameras to the image
surface.
12.2 Camera Rotation F5
1. Load the bottom film. Select an Inner Layer target
2. Double2.click in the upper
Double clickleft-hand corner of
in the upper the viewing
left-hand area of
corner ofthe
thecamera
viewing area of the camera being aligned. A
being aligned. A menu will appear. Click the
menu will appear. Click the Camera box.Camera box.
3. F5Press
3. Press the key of
thetheF5
keyboard.
key of Athesetkeyboard.
of yellow crosshairs
A set ofwill appear.
white crosshairs will appear.
4. F5Press
4. Press the key again.
the F5The crosshairs
key will times
again two changeandcolorthe
to white.
crosshairs will change color from white to yellow.
5. Use the5.mouse
Use orthefinger
mouse or finger
to drag to drag
the camera to the the camera
target. Verify to
thatthe
thetarget. Verify that the crosshairs are
crosshairs are parallel to the target.
parallel to the target.
6. need
6. If it is not, If it remove
is not, the
remove
camerathe
armcamera
from thearm from
bottom the Turn
frame. bottom
the frame.
knobs of the upper frame to locked position.
12.3 Removing the camera arm and adjusting the camera position.
1. Turn off the power to the tray.
2. Turn the knobs of the upper frame to locked position.
7. Open the tray. Use a 2.5mm Allen key remove three M3 screws and the
ribbon cable plate.
3. Remove two M3 screws and Idler Pulley.
8. Remove two M3 screws and Idler Pulley.
5-19
4. Remove eight M3 screws to lay down the Camera Bar. Holding the Camera Bar, then take out
last screw.
5. Remove arm cover.

6. Pull out the camera sled and turn over. Use a 1.5mm Allen Wrenches loose four screws.
Backside view. Front camera

7. The camera board rotated until the target and the crosshairs are parallel. (Rotate the camera
board in the same direction that the target is off.) Verify that rotating the camera board did not
cause blackout areas. Replace the camera arm. If the target and the crosshairs are parallel,
replace all hardware and the cover plate for that arm. If the target and the crosshairs are not
parallel, repeat step 1-7 until they are OK.
8. For the front cameras it is necessary to remove the 4 set screws shown above before the camera
sled can be removed.
12. The camera board rotated until the target and the crosshairs are parallel.
(Rotate the camera board in the same direction that the target is off.) Verify
that rotating the camera board did not cause blackout areas. Replace the
camera arm. If the target and the crosshairs are parallel, replace all hardware
and the cover plate for that arm. If the target and the crosshairs are not
parallel, repeat step 12 until they are OK.
13. Click Camera 2 for adjust X camera. Make sure that is X camera’s image.
14. Press the F5 key of the keyboard. A set of yellow crosshairs will appear.
12.4 Pixel
15. Press F6key again. The crosshairs will change color to white.
the F5
16. Use the mouse or finger to drag the camera to the target. Verify that the
1. Verify that the camera is using a 3mm hole target
crosshairs are parallel to the target.
2. On the main ORS98 screen press the maintenance screen.
17 If it is not, use a 1.5mm Allen Wrenches loose four screws on two sides of
camera sled.
3. From the menu select Settings. On the settings menu select the Setup tab.
Rev. A 5-21
4. Find the Pixel Adjustment Hole Diameter field and verify that the hole size call out match the
tool used to calibrate the pixel sixe.
Note: Use a film with a opaque background and a 3mm (0.118”) clear pad for pixel
calibration. If the film pad and the pixel adjustment hole size is not the same the
machine will not function correctly. It is recommended to use a 3mm diameter.
5. Click OK and exit the maintenance screen.
6. Load a film with a clear 3mm pad and move the cameras to the pad locations. It is necessary to
have a pad for each camera location as all four cameras must be calibrated.
7. Press maintenance button on the main ORS98 screen.
8. Click Adjust Camera – On

9. Place the cursor in the upper right-hand corner of the viewing area of the camera being
aligned and double click the left mouse button. A scroll down menu will appear. Scroll down to
Camera and left click the mouse.
Pixel F6
1. Verify that the camera is using a 3mm hole target.
10. The
Note: If thecamera adjustment
pixel information is savedmenu
using a will appear
different on the
size target thecamera
top part of the main program window.
will not function properly.
11. Press the F6 key of the keyboard and a yellow circle will appear on one of the camera images. Align
2. Place the cursor in the upper left-hand corner of the viewing area of the
thebeing
camera yellow circle
aligned with the
and double clickclear
the leftpad on button.
mouse the film. If the
A scroll yellow circle is larger than the clear pad on the
down
menufilm then press
will appear. Scroll the minus
down key on
to Camera andthe
leftkeyboard to decrease the yellow circles diameter. If the yellow
click the mouse.
3. Press circle
the F6 is
keylarger than the After
of the keyboard. cleara pad onofthe
couple filmapress
seconds theopen
box will + key on the key board to increase the yellow
over circles X=xx.xxx
diameter.
the target. and Y= xx.xxx with xx.xxx usually falling
between
12. Press15 to
the17.F6X key
and Yofmust vary by .200After
the keyboard. to .250. If the values
a couple are
of seconds a box will open over the target.
correct select the Yes box. If the values are incorrect, select the No box and
X=xx.xxx and Y= xx.xxx with xx.xxx usually falling between 15.000 to 17.000 X and Y must
repeat the perpendicularity alignment.
vary by .200 to .250. If the values are within the correct range select the Yes box. If the values are
incorrect, double check the diameter of the film target and verify the setting in the maintenance
screen for correct Pixel Adjustment Hole Size and perform the procedure again.
12.5 Adjust focus F7
1. Select a double-sided job and install the films and panel as usual.
2. Press the Maintenance button.
3. On the maintenance screen select Adjust Camera - On

4. Double click the upper left-hand corner of the viewing area of the camera being aligned. A
scroll down menu will appear. Press the camera box.
5. The camera adjustment menu will appear on the top part of the main program window.
6. Press the F76.keyPress thekeyboard.

of the F7 keyAofbox thewill
keyboard.
open in A
thebox will
upper open in the upper left-hand corner of the viewing
left-hand
corner of the viewing areareads
area that that reads
UF=XXUF=XX LF=XX,
LF=XX, with
with XX XX beingthe
being thefocus value. If UF=? LF=? That means the
focus value. If software
UF=? LF=? That means camera focus need adjust.
is not able to see the target. Make sure the images are clear and try again.
7. The focus is adjusted correct when the two values are equal to each other or within 5 numbers
of each other. If the focus numbers are more than 5 numbers apart it is necessary to calibrate
the focus by performing the following steps.
7. Loosen a 3mm set screw on
8. Loosen the bottom
a 3mm surface
set screw onofthe
thebottom
camera sled.
surface of the camera sled.
Back view
for camera
7. Loosen a 3mm set screw on the bottom surface of the camera sled.

7. Loosen a 3mm set screw on the bottom surface of the camera sled.
Back view
for camera
Back view
Back view
for camera
8. Move the camera lens by placing a 2.5mm Allen key in the slot next to the set
screw and move forward or backwards until the display reads UF=80
LF=80. 80, 80 is the most desirable setting; however it may not always be
achievable. 9.
TheMove 8. Move
the
minimum camera thelens
camera
acceptable lens isby45,
by placing
reading aplacing
2.5mm a 2.5mm
45. TheAllen
UF keyAllen
and in key slot
LFthe in the slottonext
next thetosetthescrew
set and move
reading probablyforward
will notormatch,
backwards
screw and until
and amove the numbers
forward
variance of
20 UF
of 10or– backwardsand LF
until
is acceptable.arethe
thedisplay
same orreads UF=80
within 5 numbers of
each other.LF=80.
The higher numbers
80,UF=90 the
80 is theLF=70 better.
most desirableThe setting; however it may not alwaysacceptable.
values 0, 0 and 100, 100 are not be For
For example: UF= 80 LF=65, and are all acceptable
example 65 and 60 areThe acceptable values, however always is adjust
45, 45.for theUFbestandpossible
LF number
readings, but always adjustachievable. minimum
for the best possible acceptable
numbers. reading The
combination.reading probably will not match, and a variance of 10 – 20 is acceptable.
For example: UF= 80 LF=65, and UF=90 LF= 70 are all acceptable
readings, but always adjust for the best possible numbers.
10. Tighten the focus block set screw.

11. Press the Stop button on the main screen. A dialog box will open, asking, “Store offsets into
current job?” with a YES and a NO box 94MS54 below it.Rev. A
12. Select YES.
5-24 Note: After you have set the focus recheck the Perpendicularity
94MS54alignment,
Rev. A as slight
adjustments may be needed. This is caused by the image the camera is seeing
during the original alignment not being in focus.
12.6 Perpendicularity adjustment F8, F9, F10

1. Select a double-sided job and install the films and panel as usual.
2. Press the Maintenance button.
3. On the maintenance screen select Adjust Camera - On

4. Double click the upper left-hand corner of the viewing area of the camera being aligned. A
scroll down menu will appear. Press the camera box.
11.The camera adjust function will appear in the top of the Ors98 window.
11.The camera adjust function will appear in the top of the Ors98 window.
5. The camera adjustment menu will appear on the top part of the main program window.
Perpendicularity (90°) Adjustments F8/F9

Perpendicularity (90°) Adjustments F8/F9
6. Open the upper frame of the tray.
12. Open the upper frame of the tray.
7. Place small hole up of the alignment
12. tool Open
(12D7175A07) on the
the upper frame ofbottom
the tray.glass above the
camera.
13. Place small hole up of the alignment tool (12D7175A07) on the

13. Place small
bottom glasshole up the
above of the alignment tool (12D7175A07) on the
camera.
bottom glass above the camera.
8. Press the F8 and F9 keys of the keyboard to open the alignment circles.
9. Use the mouse (press and hold the left

15.mouse
Use thekey) or finger
mouse (presstoand
draghold
the the
camera directly
left mouse under
key) the to drag the
or finger
alignment tool, so that the tool is centered
camera inside
15. Usedirectly
the the
mouse outer
under the circle.
(press and hold the
alignment leftsomouse
tool, that thekey) or is
tool finger to drag
centered the
inside
camera directly
the outer circle. under the alignment tool, so that the tool is centered inside
Note: Both alignment circles thecan
outer circle. in size to fit the alignment tool. F8 can
be adjusted
be adjusted size - using the “+” key of keyboard to expand the inner circle size
Note: Both alignment circles can be adjusted in size to fit the alignment
and “–” key to reduceNote:the size.
Both F9 can be adjusted the outer circle size - using
tool. alignment
F8 can be circles
adjusted can be -adjusted
size using thein “+”
size to fitofthe
key alignment
keyboard to
“/” key to reduce the size andtool.“*” F8
keycan
to expand.
be adjusted size - using the “+” key of keyboard to
expand the inner circle size and “–” key to reduce the size. F9 can
expand
be the inner
adjusted circlecircle
the outer and “–”
size size key “/”
- using to reduce
key to the F9size
size.the
reduce can
be adjusted
and “*” key the outer circle size - using “/” key to reduce the size
to expand.
and “*” key to expand.
16. Adjustment two screws on the backside of sled to center the inner
16. Adjustment two screws on the backside of sled to center the inner
AccuTray Service Manual circle of the 3mm diameterversion:7/10/12
circle of the 3mm diameter of the alignment tool.
page 123
of the alignment tool.
10. Adjustment
17. two screws
During onthe
adjustment thecamera
backside
17. of During
will need sled
to betorecentered
center the
adjustmenton inner circle of
the camera
the willtheneed
3mm diameter
to be of on the
recentered
the alignment tool.to verify proper alignment. outer ring to verify proper alignment.
outer ring
11. During
18. adjustment the circle
Press F9, outer camerawill will needPress
disappear. to beF10,re-centered on the outer ring to verify proper
inner circle will
alignment.turn yellow. 18. Press F9, outer circle will disappear. Press F10, inner circle will
12. When the two white circles are concentricturn yellow.
to the two circles from the adjustment tool press F10,
inner circle will turn yellow.
19. Using the mouse or finger to drag the circle outside of the alignment
area.
19. Using the mouse or finger to drag the circle outside of the alignment
area.
20. Re-center the circle in the image of the alignment tool and press
F10 again.
13. Using the mouse or An X and
finger toYdrag
valuethe
willcircle
be displayed.
outsideBothof values must
the alignment area
be between 0-80 and then click OK. If either one is out of range,
14. Re-center the circle in the image of the alignment tool and press F10 again. An X and Y value
select cancel and return to step16. Readjust the alignment until an
will be displayed. Both values must 20.be between
Re-center 0-80 theand
circle
theninclick
the image
OK. Ifofeither
the alignment
one is outtool
of and press
acceptable value is reached.
range, select cancel and return to step16. Readjust F10 again. theAn alignment
X and Yuntilvalueanwill
acceptable value Both
be displayed. is values must
reached. be between 0-80 and then click OK. If either one is out of range,
select cancel and return to step16. Readjust the alignment until an
acceptable value is reached.
21. Click OK for confirms.

15. Click OK for confirms.
4MS54 Rev. A 5-17
22. Click Camera 2 in the right bottom corner of the view area.
23. Repeat step9 to 21.
24. Now you can adjust Camera 1 of another arm.
25. Repeat step9 to94MS54
21. Rev. A 5-17
Check the Rotation of the camera F5

1. Load the bottom film. Select an Inner Layer target.
13. Driver Tester for Single DC Drivers

13.1 Using PCom
An individual driver's range of motion can be tested manually by using the PCOM program. To access
the PCOM program, do the following:
1. From the Main Touchscreen, press the "X" indicator in the top right corner of the screen, or
press and hold the upper 1/3 of the display for 1 second.
2. On the pop-up box select No. This will keep the computer turned on and the software turned
off.
3. Double click on the Pcom icon in the Windows menu.
4. The PCOM program will turn on.

4. Type in the serial number of the driver board that's to be tested in the text box
provided. Press the InitDrv button. Once the driver is recognized, the driver
number will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
4. Type in the serial number of the driver board that's to be tested in the text box
5. Type innumber
the serial
willnumber of the
appear in thelower
driverleft
board that's
corner to screen.
of the be tested in the text box provided. Press
the 5.
InitDrv
Pressbutton. Oncebutton.
the Range the driver is recognized,
The selected the driver
driver will number
go through willrange
it's full appear
of in the lower
left corner of the screen.
motion then stop at its maximum travel point. The minimum, maximum, and
home (max-min) values for the selected driver are displayed. The drivers current
position is displayed in the lower right corner (Pos 1).
• The driver can be moved to its minimum position by pressing "Min".
• The driver can be moved to its maximum position by pressing "Max".
• The driver can be moved to its center position by pressing "/ C /".
6. Press the Range button. The selected driver will go through it's full range of motion then stop at
its maximum travel
5. Press the point.
Range The minimum,
button. The selectedmaximum,
driver will and home (max-min)
go through values
it's full range of for the
MS54 Rev. A selectedmotion
driver are displayed. The drivers current position is displayed in the lower right corner
4. Type inthen stop at
the serial its maximum
number travel
of the driver point.that's
board The minimum, in the text5-31
to be testedmaximum, and
box
(Pos 1).home (max-min) values for the selected driver are displayed. The drivers current
 Theposition
driver can be moved
is displayed to its minimum position by1).pressing "Min".
number will appear ininthe
thelower
lower right
left corner
corner of (Pos
the screen.
 The driver can be moved to its maximum position by pressing "Max".
• The driver can be moved to its minimum position by pressing "Min".
 The driver can be moved to its center position by pressing "/ C /".
• The driver can be moved to its maximum position by pressing "Max".
• The driver can be moved to its center position by pressing "/ C /".
MS54 Rev. A 5-31
5. Press the Range button. The selected driver will go through it's full range of
motion then stop at its maximum travel point. The minimum, maximum, and
7. Press the Go button. The selected driver will move back and forth through it's full range of
motion until the Stop button is pressed. A check mark will flash in the Input Box whenever the
switch is made successfully.
 A green status bar indicates that the switch for that driver is aligned properly.
 A yellow status bar indicates marginal switch alignment.
 A red status bar indicates driver switch misalignment.
Note: Camera driver boards will not have a bar indication because the camera switches
only activate during the range cycle.
8. When testing is done press Reset Program to stop communication with a particular driver.
Note: It is necessary to wait approximately 8 seconds before starting communication
with the next driver.
13.2 AT Motor Current Measurement

The motor current is a direct indication of the load on a motor in the Accutray. The motor current can
directly affect the life of the motor. Issues that affect the load on the motor include:
• Motor and coupling mounting
• Interference with frame components
• Settings of bar tension components
• Sticky panel
The best way to measure current is to interrupt the male lead to the tray. We use a Fluke 87 meter with
relative and min/max – range measurement. This allows us to be able to measure the current to a motor
while subtracting the idle current for the system. It also will record the peak current.
Entering the machine from the right side, there is a terminal strip behind a metal shroud. By putting the
meter in series with the first pin, the current to the trays can be measured. This is the +24 VDC pin.
Entering the machine from the right side, there is a terminal strip behind a metal
shroud. By putting the meter in series with the first pin, the current to the trays
can be measured. This is the +24 VDC pin.
v. A 5-33
Glass Replacement Procedure
Tools Required:
Torque Wrench (6 in/lbs)
5.5 mm Nut Driver AccuTray Service Manual version:7/10/12 page 128
3 mm Allen Wrench
Vacuum Gauge
Upper Glass Installation
14.1. Remove
Glass Replacement Procedure
film and panel from tray.
2. Remove the two upper frame vacuum hoses from the stainless fittings.
Tools
3. Required:
Open the upper frame.
Torque Wrench Procedure
Glass Replacement (6 in/lbs)
3 mm Allen Wrench
Tools Required:
Torque Wrench (6 in/lbs)
5.5 mm Nut Driver
3 mm Allen Wrench
14.1 Upper Glass Installation
Vacuum Gauge
Upper Glass Installation
1. Remove film and panel from tray.
1. Remove film and panel from tray.
2. Remove
2. Remove thetwo
the upper
two upper framehosesvacuum
frame vacuum hoses
from the stainless from the stainless fittings.
fittings.
3. Open the upper frame.
4. Remove the upper retaining clip from the gas springs.

5. Close the upper frame.

5-34 94MS54 Rev. A
5. Close the upper frame. 6. Remove the two outside screws from the hinge retaining plates. Loosen
6. Remove the two outside screws fromremaining
the two the hingescrews
retaining plates.
and rotate theLoosen theoftwo
plates out the remaining
way.
94MS54 Rev. A
screws and rotate the plates out of the way.
7. Lift the upper frame from the back until the hinges are clear, and then
pull the frame forward and up to remove.
10. Remove the glass vacuum hoses from the manifold block.
7. Lift the upper frame from the back until the hinges are clear, and then
pull the frame forward and up to remove.
7. Lift the upper frame from the back until the hinges are clear, and then pull the frame forward
and up to remove. Place the frame face up on a flat and clean surface.

8. Place a foam pad from the new glass packing box on a flat surface.
9. Place the upper frame face up on the foam pad.
11. Remove the sixteen nuts, nylon washers and rubber washers from the
glass post studs. Discard this hardware, it is not reusable.
94MS54 Rev. A 5-35
9. Remove the sixteen screws and o-rings from the outside edge of the frame.
Note: Discard the hardware, it is not reusable.
11. Remove the sixteen nuts, nylon washers and rubber washers from the
glass post studs. Discard this hardware, it is not reusable.
10. Carefully lift the frame away from the glass. Set the old glass aside.
11. Remove the old glass vacuum seals. Discard the old glass seals they are not reusable.
12. Install new glass vacuum seals. Be careful not to stretch the seal material during installation, it
will shrink later and cause vacuum leaks. Make the ends of the seal overlap about 1/8 of an
inch, then butt the ends together to prevent shrinkage gaps. Also offset the two breaks in the
seals, this willlift
12. Carefully reduce vacuum
the frame lossfrom
away in case
the of gaps.
glass. Set the old glass aside.
94MS54 Rev. A
12. Carefully lift the frame away from the glass. Set the old glass aside.
14. Remove
14. Removethe old
theglass vacuum
old glass seals.seals.
vacuum Discard the old
Discard theseals, they are
old seals, theynot
arereusable.
not reusable.
15. Install new new
15. Install glassglass
vacuum seals.seals.
vacuum Be careful not to
Be careful notstretch the seal
to stretch the material
seal material
during installation,
during it will
installation, shrink
it will later later
shrink and cause
and causevacuum leaks.leaks.
vacuum MakeMake the the
endsends
of theof seal overlap
the seal aboutabout
overlap 1/8 of
1/8anofinch, then then
an inch, butt the
buttends together
the ends together
to prevent shrinkage
to prevent gaps.gaps.
shrinkage AlsoAlsooffsetoffset
the two breaks
the two in thein seals,
breaks this this
the seals,
will will
reduce vacuum loss in case of gaps.
reduce vacuum loss in case of gaps.
13. Remove the new glass from the crate or box and remove the protective cover on the top side of
16. With the frame still still
upside down, placeplaceit onitthe
on foam pad. pad.
the glass.
holes to the front) as the glass will fit either 16. With
way. the frame upside down, the foam
17. 17.
Remove the protective sheeting from the new glass.
14. Cut the vacuum hose into two pieces Remove same length
the protective as onfrom
sheeting thetheold newglass
glass. tool. Insert the two pieces
18. Install
18. the new
Install the glass,glass,
new verifing that itthat
verifing is upper
it is glassglass
upper by checking
by that the
checking thatholes
the holes
of vacuum hose to the two elbow for the
fittings.
registration pins are plugged. Also check for proper orientation (plugged
94MS54 Rev. A for the registration pins are plugged. Also check for proper orientation5-37 (plugged
15. Install the94MS54
new glass,
Rev. A verifying that it is upper glass by checking that the holes 5-37 for the
registration pins are plugged. Also check for proper orientation (plugged holes to the front) as
the glass will fit either way.
16. When the glass is placed in the frame make sure that the glass seals did not move and that there
is a good connection between glass and seal. Also make sure the glass is placed in the center of
the frame with even space between frame and glass on all four sides.
17. With the frame still upside down, move one of the frame edges to the front of the table so that
it is possible to reach the mounting locations.
18.
19. Make sure that Useallthe
thenew o-rings,
glass washer,
posts are seatedand screws
in the to mount
vacuum theIfglass.
channel. the Make sure only to hand tighten the
posts are not screws
seatedat properly
this point.they will pop off during the hardware
installation. Also inspectallthe
19. Repeat on forglass
edgesseals
untiltoallbe16sure
screws
theyare installed.
have not moved
20. Unless
or have been pinched. when the lower glass is replaced, reinstall the upper frame in the tray. Be sure to reseat
the floating bars before seating the hinges. Apply gentle downward pressure to seat the hinges.
20. With the frame Youstill
will upside down, move
hear a popping soundthe as frame forward enough to
they seat.
allow access to four of the glass post studs on one side.
21. Using new hardware, (rubber washers, nylon washers and nuts) place a
rubber washer over the first glass post stud.
Note: Using the torque wrench provided, tighten all sixteen screws on the upper glass.
The torque wrench is pre-set to 6 in/lb, so when tightening the screws, do not exceed
the 6 in/lb requirement. Damage to the glass can occur if too much force is
applied.
21. Replace the hinge retaining plates and screws.
23. Reinstall the gas spring retaining clips.
Close the upper frame.
24. Insert the film vacuum hose to the film vacuum manifold.
14.2 Lower Glass Installation

1. Lock the handles and open the tray.
2. Remove the sixteen screws and o-rings from the outside edge of the frame.
Lower Glass Installation
1. Remove lower glass (follow steps 1-9 of previous section.)

2. Open the tray.
3. Cover the vent holes and plexi-glass of the AT30 nose section to prevent
hardware from falling in.
Note: Discard the hardware, it is not reusable.
3. Remove thetrayglass
6. Prop the vacuum
open slightly hosesa wooden
by placing from the
blockmanifold
about 4x4x6 block.
at the
front so that you can reach under it. Place the block so that the tray rests
on the bearing rail arm, avoiding the camera arm.
4. Prop the tray open slightly by placing a wooden block about 4x4x6 at the front so that you can
reach under it. Place the block so that the tray rests on the bearing rail arm, avoiding the camera
5. Remove the sixteen nuts, nylon washers and rubber o-rings from the
arm.glass post studs. Discard this hardware, it is not reusable.
7. Push the glass up from underneath. Have a second person remove the
glass from above.
5-42 94MS54 Rev. A

6. Prop the tray open slightly by placing a wooden block about 4x4x6 at the
front so that you can reach under it. Place the block so that the tray rests
on the bearing rail arm, avoiding the camera arm.
5. Push the glass up from underneath. Have a second person remove the glass from above.
7. Push the glass up from underneath. Have a second person remove the
glass from above.
5-42 94MS54 Rev. A
6. Remove the old glass vacuum seals. Be careful not to damage the glass in the top tray when
8. Remove any glass post studs that are still in the tray.
removing and installing the lower glass tool.
9. Remove the old glass vacuum seals. Discard these seals, they are not
7. Install new glass vacuum seals. Be careful not to stretch the seal material during installation, it
reusable.
will
10. Install newlater
shrink glass and
vacuumcause vacuum
seals. Be leaks.
careful not Make
to stretch thematerial
the seal ends of the seal overlap about 1/8 of an
inch,during
theninstallation,
butt theitends together
will shrink later andtocause
prevent
vacuumshrinkage gaps. Also offset the two breaks in the
leaks. Make the
seals,ends of the
this sealreduce
will overlap about
vacuum1/8 of loss
an inch,
inthen
casebuttof
thegaps.
ends together
to prevent shrinkage gaps. Also offset the two breaks in the seals, this
8. Remove the protective
will reduce vacuum loss insheeting
case of gaps. from the new glass.
9. Cut the new vacuum hose into two pieces same length as on the old glass tool and insert the
hose pieces to the elbow fittings in the new glass.
10. Install the new glass, verifying that it is lower glass by checking that the holes for the
registration pins are open. Also check for proper orientation (holes to the front) as the glass will
fit either way.
11. Inspect the glass seals to be sure they were not moved or pinched.
12. Use the new o-rings, washer, and screws to mount the glass. Make sure only to hand tighten the
screws at this point.
13. After 2-4 screws are installed, open the tray and remove the prop block.
14. Repeat on all for edges until all 16 screws are installed.
15. Using the torque wrench provided, tighten all sixteen screws on the lower glass tool.
16. Connect a vacuum hoses to the lower frame vacuum manifold.
11. Remove the protective sheeting from the new glass.
14.3 Tray12.Removal Procedure
Install the new glass, verifying that it is lower glass by checking that the
holes for the registration pins are open. Also check for proper orientation
Tools Required:
94MS54 Rev. A 3/16” Allen Wrench 5-43
AccuTray Service Manual
4. Remove the Main PCB cover located inside the cabinet on theversion:7/10/12
front wall. page 133
Remove the ribbon cable at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
3 mm Allen Wrench
Phillips Head screwdriver
Small flat tip screwdriver
1. Turn unit off, allow the unit4.4.toRemove
complete
Remove the its cool
the Main
Main PCB down
PCB cover
cover cycle
located and
inside thedisconnect power.
cabinet on the front wall.
Removethe
Remove theribbon
ribbon cable
cable at
at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
2. Remove the Main PCB cover located inside the cabinet on the front wall.
3. Remove the ribbon cable at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
5. Locate the four 7 /16" hex bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main
tower. Remove all four bolts.
4. Locate the four 7/16" hex bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main tower. Remove all
four bolts. 5. Locate
5. Locate the four 77//16"" hex
the four
16
hex bolts
bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main
tower. Remove
tower. Remove all
all four
four bolts.
bolts.
6. Slide the nose piece about 6 inches away from the cabinet. Locate and
disconnect all multi-pin connectors and vacuum lines below the nose on the
right side. Also disconnect the Emergency Stop switch on the left side.
5. Slide the nose piece about 6 inches away from the cabinet. Locate and disconnect all multi-pin
connectors and vacuum lines below the nose on the right side. Also disconnect the Emergency Stop
switch on the left side.
94MS54 Rev. A 5-47

94MS54 Rev. A 5-47
94MS54 Rev. A 5-47
6. Disconnect the 5 pin din cable plugged into the 10 memory keypad under the right front portion of
the nose piece.
7. Disconnect the 5 pin din cable plugged into the 10 memory keypad under the
right front portion of the nose piece.
8. 8.Returning under
Returning thethe
under nose piece,
nose remove
piece, thethe
remove protective cable
protective wrap
cable andand
wrap
disconnect
7. Disconnect the 5 pin thethe
din cable
disconnect remaining
plugged harnesses.
into
remaining the 10 memory keypad under the
harnesses.
9. 9.Carefully slide
Carefully thethe
slide nose piece
nose offoff
piece of the structure
of the andand
structure setset
it aside.
it aside.
7. Carefully slide the nose piece off of the structure and set it aside.
10. Remove the upper frame vacuum tubes from the rear of the upper frame.
5-48 94MS54 Rev. A
11. Using an M3 Allen wrench, remove the vacuum tube tie down clamp and
94MS54
94MS54 Rev.
Rev. A A 5-49
5-49
ground wire.
9. Using an M3 Allen wrench, remove the vacuum tube tie down clamp and ground wire.
11. Using an M3 Allen wrench, remove the vacuum tube tie down clamp and
ground wire.
10. Using a Philip head screwdriver, remove the screws that attach the cable track to the cabinet.
track to the cabinet.
12. Using a phillips head screwdriver, remove the screws that attach the cable
track to the cabinet.
13. Using a small flat tip screwdriver, remove the connector from the back of the
frame.
11. Using a small flat tip screwdriver, remove the connector from the back of the frame.
13. Using a small flat tip screwdriver, remove the connector from the back of the
frame.
12. Moving to the other side of the cabinet, locate the drive chain access hole towards the rear of the
cabinet. Push the frame in manually until the drive chain bolt lines up with the access hole. Using
the 3/16” Allen wrench, remove the bolt.
94MS54 Rev. A 5-51
94MS54 Rev. A 5-51

13. The frame is now unattached to the chain and is free to slide back and forth.
Be careful not to let the frame slide off the front off the machine.
14. Carefully slide the frame off of the rail and remove. Repeat steps 8-11 for the lower frame.
15. Reverse procedure to install new frame.

15. AccuTray Diagnostics
15.1 Ors98 Warning Messages
When does the What does the What is the course

Warning Message
message occur? message mean? of action?
If the GO button is
Close the tray, press the
Close tray before pressed with the tray Alignment will not occur if
GO button.
aligning open, or if the tray the tray is opened.
Check tray switch SW11.
switch is bad.
If you try to send the tray
into the exposure cabinet The tray will not move in Close the tray, then press
Close tray before replace
while in the open the open position. GO.
position.
If the GO button is
pressed without first
Replace panel before Panel must be replaced Open the tray and replace
opening the tray and
aligning before alignment occurs. the panel.
replacing the previously
aligned panel.
Do you want to store all
After manual camera Press YES to store offset
Store all offsets in offsets in current job file?
alignment using the data. Press NO to not
current job? Doing so will overwrite the
touchscreen. store offset data.
existing offsets for that job.
If the EXPLAIN button is There are currently no

Press CANCEL to return
Video file... not found pressed and the video file embedded AVI files
to main screen
selected is not found. installed on the AccuTray.
ORS98 will be A fatal error has occured The program will be Call OLEC service
terminated while running ORS98. terminated. department.
The changes made when

Restart program to make editing the preferences will Close the program and
When editing preferences.
changes become effective not become effective unless restart.
the program is restarted.
Initialization sequence was

User break... During initialization. stopped (operator N/A
intervention)
15.2 Error Messages

When does the What does the What is the course of
Error Message
message occur? message mean? action?
Reset the camera and job
Offsets are too large offset values to zero and re -
During alignment, the initialize tray.
movement required to
Axis out of range achieve alignment is Check to make sure the
Film setup wrong
greater than the axis' artwork is properly punched.
maximum range.
Check to make sure the tooling
Bad panel
hole size is not too large.
Software cannot
During alignment or Check camera illumination,
Bad 135 degree mark recognize the top film
setup. alignment, and focus.
image -
Software cannot
Bad 45 degree mark recognize the top film
image -
There is a bad setting for
Bit active state must be 0 During start-up (reading Edit the INI file.
the parallel port output
or 1 for... [Parallel Port] of the tray's INI file).
bit in the INI file.
Confirm hole quality.

Confrim hole diameter
During setup or Poor target or hole image matches job setup targets.
Bad holes or marks
alignment or incorrect hole size. Confirm that the hole is not
partially tinted.
Confirm illumination.
Software cannot
Bad horizontal marks recognize the bottom film
image -
Software cannot
Bad vertical marks recognize the bottom film
image -
Conflict of Com devices
on Com 2 preventing Check Com port 2. Exit
Cannot open Comport During setup.
communication between program, reboot.
computer and tray.
Bad driver or incorrect

driver serial number Check INI file, or low level
Communication error During initialization.
entered. Driver number maintence for driver settings.
and axis is displayed.
DC Drivers During loading or Software does not see

communication error unloading of film. axis.
Error Message
Any time motors are Driver position is < 768

End of Axis not found
moving. or > 64788.
"Import New Job"

Error in TextFile:... button. Feature not N/A N/A
available.
Find the correct INI file

File...not exists..., Startup
During ORS98 startup INI file missing. and replace it in the ORS
error
directory. Restart program.
Cameras can't see both

Hole/Marks undefined During alignment
target centers.
Incorrect data for Wrong type of data

Any editing. Review and reenter data.
selected field entered.
Incorrect job definition Data base operation. X/O bad calculation. Call OLEC.
When selecting jobs on A job has been selected Define the job or select
Job definition not found
the Job screen. that is not defined. another.
You've attempted to
When editing jobs on the assign a new job name Create a different job
Jobname already exists
Job screen. that is already used name.
elsewhere.
Check for:
Faulty or misadjusted
During tray Driver position is < 768 switch.
Limit switch not found
initialization. or > 64788. Broken wire.
Bad driver.
Mechanical obstruction.
Check:
Vacuum sensor.
Broken or loose wires.
Lower Tray: No films During the loading of Sensor does not detect
Loose film.
vacuum film. vacuum for film.
Vacuum generator.
Low incoming pressure.
Leaks in air line.
Check:
Vacuum sensor.
Lower Tray: No glass During the loading of Sensor does not detect Broken or loose wires.
vacuum film. vacuum for the frame. Vacuum generator.
Leaks in air line.
Error Message
The image recognition
system does not
Right or Left Marks not During job setup and recognize the upper
found alignment. and/or lower film
marks, or the panel
hole.
The motor/driver
Check for mechanical
displayed on the error
resistance. Go into Low
Initialization or message has stalled
Motor stall error... Level Maintenance mode
alignment. before it has reached its
and manually activate the
endpoint after 100
motor in question.
attempts.
Offset values entered
When entering Offset
New Position too large. are greater than the
values in Low Level
No change. maximum axis position
Maintenance.
values.
Offset values entered
New Position to small. are smaller than the
values in Low Level
No change. minimum axis position
Maintenance.
values.
New Position must be a Offset value must be a
values in Low Level Enter numeric value.
number number only.
Maintenance.
During start up of Axis assigned to

No Driver found for...
ORS98. parallel port is bad.
When importing job There are no more job

No more JobFiles N/A
files. files to import.
Video card is not

At the end of installed, or the Call OLEC service
No PCVision installed
initialization. software and/or drivers department.
not installed properly.
When entering Offset Offset values must be

Not allowed when in Type values in the dialogue
values in Low Level typed in when in the
Fixed Offset Mode box provided.
Maintenance. Fixed Offset mode.
Offset values are

Not allowed when in determined visually by
values in Low Level
Visual Control Mode clicking and dragging
Maintenance.
the provided "camera".
Not found/1, find Mark

Center

Center

Center
Error Message
The number entered Enter a number that falls

During any parameter
Number out of range! falls outside the within specified
change.
specified parameters. parameters.
An alpha charecter was

Offset must be a number; During Job offset
entered in a field that Enter a numeric value.
Not Accepted editing.
accepts numbers only.
Only numbers allowed

for offset
Check artwork and panel.

Out of align error Unable to meet Increase retries by 1.
After alignment failure.
tolerance alignment tolerance. Verify Align Error
Tolerance setting.
Out of range:...
Out of tolerance - Correct film plotting error.

After alignment attempt. Film-Film mismatch.
Film/Film Verify tolerance setting.
Check panel hole drilling

Out of tolerance - Lower Panel - Lower Film
After alignment attempt. or film plotting. Verify
Film/Board mismatch.
tolerance setting.
Check panel hole drilling

Out of tolerance - Upper Panel - Upper Film
After alignment attempt. or film plotting. Verify
Film/Board mismatch
tolerance setting.
Search object too big for

Call OLEC.
view window
This message will be Correct the previous error

After initialization
Unable to initialize tray displayed after a more message to eliminate this
attempt.
specific error message. one.
Check:
Vacuum sensor.
Upper tray: No glass During the loading of Sensor does not detect Broken or loose wires.
vacuum film. vacuum for glass. Vacuum generator.
Leaks in air line.
Check:
Vacuum sensor.
Broken or loose wires.
Upper tray: No films During the loading of Sensor does not detect
Loose film.
vacuum film. vacuum for the film.
Vacuum generator.
Leaks in air line.
15.3 Error Logging
All errors associated with ORS98 are logged in a database.
15.4 Error Log

This screen displays a list of all errors, with the latest error listed on top. Information displayed:
• Date and Time that the error occurred
• Job Name
• Work Order Number
• Tray - (upper or lower)
• Error message
The errors can be sorted by clicking on the Label name above each row of data.
The error messages can be saved in a text file.
1. On the error log screen check the Create text archive box.
2. Select Begin date from the calendar.
3. Select End date from the calendar.
4. Click the archive button.
5. A text file named todays date error log.txt will be saved in the same directory where the ORS98
program is located.
15.5 AT30 Data Analysis Program

The AccuTray Data Analysis program is a utility designed to aid in displaying, analyzing, printing or archiving
the data acquired by the OLEC AccuTray exposure frame.
15.6 Highlights
• Display all recorded exposure data in a line format.
• Save exposure data to disk file. This allows for historical analysis of data.
• Apply simple statistical formulas to data.
15.7 Operation Instructions

1. Turn on computer.
2. Exit from ORS98.
3. On the desktop double click the At30Data icon.
4. The menu screen for the AT30 Data program will appear.
5. To select a job press the Source button.

6. On the pop-up screen select the directory where the results from the ORS98 are stored.
Most commonly C:\olec\Ors98 v2.02\PublicDb\Results.db
7. Double click on the Results.db file.
8. In the Job name and Work order number fields you should see all current job names and all
possible work order numbers. To have the computer sort possible combinations of jobs and work
orders press the Search button.
9. Now press the arrow in the Search results field to view all possible combinations. To select a
job/work order click the job on the role down menu.
10. It is possible to select jobs over a specific time period. In the Time box select the beginning and
ending times and dates of the jobs to be viewed.
Note: If a time frame is used instead of a job name and work order number, the Job
name box in the upper left corner must be changed to Any Job, and the Work
order number field must be changed to Any Number.
11. Select Upper and/or Lower tray in the Tray box.
12. Select either Waiting Jobs or Archived Jobs in the Select Jobs for view box. This selection must
match the location of the job in ORS98.
13. In the Output text file name box check the Run Notepad and the Auto file name boxes if you
want the program to create a txt file and if you want to view the file in Notepad. It is possible later
to import the file to excel.
14. Press the Extract button. In the pop-up window there are two types of information that can be
extracted - Raw data and Statistical data. Data can be extracted in either mm or inches. Select All
in the lower right side of the window to extract all possible data (Raw + Statistical).
Note: It is recommended that the first time a job result is extracted, select All to get a
feel for what kind of data you are interested in. Otherwise, select None to clear
the screen and choose the parameters you want.
15. Last, press the Go button. An information screen will pop up.
To view all the extracted data press the OK button. If at this point get a File is to large… Message,
press the OK button and the file will be displayed on your screen.
15.8 Extracted Data File Sample
Data extracted using: AT30Data 2.0
Settings:
Job Name: LT-DoubleSided
Work order number: ?
Data Source: C\Olec\Results\PublicDB\results.db
Time: 02/07/2001 11:38:45 AM
Film Deviations Panel Upper Film Tray Date Time Job Name
NB FF UFP LFP TOL XL YL XR YR XL YL XR YR TOL

0 -27 -31 -4 300 9 12 13 4 4 -12 -23 -18 20 L 12/06/2000 6:37:00 AM LT-Double Sided
309 -49 -44 5 300 15 4 10 -1 28 -4 -21 -15 20 L 12/06/2000 6:37:17 AM
310 -36 -41 -5 300 -10 1 -5 -11 8 -12 -28 -20 20 L 12/06/2000 6:37:59 AM
311 -19 -43 -24 300 0 0 24 -5 13 -11 -6 -11 20 L 12/06/2000 6:38:42 AM
312 -39 -43 -4 300 -3 -3 1 1 7 -11 -32 -8 20 L 12/06/2000 6:39:24 AM
313 -55 -43 12 300 15 -3 3 6 23 -4 -32 1 20 L 12/06/2000 6:40:07 AM
314 -47 -45 2 300 11 1 9 -8 21 -3 -26 -1 20 L 12/06/2000 6:40:50 AM
315 -33 -50 -17 300 6 3 23 -2 22 -4 -11 1 20 L 12/06/2000 6:41:32 AM
316 -28 -52 -24 300 -9 -1 15 11 12 4 -16 6 20 L 12/06/2000 6:42:15 AM
317 -57 -56 1 300 8 0 7 10 27 -3 -30 1 20 L 12/06/2000 6:42:57 AM
318 -53 -52 1 300 8 8 7 1 18 5 -35 8 20 L 12/06/2000 6:43:39 AM
Results statistic:
Number of records: 722
Number of job setups: 12
Number of exposed panels: 637
Number of retrys: 97
LT-DoubleSided / ? Min Max Avg Std Deviation

Deviations - Film to film: -68 24 -30 20
UFilm to panel: -133 42 -51 34
LFilm to panel: -105 64 -21 34
Number of panels: No. of panels Time-> Min Max Average Std Deviation
637 20 3274 51 131
Operators: Unknown 581 20 3274 49 135

Supervisor: 56 42 428 74 66
15.9 Troubleshooting
If there is a problem aligning the panels, check the following
1) Is the artwork punched so that when it is placed on the artwork pins, the upper and lower targets
are reasonably aligned? If not, re-punch the artwork that seems to be out of alignment.
2) Does the alignment target on the touch screen seem crisp? If not, redo step 3, 4, or 5 from above.
3) Are the alignment holes in the panel perfectly round? If not, the panel can not be used.
4) Are the panels scrubbed before they were laminated? If not, the panels must be scrubbed before
they are laminated.
5) Are there any tooling marks overlapping the alignment holes? If so, the panels can not be used.
Either the tooling marks must be replaced or the alignment holes must be moved.
6) Are there any rough edges that could stick to the bottom glass and stop movement of the panel? If
so, the panels must be scrubbed before lamination or the panel must be scraped.
7) Is the deviation between the top and bottom artwork greater than the specified tolerance from the
job menu? If so, adjust the tolerance or re-plot one or both of the artworks.
8) Is the deviation between the artwork and the panel greater than the specified tolerance from the job
menu? If so, plot the artwork to a fitting scale, or redefine the tolerance in the job menu.
9) Does the alignment error message persistently show up? A) Redo step 3, 4, or 5 from above. B)
Check the align. tol. In the job menu. If unreasonable small for the job, change to a better-suited
number for the job.
10) Does the computer lock-up after the job is selected? Reboot the computer, start ORS98, and follow
the scroll bar when setting up the job. (In some instances the computer lock up if a job is selected
before the tray is initialized.
11) Does the Motor stall error box appear? If so, note the driver number shown in the Motor stall error
box. Turn off ORS98. Start the Pcom program. Test the driver in Pcom. If there is no
communication between the tray and the computer install a new driver. Don’t forget to update the
.INI file. If the driver communication is working check if the flat part of the pin protrude through
the artwork and prevents the pin from moving. Spacing out the pin assembly can solve this
problem.
15.10 Saving Images That the Processor Failed.

For trouble shooting it is important to have images of what the processor can not process. To capture images as
the machine is running it is necessary to press Ctrl+ S.
now save all the images that the processor can not process. The images will be saved in the same folder as the
ORS98 program is stored in. It will save up to 15 images. When it reaches 15, it will start to replace the oldest
saved images with the latest. The feature will stay active until the program is turned off or the Ctrl+ S are pressed
again.
15.11 Help Videos

When the Explain button is pressed, the video selection screen will appear. Press any of the buttons that
contains a text and a short video with the subject selected will be played.
15.12 Changes to the ORS98.ini file

[VideoExplain]
VideoButton-0=Initialize Tray
VideoFile-0=C:\Video\AT-Init.avi
VideoButton-1=Select Job
VideoFile-1=C:\Video\AT-Job.avi
VideoButton-2=Load Film
VideoFile-2=C:\Video\AT Film Load.avi
VideoButton-3=Setup 1st Panel
VideoFile-3=C:\Video\AT-1stPanel.avi
VideoButton-5=Align Mask to Copper Fiducial
VideoFile-5=C:\Video\AT-2S-Mask.avi
VideoButton-7=Change A Lamp
VideoFile-7=C:\Video\LampChange.avi
VideoButton-8=JPCA Training Video
VideoFile-8=C:\Video\JPCA-Training.avi
VideoButton-11=Clean the Glass Proceedure
VideoFile-11=C:\Video\AT-CleanGlass.avi
Note: The video folder must be added to the C drive. It is possible to change location
of the video folder, and then the location in the ini files must also be changed.
16. AT30 Integrator Diagnostics

16.1 Output/Input Diagnostics
One of the many advancements OLEC has introduced to the field is the ability of its equipment to run a self-
diagnostic check. All integrator-activated functions and all internal and external switches can be checked out on
the integrator display by using the numerical keypad.
16.2 Output Functions Check
[SEL_]. This places you in select mode.

• Press the key to enter the Diagnostics mode. The number in the
Vacuum window will be the sum of all values for peripherals that are
turned On.
[o000] Press the key to reset the Diagnostics mode. This turns Off all
peripherals. Therefore the Vacuum window will indicate [o000].

• Refer to the Functions Table.
• Press the number key to actuate the desired function. The numerical
value shown in the table should appear in the Vacuum window.
• Press the function key number again to turn off the function. Press the
key to turn off all functions.
• Press the key twice to return to normal operation.
16.3 Functions Table
Function Value
Heat Exchanger Solenoids [0001]
Blower On/Off [0002]
Upper Vacuum Pump On/Off [0004]
Lower Vacuum Pump On/Off [0008]
Work Light and Nose Section Fans On/Off [0016]
Motor Direction Control [0032]
Frame Motor On/Off [0064]
Motor Fast/ Slow [0128]
All controls off [0000]
Return to Select mode [SEL_]
1 Heat Exchanger
5 Viewing Lights 6 Motor Direction 2 Blowers

7 Motor Power
8 Motor Speed
1 Heat Exchanger
3 Top Vacuum Pump
4 Bottom Vacuum Pump
16.4 Input Switch Check

The switch check can be done while in the Select mode.
Press the key on the integrator to power up the light, the front remote
[SEL_]. This places you in select mode.
Press the key. The Exposure window on the integrator will show
various numbers as the switches or keys are closed.
Examples: With the upper frame moved in, the side access door switches closed,
and the key pressed on the nose section, the lower integrator display should
read [0165]. With the lower frame in, the display should read [0172].
DOOR FRAME SWITCH FRAME NUMBER DISPLAYED
128 +32 +4 +1 = [0165] (Upper Frame In)
128 +32 +4 +8 = [0172] (Lower Frame In)
16.5 Switch Table

Switch Value Function
1 Upper frame in (labeled "frame")
4 Frame switch
8 Lower frame in (labeled "frame")
16 key, nose section
32 Door/emergency switch
128 key, nose section
16.6 Typical values that you will see when all switches are good.
Upper tray in, Frame switch closed, Door and Emergency switches
closed.
[0037] The bottom display should read [0037].
[0165] When the button is pushed the value should change to [0165].
Lower tray in, Frame switch closed, Door and Emergency switches
closed.
[0044] The Exposure window should read [0044].

16.7 Error Handling System

If an error occurs, the machine displays an error code to aid in troubleshooting. The error codes defined are:
[Err_] The message [Err_] will appear in the Vacuum window, and a number in
the Exposure window. Look up the number below for a description of

the condition.
Description
[0001] time.
Frames did not reach intended position after the maximum amount of
Solution: Determine why. Were the frames moving at all? Did they get close? Is something obstructing their
movement?
See I/O test mode for instructions on how to test motors and switches.
[0002] Not used.
[0003] Internal error. Please call your service rep.
Solution: Cycle the power switch.
Please note the circumstances under which this error occurred; was the machine exposing? Calibrating? Idle?
Were new exposure values being entered? What was the last button pressed? How long ago?
[0004] Frames not in position at start of exposure.
Solution: Put the frames in position by cycling the power switch. If the frames
don't move, check the wiring to the frame motor and the frame position
sensing switches. If everything is OK, and this error still occurs, call your
service representative. See also the I/O test mode description.
[0005] Switch error. The machine thinks both frames are at the exposure
position.
Possible causes are: Bad cable between master board and memory board,
switches has failed, bad or no connection to switches.
[0006] Communication error. Remote board is not communicating with the
master board.
Possible causes are: no power to remote board, bad or disconnected
communication cable.
[0007] Remote board has reset or temporarily lost power. After clearing the
error, normal function should continue.
0008] At least one lamp intensity/frame/surface has not been calibrated.
Solution: Ensure the unit has been completely calibrated.
[0009] Vacuum has not reached desired levels.
Solution: Determine why. Does the vacuum pump turn on? Do you have
vacuum at the pump itself without anything else connected? Does the blanket
seal have any cuts? Do all hoses and fittings seal tightly? Is integrator
programmed correctly?
[0012] Temperature has exceeded set limits.
Solution: Determine why. Does the water temperature and flow meet
specification? Is there air in the system?
16.8 Typical values that you will see when a fault occurs.
[0004] Indicates neither frame in position, magnetic frame switches closed, and
does not have the correct reading from either the door switches or
emergency button.
[0005] Indicates upper frame in position, magnetic frame switches closed, and
emergency button.
[0012] Indicates lower frame in position, magnetic frame switches closed, and
emergency button.
• Whatever the switch value display reads when the button is pressed
and the value does not increase by a value of 128 the switch is bad.
• Whatever the switch value display reads when the switch is
pressed and the value does not increase by a value of 16 the switch
is bad.
17. Lamp Changing Instructions

17.1 Lamp Changing Instructions
The lamps and safety glass may be very hot and cause burns. Prior to changing the lamp, ensure the
lamp head is turned off and allowed to complete its cool down cycle.
OLEC recommends that every year you unplug your light, remove the safety glass, and clean the
glass and reflector with denatured alcohol and a soft cloth. Lamps should be checked for excessive
exposure times and should be replaced if exposure time has become too long.
• Support the safety glass on the lamp head and loosen the two thumbscrews to release the
glass. Carefully slide the holding brackets up or down. The safety glass will slide from
either side of the lamp head.
• Loosen the thumbscrews for both lamp wire spade lugs.
• Disconnect and remove the lamp by removing the spade lugs and wires from under the
thumbscrews.
• Carefully lift each end of the lamp (one end at a time) out of the holders and remove the
lamp from the lamp head.
10
Shutter
5
4
Lamp
• Clean the reflector with a mild solvent, such as denatured alcohol, and a clean soft cloth.
Use glass cleaner to clean the safety glass. Dirty reflectors and glass can substantially
reduce light output.
• Wear the white lightweight fabric gloves that are provided and unpack the new lamp. Clean
the lamp with the alcohol wipe included.
• Place each end of the new OLITE lamp (one end at a time) on the holders. DO NOT touch
the lamp with your hands. Contamination of the quartz tube of the lamp with skin oils will
shorten the life considerably and may lead to failure.
• Reconnect the lamp by fully inserting the spade lugs on the connecting wires under BOTH
thumbscrews and tighten. Ensure the wires are positioned so they do not touch the lamp
body or the reflector and cooling tube.
• Insert the safety glass into the holders and push against the housing. Ensure the safety
interlock lever is positioned firmly underneath the glass towards the lamp and not squeezed
to the side. Also, ensure the safety glass is loose enough to allow for heat expansion during
an exposure. The light will not operate unless the safety glass is installed properly. When
the safety glass is properly installed, it will be able to move slightly. If the safety glass is
installed too tight, it may be damaged during use.
Note: OLITE Lamps are specifically designed for OLEC and undergo careful testing
and preparation before shipment. They carry the OLEC Warranty of Satisfaction.
Substitutes and copies of lamps are not approved by OLEC, nor do they carry our
Warranty. Use approved OLEC replacement parts ONLY!
18. Assembly Diagram

18.1 AT30 Main Frame.
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER
62-07-02000 AT30HR Alignment Frame
DESCRIPTION
1 1 62-07-02001 A30HR Lower Frame
2 1 62-07-02002 AT30 Base Frame
3 1 62-07-02003 AT30 Upper frame assy
18.2 AT30 Lower Frame View A
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 3
1 1 12-07-26107 Reference Block Pin, Bearing
2 2 41-90278A312 Shoulder Bolt M3 Thread, 1
5mm Long 4
3 2 41SM5SHC.16MM SOCKET HEAD CAP
SCREW 5x16mm
4 2 41SM5WFR Washer, Flat S. Stl M5 6
5 2 43BLB152 Bearing 10x4x4 7 Parts List
6 1 43PPR10 Pin, Spring 2.5x 16 mm 3 ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
7 2 5
7 3 43PPR11 Pin, Spring 2.5 x 8mm 1 1 12-07-26101 AT30HR Lower frame
8 1 43SPR94 Spring, Tension
9 2 1 12-07-6177 Block vacuum Distribution
9 1 D6159B Shaft, Tension Spring
13 3 1 12-07-6178 Manifold Film Vac Lower
62-07-26107 4 8 12D6102A07 DISK, SHIM 18x0.5mm
5 4 12D6103 Block, Stop Switch
6 2 12D6104A76 Pivot Block, Gasspring
7 1 12D6105A76 Plate Upper Frame
8 2 12D6108A76 Mount, Linear Rail (End)
9 4 12D6109A76 Mount, Linear Mount (Inner)
10 2 12D6114A76 PLATE, LATCH RETAINER
11 2 12D6193A67 Block Hinge Lower
12 1 12D6239A76 Plat, Hinge Retainer Right
13 1 62-07-26107 Reference Block Pin
14 1 62-07-26110 Block Reference, Pivot Right
4 15 1 62-07-26111 Block Reference, Pivot Left
16 1 62-07-26117 Reference Block Pin
17 4 62-07-26175 Lift Cylinder Dual Port LS
5 18 1 99-59135-010 Switch Magnetic Hamlin
16 21 8 41SM4SHF.8M SOC.HD.SCREW FLAT
M 4x8mm
23 18 43PPR11 Pin, Spring 2.5 x 8mm
24 2 43FIT197 FITTING, MINI
STRAIGHT-M5
18
17
14
9
3
62-07-26655 Lower Frame

6
1
9
17
2
11
15
18.3 AT30 Lower Frame view B
12D6109
43PPR11
62-07-26655 Lower Frame B
DETAIL B
SCALE 1
62-07-26175 5
12D6109 1
Parts List
43PPR11 8 ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 12-07-26176 Lift Cylinder Body LS
62-07-26175 3
2
3
1 12-07-26180
1 12-07-26181
Piston, Lift Cylinder longer
Bore, Lift Cylinder Longer
4 1 12-07-26182 Lift Pin, HR AT30 Frame
5 4 41SM4SHC.8MM SOCKET HEAD CAP
SCREW 4x8mm
2 6 1 43FIT197 FITTING, MINI
STRAIGHT-M5
7 1 43SPR57 Spring Compress AT lift
8 1 44ORNG16 Oring AT metric, Cylinder
Lift Seal
4 9 1 44ORNG19 Oring AT metric, Cylinder
DETAIL A Piston Seal
SCALE 1
18.4 AT30 Outer Frame
18.5 AT30 Top Frame.
18.6 AT30 Hinge Frame Right

7 5
3
12D9253 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-RH

Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 12D6120A71 HINGE, BLOCK
2 1 12D7765A71 SPACER, HINGE PIN
3 1 12D7767A07 PLUG
4 1 12D7768A07 SHAFT
5 1 41SM4SSS.4MM SOCKET HEAD SET SCREW 4mm
6 1 43BLB52 BEARING, BALL 10x19x5
7 1 43BLB55 BEARING, NEEDLE
8 2 43PPR11 SPRING PIN 2.5mm DIA.x 8mm L
12D9254 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-LH

Parts List
12D9253 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-RH
Parts List
3 1 12D7767A07 PLUG
4
5
6
1
1
1
12D7768A07
41SM4SSS.4MM
43BLB52
SHAFT
SOCKET HEAD SET SCREW 4mm
BEARING, BALL 10x19x5
18.7 AT30 Hinge Frame Left

12D9254 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-LH
Parts List
3 1 12D7767A07 PLUG
4 1 12D7768A07 SHAFT
2 8
18.8 AT32 Main Frame
62-07-03000 AT32 Main Frame

Parts List
1 1 62-07-03001 Lower Frame, AT32
2 1 62-07-03002 Outer frame Assy
3 1 62-07-03003 Upper Frame AT

18.9 AT32 Lower Frame View A
33
24 20 25
ITEM Q
5 1
2
3
4
19 31 5
2 3 6
7
8
21
1 9
10
17
11
4
29 12
30 13
27 14
15
22
16
23 17
34 32 18
19
26 20
28 21
22
6
27 23
24
25
26 26
27
28
23
29
30
31
62-07-03001 Lower Frame, AT32 32
33
34
Parts List
1 2 12-00535-XX REGISTRATION PIN
2 1 12-00587-69 TENSION PIN BODY-LOWER
3 1 12-07-36152 Rail, Camera Arm Guide Left
4 1 12-07-36153 Rail, Camera Arm Guide Right
5 1 12D6112A76 Piviot Block, Gasspring Left
6 1 12D6113A76 Piviot Block, Gasspring Right
7 3 12D6130A07 Spacer, Flange 12
8 3 12D6131A07 Spacer C-Bore
9 3 12D6132A07 Spacer, Flange 14
10 3 12D6133A07 Shoulder Screw 7 x16 X 5mm
11 2 12D6213A07 HUB, REGISTER PIN
4
12 8 12D6216A07 PIN, CYLINDER 1.5mmDIA.
30 13 1 12D6223A67 PLATE, T-BAR 37mm
14 1 12D8203A62 PLATE
15 1 12D8336A76 TENSION PIN BODY-UPPER
16 2 12D8344A07 CYLINDER
17 1 12D8812-69 BLOCK, BASE REGISTRATION PIN
32 18 16 41SM4SHC.8MM SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 4x8mm
19 6 43FIT197 FITTING, MINI STRAIGHT-M5
20 3 43SPR58 Spring AT Bar hold down
21 1 62-07-30210 Asy Camera Arm Lt
22 1 62-07-30211 Asy Camera Arm Lt
6
23 1 62-07-36650 Camera Rail Asy Rt
24 1 62-07-36655 Plate Frame Lower Asy
25 1 62-07-37892 Pin Bar Align Asy
26 1 62-07-37893 Align Bar Rear Asy
27 1 62D6651 Asy Camera Rail Lt
28 1 62D7944 SLED CAMERA MOV. ASSY,
AT30-RH
29 1 62D7945 SLED CAMERA MOV. ASSY, AT30
30 1 62d7970 SLED CAMERA FIXED ASSY - RH
32 32 1 64AT545A PCB, Interface (R)
33 1 64AT546A PCB, Interface (L)
34 4 64AT583V04 SMT LED
18.10 AT32 Lower Frame View B
27
3
13
2
28
15
9
14 26
AT32
62-07-36655 Plate, Front Lower Assm. 8
26
Parts List
1 1 12-07-36101 AT32 Lower frame 12.7mm (.500")
2 2 12-07-36104 End Gas Spring New Pivot 8
3 2 12-07-36105 HingeHoldDown
4 1 12-07-6178 Manifold Film Vac Lower 18 27
29 24 18 28
5 4 12D6103 Block, Stop Switch
6 2 12D6108A76 Mount, Linear Rail (End)
7 4 12D6109A76 9 12
Mount, Linear Mount (Inner)
8 2 12D6114A76 PLATE, LATCH RETAINER
9 2 12D6193A67 Block Hinge Lower
10 2 41SM3PPS.8MM SCREW, 3x8mm PHLIPS PAN HEAD
11 2 41SM3WLS LOCK WASHER, 3mm 22 23
7
12 10 41SM4SHC.14MM SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 4x14mm
13 2 41SM4SHC.25MM SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 4x25mm 4
14 20 41SM4SHC.8MM SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 4x8mm 19
15 6 41SM4SHC12MM SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 4x12mm
16 28 41SM4WLS LOCK WASHER, 4mm
18 4 41SM5SHCL.16MM Socket Head Cap Screw, Low Profile 5x16mm
19 12 41SM5SHF.8MM SOC.HD.SCREW FLAT 5x8mm
20 4 41SM5WLS Washer 5mm Split Lock
21 2 41WFR05 WASHER, FLAT 3mm
22 1 43FIT113 Elbow Male 1/4T 10-32 25
23 2 43FIT191 FITTING, STRAIGHT, 1/8R-M6
26
26 4 62-07-6175 Lift Cylinder Dual Port
27 1 62-07-6177 Vacuum Dist. Manifold 1 31
28 1 62D6636 Spring Block Assm, XHL
21
29 1 62D6637 Spring Block Assm, XHR 5
30 2 62D6638 Spring Block End V Assm 10
31 1 99-59135-010 Switch Magnetic Hamlin
30 30
19
18.11 AT32 Outer Frame
5
3
1 2
6
7
Parts List
1 1 11-07-36199 Plate Buttom Outer Frame 62-07-03002 Outer Frame
2 2 12-07-36195 Support Bracket, Corner Front
3 1 12-07-37879 Bar Outer Frame Front
4 1 12-07-37880 Bar Outer Frame rear
5 1 12-07-37885 Bar Outer Frame Right
6 1 12-07-37889 Bar Tray Lower Left
7 1 12D6196 Support,Corner (LH rear)
8 1 12D6197A71 Support,Corner, RH Rear
18.12 AT32 Top Frame
8
62-07-03003 Upper Frame, AT32
Parts List
1 1 12-07-36115 Plate, Upper Frame AT32
2 1 12-07-36118 Single Handle
3 1 12-07-6179 Film Vac Upper frame manifold
4 4 12D6121A07 Disk, Shim 10mm
5 1 13-07-36010 Seal AT32
6 3M 44GKT55 O-Ring Cord ,.25in
7 1 62-07-39253 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-RH
8 1 62-07-39254 HINGE UPPER FRAME AT30 ASSY-LH
18.13 AT32 Hinge Frame Right

8
1
4
5 6
62-07-39253 Hinge Frame Upper (R)

Parts List
1 1 12-07-36120 Hinge Frame Upper
2 1 12-07-37767 Plug,Hinge Button
3 1 12-07-37768 Shaft, HInge Pin
62-07-39254 Hinge Frame Upper (L)

Parts List 1
7 1 12-07-36120 Hinge Frame Upper 9
7
6 1 12-07-37768 Shaft, HInge Pin 5

1
4
5 6
62-07-39253 Hinge Frame Upper (R)

Parts List
1 1 12-07-36120 Hinge Frame Upper
3 1 12-07-37768 Shaft, HInge Pin
18.14 AT32 Hinge Frame Left 8 2 41SM4SSS.4MM SOCKET HEAD SET SCREW 4mm
62-07-39254 Hinge Frame Upper (L)

Parts List 1
7 1 12-07-36120 Hinge Frame Upper 9
7
6 1 12-07-37768 Shaft, HInge Pin 5

4
2 3
18.15 AT30/32 Air Distribution Block

1
1
1
3
3
3
12-07-6177 Air Distribution Manifold

PARTS LIST
3 3 43FIT194 Push-in fitting G1/4
4 1 12-07-6177 Block vacuum Distribution
18.16 AT30/32 Hinge Bar Floating
Left/Right Selectable
(Left Shown)
2
1 7
62-07-36640 Hinge Bar Floating Assm. AT30/AT32

PARTS LIST
1 1 12-07-36191 Floating Bar
2 1 12-07-36192 Block, Pivot Floating Bar
3 1 12D6194A67 Block Hinge Floating
6 1 43SPR65 Air Spring, 150N
7 1 43SPR65-4 Spring Clip,
18.17 Linear Rail Assembly RightRail
Linear – 62D6650
Assembly, Right - 62D6650
8 19X
2 2X
7 2X
2
3
6 4X
4
LINEAR RAIL
10 62SWM04 SWITCH ASSEMBLY, MINIATURE 1 9 2X

9 41SM2SHC.8MM SCREW, SKT CAP M2 X 8MM 2
8 41SM3SHC.5MM SCREW, SKT CAP M3 X 5MM 19 10

7 41SM3SCH.16MM SCREW, SKT CAP M3 X 16MM 2
5 12D6020A07 LINEAR RAIL LWL9C 1
4 62D6644 ASSEMBLY, MOTOR CAMERA XR 1
3 62D6627 ASSEMBLY, IDLER PULLEY BLOCK 1
2 12D6413A00 STANDOFF, HEX 1/4 X .68 1
1 12D6155A71 BAR, LINEAR RAIL MOUNT (RH) 1

ITEM PART OR NOMENCLATURE QTY
NO. IDENTIFYING NO. OR DESCRIPTION REQD
PARTS LIST
94MS57 Rev. A 5-77

Linear Rail Assembly, Left - 62D6651
18.18 Linear Rail Assy. Left – 62D6651
8 19X
2 2X
7 2X
2
3
6 2X
4
LINEAR RAIL
9 2X
10
10 62SWM04 SWITCH ASSEMBLY, MINIATURE 1
7 41SM3SCH.16MM SCREW, SKT CAP M3 X 16MM 2
5 12D6020A07 LINEAR RAIL LWL9C 1
4 62D6643 ASSEMBLY, MOTOR CAMERA XL 1
3 62D6627 ASSEMBLY, IDLER PULLEY BLOCK 1
2 12D6413A00 STANDOFF, HEX 1/4 X .68 1
1 12D6154A71 BAR, LINEAR RAIL MOUNT (LH) 1

ITEM PART OR NOMENCLATURE QTY
NO. IDENTIFYING NO. OR DESCRIPTION REQD
PARTS LIST
5-78 94MS57 Rev.A

18.19 AT30 Pin Bar Assembly
62-07-27892 Pin Bar Assm., Front 10

1
Parts List
ITE QT PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Ref. Part
1 1 12-07-27805 AT30HR Bar Pin Align
2 3 12D6241A76 Plate, Micro Switch Mount
3 5 42HHS8501 NSI #6 x.250 Round Spacer
4 4 43BTU02 Transfer Ball 4
5 3 55SW107 Switch, Minature
6 1 62-07-26647 Assembly, Motor, - X
7 1 62D6628 Assem, X-Axis Spring Block YES
8 1 62D6645 Assembly, Motor, - Y (LR, RF)
9 1 62D6646 Assembly, Motor, - Y (RR, LF)
10 1 64AT551 PCB, Driver Front YES
18.20 AT32 Pin Bar Assembly
62-07-37892 Pin Bar Align Assm.
Parts List
ITEM QT PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 3 10
1 1 12-07-37805 Pin Bar, Front AT32
5
2 4 12D6129A07 Washer 12 mm CSK 8 4 9
5 1 62-07-26647 Assembly, Motor, - X
7 1 62D6646 Assembly, Motor, - Y (RR, LF) 7
8 1 62D8628 Assem, X-Axis Spring Block
6
9 1 64AT551 PCB, Driver Front
10 5 D6411 Hex Stndoff, .25", M3
1
18.21 AT30 Hinge Bar Assembly
9
12
62-07-27893 Alignment Bar Assm., Rear, AT30

Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Reference Part 7
3 1 62D6630 Assm, Bar Bearing
4 1 62D6629 Assm, Align Bar Bearing
5 1 62D6628 Assem, X-Axis Spring Block YES
6 1 62-07-26647 Assembly, Motor, - X
8 4 43BTU02 Transfer Ball
9 6 12D6241A76 Plate, Micro Switch Mount YES
10 2 12D6232A76 Block, Tensionong YES
11 2 12D6137 Block, Positioning YES
12 1 12-07-27887 Bar Align Hinge (HR)
12
10
8
18.22 AT32 Hinge Bar Assembly
6
A 3
2
13 14
7 11
10 16
5
18
17
8
DETAIL A
4
SCALE .75
1
62-07-37893 Align Bar Assm., Rear
Parts List
9
1 1 12-07-0157 Valve Manifold Block Solenoid
2 2 12-07-36137 Block, Positioning
3 2 12-07-36232 Block, Tesioning Spring
4 1 12-07-37887 Pin Bar, Rear, AT32
11 5 3 12-07-38001 Spring retainer
6 4 12D6129A07 Washer 12 mm CSK
7
8 8 12D6411 Standoff, Hex 1/4" M3
9 3 197002 Air Valve
19
10 3 43SPR66 Spring, Compression 7mm
12 1 62-07-26647 Assembly, Motor, - X
15 13 1 62-07-36229 Assm, Align Bar Bearing
12 14 1 62D6230 Assm, Bar Bearing
17 1 62D8628 Assem, X-Axis Spring Block
18 1 64AT659A Interface Drivers 4 Video Right
19 1 64AT660 Interface, Driver Right
18.23 Motor Block Assembly X
1
6
7
5
4
9
2
8
2
11 3
10
12
1
62-07-26647 Assembly, Motor - X 7

Parts List
1 1 12-02-26163 Block, X Motor Mount (LR&RF)
2 1 12D6008B Spindle Drive
3 1 12D6009 Nut, Drive
9
4 1 12D6162A07 Screw, Set (Shoulder)
5 1 12D6226A07 Disk, 11mm
6 1 31MOT47 Motor, Maxon Dc
8 1 41SM3SSS.6MM SOCKET SET SCREW 3x6mm 4

10 1 43BAL01 BALL, CHROME STEEL 4mm 8
11 1 D6160A Coupler, Spindle/Motor
12 1 D6235 MAC-DISK, BALL
18.24 Motor Block Assembly Y
18.25 Motor Block Assembly Y
18.26 AT32 Camera arm Left
11
12
18
2 4
62-07-30210 AT32 Camera Arm Assm., Left

PARTS LIST
20 1 1 11-07-0212 Strip Runner Magnetic
2 1 11-07-30210 Camera Arm Cover (L)
3 1 12-07-0214 Pulley Mount
19
14 4 1 12-07-30210 AT30 Camera Left Arm "T" front extend
5 1 12D6165A76 Camera Motor Mount RH
6 1 12D6168A07 PULLEY MODIFICATION
7 1 12D6173A07 Pully, Idler Belt
8 1 12D6236A07 BEARING, INNER
10
9 1 12D6237A07 BEARING, OUTER
15
23 10 1 12D7460A71 Bracket, Camera Arm Front Bearing
11 1 17AT579A Interface Board Rear/Left AT42
12 1 31MOT47 MotorMaxonMinDc
13 1 42STD-M3-19MM Standoff, Thd M3 x 19mm
14 1 42STD-M3-25MM Standoff, Thd M3 x .25mm
15 2 43BLB53 Bearing Ball 4x9x2.5
16 1 54FLX07 Flex Cable, 8 Con 21 in Long
17 1 54FLX08 Flex Cable 8 Con 24 in Long
18 1 62D7945 SLED CAMERA MOV. ASSY, AT30
20 2 64AT583V04 SMT LED
21 1 D6160A Coupler
22 1 D6238 AT30 Belt Drive Coupler Shaft
23 2 D8996B Shoulder Bolt Bearing mnt
18.27 AT32 Camera Arm Right
12
1
4
11
17
15
62-07-30211 AT32 Camera Arm Assm., Right

PARTS LIST 3
1 1 11-07-30211 Camera arm cover Rt 13
2 1 12-07-0214 Pulley Mount
3 1 12-07-30211 Camera Arm Rt
4 1 12D6164A71 MOUNTING PLATE, CAMERA
MOTOR-LH
16
5 1 12D6168A07 PULLEY MODIFICATION
6 1 12D6173A07 Pully, Idler Belt 9
7 1 12D6236A07 BEARING, INNER
20
8 1 12D6237A07 BEARING, OUTER 14
9 1 12D7460A71 Bracket, Camera Arm Front Bearing
10 1 17AT579A Interface Board Rear/Left AT42
11 1 31MOT47 MotorMaxonMinDc
12 1 42STD-M3-19MM Standoff, Thd M3 x 19mm
13 1 42STD-M3-25MM Standoff, Thd M3 x .25mm
14 2 43BLB53 Bearing Ball 4x9x2.5
15 1 62D7944 SLED CAMERA MOV. ASSY, AT30-RH
17 2 64AT583V04 SMT LED
18 1 D6160A Coupler, Motor
19 1 D6238 AT30 Belt Drive Coupler Shaft
20 2 D8996B Shoulder Bolt Bearing mnt
18.28 Motor Block Camera XL
18.29 Motor Block Camera XR
18.30 Camera Motor Block YL
18.31 Camera Motor Block YR

19. Nose Assembly Remove the ribbon cable at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
19.1 Removing the Nose

1. Turn unit off, allow the 4.4.
unit to complete
Remove
Remove the
the Main its cool
Main PCB
PCB cover downinside
cover located cycletheand disconnect
cabinet on the front power.
wall.
Removethe
Remove theribbon
ribbon cable
cable at
at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
3. Remove the ribbon cable at the left side of the Main PCB and set it to the side.
5. Locate the four 7 /16" hex bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main
tower. Remove all four bolts.
4. Locate the four 7/16" hex bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main tower. Remove
all four bolts. 5. Locate
5. Locate the four 77//16"" hex
the four
16
hex bolts
bolts (two on each side) holding the nose to the main
tower. Remove
tower. Remove all
all four
four bolts.
bolts.
6. Slide the nose piece about 6 inches away from the cabinet. Locate and
disconnect all multi-pin connectors and vacuum lines below the nose on the
right side. Also disconnect the Emergency Stop switch on the left side.
5. Slide the nose piece about 6 inches away from the cabinet. Locate and disconnect all multi-pin
connectors and vacuum lines below the nose on the right side. Also disconnect the Emergency
Stop switch on the left side.
94MS54 Rev. A 5-47

94MS54 Rev. A 5-47
94MS54 Rev. A 5-47
7. Disconnect the 5 pin din cable plugged into the 10 memory keypad under the
AccuTray
8. 8.Returning
Returning
disconnect
7. Disconnect the 5 pin
Service
under thethe
under
thethe
din cable
nose piece,
nose
remaining
plugged
piece, Manual
remove thethe
remove
harnesses.
into
protective
protectivecable wrap
cable
the 10 memory keypad under the
andandpage 181
wrap
version:7/10/12
disconnect remaining harnesses.
6. Disconnect the 5 pin din cable plugged into the 10 memory keypad under the right front portion
of the nose piece.
9. 9.Carefully slide
Carefully thethe
slide nose piece
nose offoff
piece of the structure
of the andand
structure setset
it aside.
it aside.
7. Carefully slide the nose piece off of the structure and set it aside.
5-48 94MS54 Rev. A
19.2 Replacing the Display and Keypad Boards

1. Remove the nose (see section Removing the Nose).
2. Turn it upside down and place it on carpet or any surface that will not damage the keypad
overlay or the paint.
3. Remove the 6 nuts holding the Keypad and the 4 nuts from the Quick Keypad along with all
the plug in connectors. Cut any tie straps holing wiring harnesses soldered to the boards in
order to remove them.
4. Install the new p.c.boards in reverse order and reassemble the nose.  
94MS54
94MS54 Rev.
Rev. A A 5-49
5-49
19.3 Replacing the Emergency Button
1. Slide the nose out (see section Removing the Nose) just far enough to access the emergency
switch.
2. Disconnect the plug on the back of the switch base.
3. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the switch base.
4. While holding the top of the button twist the switch base to separate the switch into two pieces
and remove it from the nose.
5. Install the new switch in reverse order and reassemble the nose.
19.4 Replacing the Stop and Go Buttons

1. Slide the nose out (see section Removing the Nose) just far enough to access the switches.
2. While holding the top of the button twist the switch base to separate the switch into two pieces.
3. Replace wire for wire onto the new switch.
4. Install in reverse order
19.5  Replacing the Vacuum Gauges

2. Turn it upside down and place it on carpet or any surface that will not damage the keypad
overlay or the paint.
3. Remove the vacuum tubing from the gauge.
4. Remove the gauge retaining bracket and the faulty vacuum gauge.
5. Install in reverse order.  
19.6 Nose Section Auto-former
Note: The work lights and nose fans receive their power from this auto-former, if both
the fans and the work lights are not working check this auto-former first.
1. Remove the nose (see section Removing the Nose)
2. Meter input and output of the auto-former from 0 to 240, 0 to 208 and 0 to 120. If defective
replace.  
19.7 Work Lights

Note: The work lights are controlled by a rocker switch on the underside of the right
front corner of the nose. If the work lights are not turning on check the rocker
switch and power to the switch.
To change the lamps the trays must first be moved to the center position.
1. Press and hold the Stop button.  Press the Go button.  Release both buttons when trays start
moving.  Just before the trays reach the center position press Stop.
2. Lift the diffusion cover off of the light assembly.
3. Twist the lamp to disengage it from the socket and remove it.
19.8 Nose Fans  
Note: The nose fans are controlled by a rocker switch on the underside of the right front
corner of the nose. If the nose fans are not turning on check the rocker switch and
power to the switch.
2. Disconnect the power leads to the blower(s).
3. Remove the blower(s).
19.9 Cleaning or Replacing Nose Filters

1. Slide the filters toward the front of the unit and out of the brackets.
2. Clean metal filters with water or environmentally safe solvent, or replace as needed.
3. Slide the filter(s) back in place.
19.10 Nose Assembly Drawings

Nose Assembly Drawings
10 11 9 10 11 9
4 PL 4 PL
50 50
43 43
46 46
2 PL
56
BOTTOM VIEW
58 10 NSI 6-32 KEP NUT ZINC 41-06NKP 29 1 HARNESS, SW, OPERATOR 16D6666A00
57 10 6-32 X .312 HEX THD. SPACER 44HHS9292 28 - REMOVED REMOVED
56 2 SWITCH, CW 55SW01 27 1 EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON ACTUATOR 55SW53
55 3" TRIMLOCK 44TRM02 26 4 BARRIER 55SW45-5
54 4 NSI 8-32 X 3/8 PPMS ZINC 41-08PPS.37 25 1 BUTTON, YELLOW "STOP" 55SW45-2
53 10 NSI #6 INTERLOCK LOCK WASHER 41-06WLI 24 1 BUTTON, GREEN "GO" 55SW45-1
52 8" TAPE, TEFLON SEALANT 1/2" 81TAP12 23 2 SWITCH, NOSE AP30/33 55SW45
51 4 NSI #10 FLAT WASHER SAE 41-10WFR 22 1 ASSEMBLED SUPPLEMENTAL KEYBOARD 64MI477
50 8 NSI 6-32 X 3/8 PHIL PAN MS BLK 41B06PPS.37 21 1 KEYBOARD FOR OV45 64MI478V06
49 3 NSI CABLE TIE 4" #18 MAX 44TIE02 20 2 VACUUM GAUGE, 0-30"-1-1/2" DIA. 49VAG02
48 3 TIE WRAP ADHESIVE MOUNT BASE 44PAD03 19 80" TUBING, NYLON 1/4" OD-.180 ID 49DCT27
47 2 1/4-20 LOCKNUT NYLON 41B40NLN 18 1 5 POSITION TERMINAL STRIP OV24 52TS05
46 16 NSI #6 FLAT WASHER SAE 41-06WFR 17 2 LIGHT FIXTURE UNDERCABINET 24" 39CLF02-C
45 6 NSI #8 FLAT WASHER, SAE 41-08WFR 16 2 BLOWER 39BLO11
44 8 NSI 1/4 SAE FLAT WASHER 41-40WFR 15 2 LAMP, YELLOW VIEWING 20 WATT 35LMF24-C
43 16 NSI #6 SPLIT LOCK WASHER 41-06WLS 14 1 AUTOFORMER,120/208/240V50/60Hz 32TRC08
42 6 NSI #8 SPLIT LOCK WASHER 41-08WLS 13 1 OVERLAY, RAIL COVER, AP30 15D2270A00
41 8 NSI WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 1/4 41-F0WLS 12 1 BEZEL, WORKLIGHT, 2 LAMP 18D2430A00
40 2 NSI 8-32 KEP NUT ZINC 41-08NKP 11 2 FILTER, TOP AP30 19D1942A99
39 4 NSI 10-32 KEP NUT ZINC 41-12NKP 10 2 BRACKET, FILTER HOLDER (RHT) 11D1939B62
38 2 NSI 8-32 X 3/4 PPMS ZINC 41-08PPS.75 9 2 BRACKET, FILTER HOLDER (LFT) 11D1939A62
37 4 NSI 10-32 X 1/2 PPMS ZINC 41-12PPS.50 8 2 BRACKET, NOSE SUPPORT 11D1791A02
36 8 NSI 6-32 X 1/2 BLK SELF TAP 41B06PST.50 7 1 AIR DIRECTOR No.3- NOSE 11D2438A08
35 16 NSI 8-32 X3/8 PFMS 100-ZINC 41-08PFO.37 6 1 AIR DIRECTOR No.2- NOSE 11D2433A08
34 14 NSI 6-32 X 3/8 PHIL PAN MS BLK 41-06PFO.37 5 1 AIR DIRECTOR No.1- NOSE 11D2427A08
33 6 1/4-20 X 5/8 SOCKET BTN HD BLK 41BF0SHC.62 4 1 DIVIDER, NOSE AP30 RIGHT 11D2426B17
32 4 ADHESIVE SQUARE 4026 44PAD02 3 1 DIVIDER, NOSE AP30 LEFT 11D2426A17
31 2 CONNECTOR, TUBE 3/8 TO 1/4 OD. 43FIT14 2 1 REFLECTOR, WORK LT. AP30 11D3255A07
30 1 HARNESS, EMERGENCY SWITCH 16D2412A00 1 1 RAIL COVER, AP30 11D2425A00
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO. ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO.
Continued on next page
6-4 94MS54 Rev. A

Nose Assembly Drawings (cont.)
3 PL 4 PL 3 PL
44 45 44
41 41 42 41 44
47 16 33 3 4 54 14 33 16 47
14 PL 6 PL 5 PL 2 PL
A 34 35 35 18 38 B 1
2 PL 45 40 55
4 PL 2 3 PL
39 49
51 48
37 15 17
4 PL 2 PL
A B
7
REF.
6 34
4 PL
36
5 43
46
TOP VIEW
5 PL
35 4 PL 46 43 36
94MS54 Rev. A 6-5

Nose Assembly Drawings (cont.)
22 13 21 53 10 PL 57 10 PL 1
REF.
8 32
58 10 PL 4 PL
29
DETAIL A
VIEW B B
32 4 PL
DETAIL B
30
VIEW A A
2 PL
24 25 20
52
2 PL 26
31
2 PL 23 2 PL
19
DETAIL A 2 PLACES STOP
(TOP POS.)
GO
27 (BOT. POS.)
BLK
RED BLK 30
RED REF.
VIEW C C
DETAIL B
6-6 94MS54 Rev. A

20. Center/Drive Assembly

20.1 Frame Transport System
 The exposure frame transport system is powered by a 1/8 -hp PMDC gear motor. It is
controlled and operated by the computer system, through the nose section and
switches.
 Pressing the switch once will start a vacuum cycle. The second time is pressed, the
frames will move into position and an exposure will start. The frames can be operated through
a blank frame cycle by holding down the switch before pressing the switch.
 The frames move at two speeds; a fast speed initially, then to a slow speed near the end of their
travel. This prevents a noisy, hard-stop condition and possible machine damage. For added
safety, the drive motor has a slip clutch to prevent machine damage. A system switch inside the
cabinet stops frame movement when it is actuated by the frame moving into the exposure
position. If the system switch fails, the frame contacts a second switch that turns off power to
the frame drive motor.
20.2 Frame Drive Motor Replacement

The drive motor is in the left rear corner of the cabinet. It is a 1/8 -hp PMDC (Permanent Magnet
Direct Current) design, with a slip clutch on the output shaft. The clutch is intended to prevent frame
damage in the event of a jam or if an object blocks frame movement. Refer to “Frame Drive Clutch
Adjustment” for procedures.
Note: Remove your watch when working on the drive motor. The drive motor magnet
could damage watches or similar devices.
1. Remove the left side cabinet door.
2. Disconnect the motor connector from the control box.
3. Position both frames to approximately a mid-point state.
4. Disconnect the two wire connectors at the motor end of the drive motor.
5. Remove the four 1/4 -20 x 3/8 " bolts that attach the motor to its mounting plate and lift out the
motor.
6. Install the new motor in the reverse order.
20.3 Frame Drive Clutch Adjustment

Note: A personnel safety hazard may exist, or machine damage may occur if the slip
clutch on the exposure frame drive motor is set too tight. If the clutch is set too
loose, the frame drive will be too slow and a transport error may occur.
Use the following procedure to set the clutch at the minimum setting for operation.
1. Open the left side sliding door on the printer and locate the drive motor at the left rear corner of
the cabinet.
2. Loosen the two set screws which lock the hex nut to the motor shaft.
3. Adjust the hex nut until the minimum setting is found that provides frame movement with no
slippage.
4. Retighten the set screws in the hex nut.
5. Close the sliding door.
20.4 Frame Speed Adjustment
Note: Frame speed is set at the factory and normally does not require adjustment.
Note: An adjustment of the frame speed must be preformed whenever the Control Box
PCB, part #64CT464, or the Motor Speed Control Board, part #31MSC02 is
replaced. This adjustment is critical, failure to do so can damage the board and/or
hardware.
1. Locate the 'FAST' and 'SLOW' potentiometers in the upper lefthand corner of the Control Box.
The frame speed adjustments will be made from these pots.
2. Activate the Diagnostics Mode through the keypad.
3. Set volt meter for VDC and measure across pins 5 & 6 on motor speed connector. Adjust the
'SLOW' pot on the control box to read 25 to 32 VDC. Notice that the frame moves slower than
normal. The total travel time of the frame should be 12 seconds.
4. Exit the diagnostic mode by pressing the 9 key then the 0 key.
20.5 Adjust the 'FAST' pot on the control box.

1. Depress and hold the 'STOP' key then press the 'GO' key and then release both keys to start a
blank frame cycle, no vacuum or exposure.
2. Measure across pins 5 & 6 on motor speed connector. Adjust the 'FAST' pot on the control box
to read between 70 and 84 VDC. The frame should travel at high speed for about 4.5 seconds,
then shift to a slower speed and stop about 0.750" to 1" from the end of the tray rod.
Center/Drive
20.6 Center/Drive Assembly Assembly Diagram
Drawing
2 PL
40
4 PL 33
34 9
32 8
4 PL
34
2PL 50
35
DRIVE MOTOR ASSY.
DETAIL A.
12 PL TIMING SWITCH ASSY.

38 DETAIL C.
18 PL
37
36
42 40
2 PL
47 33
37 2 PL 9
4 PL 8
39 CHAIN 46
2 PL TENSIONER
2 PL ASSY., DETAIL B.
36
2
2 PL
49
3 74"
21 48 22 4 6 7 25
17
2 PL
19
WHT 18 41
1
2 2 11
3 1 10
43
20 BLK 23 26 BLK 24 44
2 PL 2 PL
DETAIL A DETAIL B
62D3566A00
2 PL
2 PL 5 14 2 PL LOWER/
28
27 16 45 12 UPPER
2 PL 3 PL
13 26
4 PL
TOP POS
31
RED BLK BOT POS
RED BLK
DETAIL C
30 27 29 UPPER/LOWER DETAIL D
2 PLACES
2 PL
7-4 94MS54 Rev. A

Center/Drive Assembly Diagram (cont.)
50 2 SHAFT, SUPPORT RAIL, SHORT 12D4389B07

49 2 SHAFT, SUPPORT RAIL, LONG 12D4389A07
48 1 SPROCKET, 35A22, FOR OSD 43SPK07
47 2 5/16 SPLIT LOCK WASHER 41F2WLS
46 1 DELETED DELETED
45 NSI 3/8 X 3/4 SOC. SHLD. 41BF2SHF.62
44 1 3/8-`6 NYLON LOCK NUT, OV45 41-F3NLN
43 1 THREADED ROD 12D1751A00
42 2 5/16 - 18 X 3/4 HEX BOLT BLK. 41BF2BHX.75
41 1 TENSIONER BUSHING 12D1755A00
40 3 NSI 1/4-20 X 1 3/4 HEX BOLT BK 41B40BHX1.75
39 DELETED DELETED
38 12 NSI #10 FLAT WASHER BLACK 41B10WFR
37 18 NS #10 LOCK WASHER SPLIT 41-10WLS
36 20 NSI 8-32 X 1/2 SOC. HD CAP SCR 41B08SHC.50
35 4 NSI 1/4-20 LOCKNUT NYLON INS. 41B40NLN
34 8 NSI 1/4 SAE FLAT WASHER 41-FOWLS
33 3 WASHER, SPLIT LOC 1/4" 41 40WFR
32 4 1/4-20 X 3/4 HEX HEAD BOLT 41-FOBHX.75
31 4 NSI 6-32 X 3/4 PPMS ZINC 41-06PPS.75
30 4 4/40 X 5/8 PHIL FLAT MS 41-04PFO.62
29 2 NSI 6-32 X 5/8 PPMS ZINC 41-06PPS.62
28 2 NSI 4/40 KEP NUT 41-04NKP
27 6 NSI 4/40 FLEXLOCK METAL 41-04NLM
26 8 NSI CABLE TIE, UV, 4" 44TIE08
25 1 NSI 1/4-20 X 1.25 HEX BOLT BLK 41B40BHX1.25
24 2 TERMINAL, FEMALE MINIFIT 51TML05
23 10" WIRE, 22 GAUGE, BLK 2 CON. 54M22BLK2
22 8" 1/4' HEAT SHRINK TUBBING 49DCT05
21 1 OVERTORGUE SAFETY DEVICE 43OSD01
20 1 TERMINAL FEMALE 14-20 AWG. 51TML04
19 2 TERMINAL FEMALE 18-22 AWG. 51TML02
18 1 RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN, MINIFIT 52RCP28
17 1 PLUG, 3 PIN MOLEX, .093 PIN 52CTP08
16 1 CHAIN, #35 RLR- 10 FT 43CHA05
15 DELETED DELETED
14 1 HARNESS, MOTOR- POS SWT 16D2319A00
13 4 SWITCH, TIMING-ROLLER 55SW02
12 2 CHAIN YOKE 12D1757A62
11 1 TENSIONER SPROCKET 12D1996A00
10 1 SPRING, CHAIN TENSIONER 43SPR48
9 3 IDLER BUSHING 12D1754A00
8 3 IDLER SPROCKET 12D1753A00
7 1 SLIDER 12D1752A62
6 1 SLIDE 12D1750A62
5 2 SWITCH MOUNT, AP30/OV33 11D2111A62
4 1 MOTOR, DRIVE,1/8 HP,90VDC 31MOT14
3 2 STRIP, RIGHT RAIL 11D4326A07
2 2 ACCUTRACK 12D1634A00
1 1 CABINET, WELDMENT AP30 63D3326A08
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO.
94MS54 Rev. A 7-5

Upper
20.7 Upper Light Block Light Block
Assembly Assembly
Drawing
17 2X
12 2X
16 2X 16 4X
8
9 19 4X
2
3
19 4X
16 4X
VIEW A
SPRING ASSY
10
19 5X
1
5X 16
3X 12 3X 17
21
5
2X 19 15
3X 16
2X 16 13 18
11
14
11 VIEW C
WHEEL ASSY
3X 20 6 13
14
18
VIEW B
WHEEL LIGHT 4
BLOCK ASSY
7-6 94MS54 Rev. A

20.8 Lower Light BlockLower LightDrawing
Assembly Block Assembly Drawing
4
6
12
9
13 7X
10 7X
94MS54 Rev. A 7-7

Lower Light Block Assembly (cont.)
15
7 4X
17
18 5X
19 5X
20 5X
14 4X
4X 11
16
20.9 AT32 Light Block Guide
7-8 94MS54 Rev. A

21. ATH32 System

21.1 System Assembly Drawing
21.2 Over Head Light Fixture
62-03-100 AT Light Fixture, 5 Cell
12
10
6 1
2
7
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 3
1 1 11-03-002 Reflector, Lamp Cell 11
2 2 11D9333A70 Bracket, Angle, Top Light
3 2 12-03-005 1x3 ExtrusionAT_Long
4 2 12-03-006 1x3 ExtrusionAT_Short
5 1 18-03-110 Acrylic Yellow Filter,AT30,5 Lamp
6 1 32BAL26 BallastElectronic 4x F32T8
7 1 32BAL27 BallastElectronic 2x F32T8
8 1 35LMF28 Lamp, Fluorescent
9 1 43LPE01 LampSocketFluorescent
10 1 55SW01 Switch Panel Mount Rocker
11 2 63-02-002 ExtrusionCornerLogicalAssy
21.3 Hepa Filter
3
8
9
62-07-0100 Hepa Filter Assembly
7 Parts List
1 1 11-07-0101 APH Hepa Filter Pressure Cover
2 1 11-07-0103 APH Hepa Blower Wall-LT
3 1 11-07-0104 APH Hepa Blower Wall-RT
12 4 2 11-07-0106 APH Hepa Air Valve
16 5 4 12-07-0101 Hepa Fasten Bracket
5 6 4 12-07-0102 Hepa Backup Bracket
7 1 39FLT20 Filter, HEPA 6x12x24
15 8 2 39BLO21 Blower, High Back pressure
9 1 39FLT08 PreFilter 12x24x1/2Thk.
6 10 8 41SF0NHX HEX NUT 1/4-20
11 34 41SF0PF0.75 Screw Phil 100 Flat 1/4-20x.75
12 4 41SF0TSK.1.25 THUMB SCREW 1/4 -20x1.25L
13 42 41SF0WFR FLAT WASHER 1/4"
14 34 41SF0WLS Washer, Lock Split 1/4
15 1 63-07-0101 APH HEPA COVER WELD'T
16 1 63-07-0102 APH Hepa filter Base Weld't
22. Light source

22.1 Path of Power to the PC Board
 This section is useful when there is no power reaching the PC board (no LEDs lighted). Before
tracing the power, check the fuse on the PC board and the incoming power.
 On 240V equipment, the power cord enters the rear of the unit. The two hot conductors are
connected by wire nuts to wires that are in turn connected to the front of a terminal strip. One
of these two wires passes through a fuse and on 60 Hz units is then connected to a voltage
selector switch, then is connected to taps on a step-down autotransformer. This transformer is
located under the terminal strip on the component bracket near the dividing wall. The
transformer tap marked 120V becomes the unit common and returns to the terminal strip. The
other line wire is connected to the transformer common and becomes the hot 120V lead to the
PC Board and also returns to the terminal strip. The power is distributed from the strip and a
pair of wires goes to the PC board.  
22.2 Interlock System

 The internal interlock system serves two purposes. The first is for operator safety by insuring
the safety glass is in place before operation. This glass filters short UV radiation and covers the
high voltage lamp terminals. This interlock also protects from overheating by traveling through
two thermostats in the lamp head. There is also an outlet on some equipment marked
“interlock” and is not used in this equipment.
 The internal interlock is a loop that travels through the light head, passing through the glass
switch and two thermostats. This interlock is in series with the control circuit of the large relays
in the power supply. When the interlock is opened, the relays will open and cut the power to
the lamp terminals. The PC board senses the drop in voltage and closes the shutter.
 The first place to check is the glass switch. The switch lever is located near the edge of the
glass on the end of the lamp where the cable enters. By releasing the glass, the lever can be
seen. If the lever can slip past the glass, it should be bent slightly toward the reflector. If the
switch is closed, the loop can be traced. First measure the voltage between lamp wires (#4 AC
Common) and wire (#10 Interlock). The presence of voltage between these terminals indicates
an open loop. This loop travels to the lamp head on wire (#10), then to the glass switch, the far
end thermostat, the near end thermostat and terminates on wire (#4). The thermostats are
mounted in the air tubes leading to the lamp. There are no splices in the air tubes.
22.3 Lamp Voltage

 The lamp voltage measurement can provide useful information for lamp striking, lamp output,
and level switching information. The meter used to measure can cause different results. We use
traditional needle movement meters in our factory, due to the trigger pulses on the lamp before
striking. The waveforms are not sinusoidal, so different meters may produce different results.
Here is a chart with typical measurements:
striking, lamp output, and level switching information. The meter used
to measure can cause different results. We use traditional needle
movement meters in our factory, due to the trigger pulses on the lamp
before striking. The waveforms are not sinusoidal, so different meters
may produce different results. Here is a chart with typical measurements:
Lamp Voltage (Terminals 2 & 3) Lamp Fan Voltage (Terminals 4 & 5)
Model Idle Low Med. High Trig. Idle/Low Med. High Trig.
AL54 w/L1250 200 200 230 270 500+ 60-80 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL54 w/L1252 200 200 230 270 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL54 w/L1261 210 210 230 270 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL64 w/L1250 200 200 230 270 500+ 55-75 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL64 w/L1261 210 210 230 270 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL64 w/L1252 200 200 230 270 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL84 w/L1280 360-380 360-380 380-410 415-445 500+ 75-95 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL84 w/L1281 400-430 400-430 425-500 460-530 500+ 75-95 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL84 w/L1282 400-430 400-430 425-500 460-530 500+ 75-95 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL94 w/L1280 360-380 360-380 380-410 415-445 500+ 70-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL94 w/L1281 400-430 400-430 425-500 460-530 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
AL94 w/L1282 400-430 400-430 425-500 460-530 500+ 65-90 90-120 115-125 115-125
22.4 Lamp PowerBoard

Trigger Path
 The basic
A trigger Lamp
pathboard
that the Power
power Path
is provided to
in the lamphead
the light takesto is almost
start identical
the lamp. for all units. The basic path
This board
is incoming
operatesline, main
on demand power
Thebybasic relay,
sensing ballasts,
paththethat
lamp capacitors,
thevoltage.
power This
to trigger
theboard
lamp can be
takesboard,
heard
is andidentical
almost then theforlamp.
all See
the point to point wiring
when it is functioning,diagrams
units.although
The basicfor each
the sound light source
is faint.
path is in Section
By turning
incoming line, the
main 16.
unitpower
on relay, ballasts,
and off, the sound can be compared
capacitors, during
trigger board, andtrigger
then theandlamp.
cool-down.
See the Inpoint to point wiring
22.5 Trigger Board
both situations, thediagrams
fans are for
running
each light source in Section 16. disabled
full speed. The fans may be
 A trigger by pulling
board the blue wireinfrom
is provided the terminal
light head #5 to
to start
aid inthe
determining
lamp. This if the
board operates on demand
trigger board is functioning. Use caution that the lamp doesn’t run
by sensing the lamp voltage. This board can be heard when it is functioning, although the without
soundcooling.
is faint. By turning the unit on and off, the sound can be compared during trigger and
The trigger
cool-down. boardsituations,
In both is located inthethefans
lamparehead, in the end
running full where
speed.theThecable
fans may be disabled by
pullingenters. It is wire
the blue locatedfromin the cool air#5
terminal path inside
to aid in the air plenum.ifOne
determining the lamp
trigger board is functioning.
Use caution
lead is that the lamp
in series with doesn’t
the triggerruntransformer
without cooling.
[(1) input (3) output], the
 The trigger
other lamp
boardlead (2) is used
is located to sense
in the lampthe lampinvoltage.
head, the endOutside
where the the unit,
cable enters. It is located in
the board can be tested by putting 350-750VAC between
the cool air path inside the air plenum. One lamp lead is in series with terminals [(1) the trigger transformer
[(1) input (3) output], the other lamp lead (2) is used to sense the arc
and (3)], and causing an arc from terminal (3) to terminal (1). This lamp voltage. Outside the
should be .015 or greater.
unit, the board can be tested by putting 350-750VAC between terminals [(1) and (3)], and
causing an arc from terminal (3) to terminal (1). This arc should be .015 or greater.
TRIGGER BOARD #64TR408 for AL 54, AL 54-480 and AL 64
94MS54 Rev. A 8-9
Lead to Lamp (3) Lamp Current (1) Other Lamp Lead (2)
(High Temp Wire) (Purple Wire) (Yellow Wire)
TRIGGER BOARD #64MV414 FOR AL 84, AL 84-480 and AL 94
M2
Lead to Lamp (3)
(High Temp Wire)
TRIGGER BOARD #64MV414 FOR AL 84, AL 84-480 and AL 94
M2
Lead to Lamp (3)
(High Temp Wire)
M1
Other Lamp Lead (2)
(Yellow Wire)
Capacitors and Level Switching

M3
The capacitors pass all the current that(1)flows through the lamp. They are
Lamp Current
(Violet Wire)
also used to switch power levels.
•
The capacitors for the AL 54, AL 54-480, AL 64, AL 84, AL 84-480, AL
22.6 Capacitors and Level Switches.
94, are divided into three sections. All units have one or two idle
capacitors, they are connected with a yellow wire. High power capacitors
The capacitors pass all the current that flows
are switched through
in during the lamp.
warm-up They
and high are exposures.
power also used to switch
There are power
levels. two high power capacitors connected with a blue wire. All capacitors
 The capacitors for the ALan54,
have AL 54-480,
orange ALacts
wire which 64,asAL 84, AL 84-480, AL 94, are divided into
a common.
three sections. All
• units have onefor
The capacitors or high
two and
idlemedium
capacitors,
levelsthey are connected
are pulled with
in with relays a yellow wire.
during
High power capacitors are switched
warm-up in during
and exposures. warm-up
The medium andwill
relay high pullpower exposures.
in to select medium There are
two high power capacitors
power. In this case the medium relay will also always pull in for high wire
connected with a blue wire. All capacitors have an orange
-10 which acts as a common.
power exposures. 94MS54 Rev. A
 The capacitors for high and medium levels are pulled
• The capacitors set the operating current of in with
the relays
lamp. If during warm-up
the lamp output and
exposures. The medium relay will
has changed pull in
rapidly, to select
inspect medium power.
the capacitors In this
for swelling. Thecase the medium
design of
relay will also always pull in for high power exposures.
capacitor we use will burn open if it begins to short. A swollen capacitor
 The capacitors set the operating
should current
be replaced, andofthe
theunit
lamp. If the
should lamptooutput
be tested see thathas
thechanged
capacitorrapidly,
inspect the capacitors
didfor
notswelling.
damage the Thehigh
design of capacitor
or medium relay. we use the
To test willunit’s
burn ability
open iftoit begins to
short. A swollen capacitor shouldlevels,
switch power be replaced, and theexposure,
make a manual unit should then be tested
switch to seethe
between that the
capacitor did not damage
power the highnoting
levels, or medium
the change in To
relay. test the
intensity. Whenunit’s ability to
switching downswitch
in power
power, allow the unit three seconds to respond.
levels, make a manual exposure, then switch between the power levels, noting the change in
AL 54 Capacitor
intensity. When switching down in power,Assemblyallow the unit three seconds to respond.
22.7 AL54, AL54-480, AL64, AL84, AL84-480, AL94 Capacitor Assembly

CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY PART # 62D1048
1 WIRES
5 2 FROM
3 HARNESS
1 2 3
16µƒ 12µƒ
FRONT
5 VIEW OF
PC BOARD
4
WIRES TO
16µƒ 5 3
12µƒ CAPACITOR
2
TOP
1
3 SWITCH ON CAPACITOR
4 MOUNTING BRACKET
2 3
1
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW 4 3 2 1 6
2) BROWN
1
3) BLUE REAR VIEW OF
4) BLUE WITH WHITE STRIPE PC BOARD
5) ORANGE
6) BLACK
AL 54-480 Capacitor Assembly
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY PART # 62D3654A00

1 WIRES
5
2 FROM
3 HARNESS
1 2 3
12µƒ 12µƒ
FRONT
5 VIEW OF
PC BOARD
4
WIRES TO
12µƒ 5 3
10µƒ CAPACITOR
2
TOP
1
4 MOUNTING BRACKET
2 3
1
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW 4 3 2 1 6
2) BROWN
1
3) BLUE REAR VIEW OF
5) ORANGE
6) BLACK
AL 64 Capacitor Assembly
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY PART # 62D1046-64

1 WIRES
5 3 2 5
2 FROM
3 HARNESS
1 2 3
WHILE UNIT IS ON
DO NOT SWITCH
CAUTION
16µƒ 12µƒ FRONT

VIEW OF
PC BOARD
5
4 WIRES TO
1 3
2
16µƒ CAPACITOR
2
TOP
1
1
4µƒ 12µƒ
MOUNTING BRACKET
3
1
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW 4 3 2 1 6
2) BROWN
3) BLUE 1
REAR VIEW OF
5) ORANGE
6) BLACK
8-12 94MS54 Rev. A


5
12µƒ 12µƒ
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW
5 3 2 5 2) BROWN
3) BLUE
4) BLUE WITH WHITE STRIPE
5) ORANGE
10µƒ 16µƒ
4 1
AL 84-480 Capacitor Assembly

5
12µƒ 12µƒ
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW
5 3 2 5 2) BROWN
3) BLUE
5) ORANGE
10µƒ 10µƒ
5
4 1
94MS54 Rev. A 8-13

1 WIRES
2 FROM
3 HARNESS
1 2 3
FRONT
16µƒ 12µƒ VIEW OF
2 SWA PC BOARD
SWB
SWC
4 WIRES TO
3
3 CAPACITOR
2
TOP
1
5 5
2
5
SWITCH ON CAPACITOR
MOUNTING BRACKET
1
4µƒ 5
12µƒ 16µƒ
1
4 3 2 1 6
WIRE COLORS
1) YELLOW 4 1
REAR VIEW OF
2) BROWN PC BOARD
3) BLUE
5) ORANGE
22.8 Opening the Lamp Head

1. Unplug the unit.
2. Remove the glass and the four screws attaching the large outer reflector section.
3. Remove the 2 center screws from the bottom side and the 2 screws from the top side of the
lamp head.
8-14 94MS54 Rev. A

4. Remove the 6 screws from each side of the lamphead and remove the two endcaps. On 8kW
lampheads you can now access the trigger board and shutter position switch that are located at
the opposite end from the shutter motor under the air plenum plate.
5. On 5kW lampheads remove the 5 screws from the air plenum plate to remove it. The trigger
board and shutter position switch are located at the opposite end from the shutter motor under
the air plenum plate.
22.9 Shutter
 The shutter is controlled by the PC board, with information from a switch in the lamp head to
provide position information. During cool-down and exposure, the shutter is open and during
warm-up and idle, the shutter is closed.
 The PC board compares the shutter position with the requested position. The shutter motor will
run until the switch position matches. The shutter motor has a brake that is magnetically
operated. Whenever the power is released from the motor, the brake falls into a slot. There is an
LED on the PC board that lights whenever the shutter is being energized. (Look in the PC
board pin section for a diagram of the LEDs).
22.10 Shutter Switch

 The switch provides shutter position information to the PC board. This switch is in the lamp
end where the cable enters, inside the manifold cover. The cam is in the chamber with the
shutter. A failure of the switch can cause the shutter to rotate continuously or erratically.
Similar problems may be due to the shutter motor brake, the idle setting, or the PC board.
 The switch contacts close when the shutter is fully open and remain closed until the shutter
closes. This level can be measured on the terminal strip from terminal 9 (+) to terminal 7 (-).
The level is 12 VDC when the shutter is closed, and 0 V when the shutter opens. The switch is
in the lamp head on the end where the cable enters inside the air manifold on older units. On
newer units we use the normally open contacts, COM contact and the center contact. We use
the normally closed contacts, the two outside leads, not the center contact. This switch is
adjustable on older units. We recommend scribing a line around the switch and the bracket, if
replacement is necessary, to return to the same position. The switch roller should be centered
on the cam and closed when the cam pushes the wheel on the switch halfway.
22.11 Shutter Brake

 The motor that drives the shutter has a brake that is magnetically operated. When the motor
core magnetizes, it pulls a lever to release the brake. If the shutter coasts or rotates
continuously, look at the shutter LED on the PC board. On early boards, where there are three
LEDs in a row near the front of the power supply, it is the third from the front of the power
supply. On the newer models, there are five in a row; it is the fourth from the front of the power
supply. When this light goes out, the shutter brake should engage. If the shutter coasts, the
brake may have failed. The shutter may coast to the point where the switch will switch again to
cause the motor to energize. The LED on the board will flash if this occurs.
 Rotate the sprocket to tighten the other two screws and attach the wires.
 The shutter can be tested with the unit open by disconnecting one of the lamp leads and holding
the interlock switch.
22.12 Shutter Motor

 The shutter motor is located in the lamp head on the side with the shutter drive chain. We
recommend checking the power and signals from the switch and to the motor coil, before
entering the lamp head. These items are covered in the preceding sections.
 Changing the shutter motor requires the following tools
Philips screw driver
3/32 "Allen wrench.
1. Remove the glass and outer reflector from the light head.
2. Open the end of the light head, where the drive chain and the sprocket are located.
3. There are four screws that hold the motor; two of them require access through holes in the
sprocket. The shutter can be turned counterclockwise to access these screws, by pushing the
brake on the motor.
NOTE: Turn the shutter only counterclockwise (looking from the motor end) or you
may damage the shutter switch on the other end of the light.
4. Remove the chain from the sprocket with care to keep tension. The chain has shortened links
and will separate if slackened. If the chain opens, attach an end to the sprocket with tape or
wire and revolve the shutter.
5. Remove the motor sprocket by loosening the set screw.
6. Remove the two wire nuts from the motor coil wires.
7. Remove the four motor screws.
22.13 Installing the Motor

1. Mount the motor with four screws.
2. Install the sprocket in line with the shutter sprocket and tighten.
3. Install the chain on the sprockets.
4. Set the chain to where it has 3/8 " side travel and tighten the two accessible   motor screws
lightly.
5. Rotate the sprocket to tighten the other two screws and attach the wires.
6. The shutter can be tested with the unit open by disconnecting one of the lamp leads and holding
the interlock switch.
22.14 Shutter Removal

LT1 lamp heads
1. Remove the 2 screws holding the air flow deflectors and remove them. Then reach through the
air tube and remove the thermostat, then the high temp lamp lead (reaching through the bottom
of the light a pair of needle nose pliers to remove it from the lamp support assembly makes this
easier).
2. Remove the 4 screws holding the rear reflector to the air tubes and remove the reflector and
lamp from the lamp head.
3. Remove the top screw from the cooling tube on both sides. Compress the air tubes into the
shutter assembly, remove the chain from the motor sprocket, then remove the shutter assembly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

LT1 Shutter Assembly Drawing
22.15 LT-1 Shutter Assembly Drawings 2 PL 4 PL 2 PL 2 PL 2 PL 16
19 2 29 21 10 28 8 2 18 4 11 23 27 26 24 22 13
15
6
2 12 1 25 REF.
31
REF. REF.
22 REF. 18 25 6 27 32
DETAIL F DETAIL G
DETAIL E 4 PL 4 PL REF. 2 PL 2 PL 2 PLACES
6 REF. 3
4 REF.
I DETAIL F H
DETAIL D
DETAIL E
DETAIL C
I DETAIL A 1 H 6
DETAIL B
2 PL 2 PL
2 SECTION I-I 7 17 25 SECTION H-H 7 NOTE: Older shutters have

8 PL one straight and one curved
linear spring. If the straight
spring needs to be replaced
DETAIL H it is upgraded to the curved
spring
34 34
9
27 4 #8 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 41-08WLS

REF.
26 2 #8-32X.25 SCREW, PHIL,PN.HD. 41-08PPS.25
18 25 1 28 10 21 9
25 21 #6 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 41-06WLS
24 2 #8 X .250 ROUND SPACER 42HHS8521
34 2 THERMOSTAT 56THM01
23 8 #6 FLAT WASHER 41-06WFR
22 33 4 #6-32 NUT, FLEX LOCK 41-06NLM
1 BAFFLE, SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 11D878
32 2 #8-32 X 1/2 PPMS ZINC 41-08PPS.50
21 2 6-32 X 7/16 SOC FLAT 41B06SHF.43
31 3 #6-32 X 1.7 STANDOFF 42HHS8761W
20 4 #6-32X.62 SCREW, 100° FLAT HD. 41B06SHF.62
30 1 SPACER, TUBING (SHORT) 12D3588B07
19 3 #6-32X.37 SCREW, 100° FLAT HD. 41-06PF0.37
29 1 SPACER, TUBING (LONG) 12D3588A07
18 13 #6-32X.37 SCREW, PHIL.PN.HD. 41-06PPS.37
28 2 BUSHING, IDLER ARM 12D3550A62 DETAIL D 8 2 14 30 25 18
17 8 #6-32X.25 SCREW, PHIL PN.HD. 41B06PPS.25
16 2 #4-40 NUT HEX 41-04NHX ITM QTY D ESCRIPTION PART NO.
15 2 #4-40X3/16 PPMS ZINC 41-04PPS.18 DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C
14 3 #6-32X1.000 RD.THD SPACER 42HHS8347 2 PLACES 2 PLACES 4 PLACES
REF. REF. REF.
13 2 FUSE CLIP 43CLP02
12 3 #6 WASHER, LOCK INTERNAL 41-06WLI 19 2 31 1 18 18 1 9 18
REF.
11 2 LAMP SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 63D0142B00
10 6 BALL, BEARING 12D3515A00 33 1 5 10
9 1 SPROCKET, DRIVE (MACHINED) 12D1998A99
8 2 IDLER ARM, SHUTTER 63D3530A62
7 2 SPRING, SHUTTER AL83 12D2060A07
6 2 AIR TUBE LT-1, AL25-53 12D0217A62
4 1 REFLECTOR, INNER RF53 11D886
3 1 SHUTTER ASSEMBLY LT1 11D2206
2 1 TIMING DISC, LT-1 11D210A62 23 20
1 2 SHUTTER END 11D1949A71 2 12 25 25 14 25
ITM QTY DESCRIPTION D3214B PART NO. REF.
94MS54 Rev. A 8-19

22.16 ATH32 Lamp Head
16
2
11
15
7
11 13
62LH83-
ITEM QTY
1 1 LT
Ch
2 1 11
3 1 11
4 4 1 12
5 1 12
6 2 11
7 1 11
8 1 C
9 2 11
10 2 11
11 2 11
12 1 35
13 2 11
14 1 11
15 1 11
9
16 1 11
3 1
62LH83-ATH32 Lamphead, ATH32

Parts List
1 1 LT8 Lamp Head
Chassis
2 1 11D9440Axx EndCover-ATH30 LH
3 1 11D9440Bxx EndCover-ATH30 LH
4 1 12D1874A62 AirTube,Front AL83
5 1 12D1873A62 AirTube,Rear (Drive) AL83
6 2 11D1949A71 Shutter End

7 1 11D2216 LT8 Shutter-Refl. Assm
8 1 C S Tube,.75 O.D. LH Cable Routing Tube
9 2 11D1959Axx Air Baffle - AL83 L.H.
10 2 11D2915Axx Wall Connector-5K LH
11 2 11D9441A07 Reflector,End, ATH30
12 1 35LMP18 Lamp, 8k
13 2 11-07-0908 Intake Shield, ATH32 LH
14 1 11D6693 HR Inner Reflector
15 1 11D3741 Cover, Exhaust Slot, LH
16 1 11D9394A00 Safety Glass, ATH 8K LH
22.17 LT8 Lamp Head

1. Remove the four hex nuts mounting the blowers, disconnect the blower and thermostat wires.
2. Remove the four screws holding the rear reflector to the cooling tubes and remove the reflector
and lamp from the lamp head.
3. Remove the three screws from the blower mounting plate to the cooling tubes on both sides.
Compress the cooling tubes into the shutter assembly, remove the chain from the motor
sprocket, then remove the shutter assembly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

AccuTray
LT8 Service
Shutter Assembly Drawing Manual version:7/10/12 page 211
22.18 LT-8 Shutter Assembly Drawing
4 PL 4 PL 4 PL
16
REF. 4 23 27 26
28 13
2 19 2 22 10 21 2 18
15
6 OR 8
REF. REF.
14 12 1 25
11 11 18 25 6 OR 8
DETAIL E REF. DETAIL F DETAIL G
4 PL 4 PL REF.REF.
2 7 2 PL 17 25
9
SECTION G-G 8 PL SECTION H-H
29 DETAIL G
29
REF.
DETAIL E 3
4 REF. DETAIL D
DETAIL F
G H
1
REF.
1 6
G DETAIL A
2 PL DETAIL B H DETAIL C
29 2 THERMOSTAT 56THM01
28 2 BUSHING, IDLER ARM 12D3550A62
18 25 2 21 28 10 22 25 18
27 4 #8 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 41 08WLS
26 4 #8-32X.25 SCREW, PHIL,PN.HD. 41 08PPS.25
24 4 #6-32 NUT, FLEX LOCK 41 06NLM
23 4 #6 FLAT WASHER 41 06WFR
22 2 6-32 X 7/16 SOC FLAT 41B06SHF.43
21 2 IDLER ARM, SHUTTER 63D3530A62
20 4 #6-32X.62 SCREW, 100° FLAT HD. 41B06SHF.62
2 APPLY LOCTITE 242 TO THREADS WHERE INDICATED.
19 3 #6-32X.37 SCREW, 100° FLAT HD. 41 06PF0.37 REF. REF.
18 13 #6-32X.37 SCREW, PHIL.PN.HD. 41B06PPS.37 DETAIL D 14 Newer units
1 have fixed spacer 9
17 8 #6-32X.25 SCREW, PHIL PN.HD. 41B06PPS.25 here
16 2 #4-40 NUT HEX 41 04NHX
15 2 #4-40X.25 SCREW, 100° FLAT HD. 41B04PF025 DETAIL A DETAIL B
DETAIL C
14 6 #6-32X.687 RD. SPACER 42HHS8779 2 PLACES 2 PLACES
4 PLACES
13 2 FUSE CLIP 43CLP02 REF. REF. REF.
12 3 #6 WASHER, LOCK INTERNAL 41 06WLI 19 14 1 18 18 1 9 18
11 2 LAMP SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 63D0142B03 REF.
10 6 BEARING, BALL SEE BOM 24 1 5 10
9 1 SPROCKET, DRIVE (MACHINED) 12D1998A99
8 1 AIR TUBE, FRONT 12D1874A62
7 2 SPRING, SHUTTER AL83 12D2060A07
6 1 AIR TUBE, DRIVE 12D1873A62
4 1 REFLECTOR, INNER, RF83-SW-G 11D1876B99
3 1 LT8 SHUTTER-REFLECTOR ASS'Y 11D2216
2 1 TIMING DISC, LT-1 11D0210A62 23 20
1 2 SHUTTER END, PHOTOCELL, SLOT 11D3974A71 2 12 25 25 14 25
ITM QTY DESCRIPTION D4358A PART NO. REF.
94MS54 Rev. A 8-21

22.19 Idle Setting
 The idle level occurs between exposures and low power exposures. The idle setting determines
the power and temperature of the lamp, while at idle. It also allows for much lower idle power
than was ever attainable before.
 This lower power level provides a wider light output range, low power consumption, lower
heat generation, and increased lamp life. At low power levels, the lamps normally become
unstable. If over cooled, they begin to dissipate less energy, which causes them to cool more.
This can continue until they extinguish. When lamps become hotter at idle, they become more
efficient and dissipate more energy, making them hotter still. This becomes stable, and is
commonly done in conventional light sources, but will shorten the life of the lamp and wastes
energy. We have chosen to servo the cooling, by sensing the lamp condition and adjusting the
cooling to regulate the idle temperature.
 The idle setting is done at the factory and is rarely necessary in the field. Always check all
other causes of problems before changing the setting. If the lamp becomes too cool during
operation, the board will sense this level and initiate a warm-up cycle. During warm-up, the
shutter will close and will not open until the unit is sufficiently warm. A symptom of this is:
after an exposure is started, the shutter will open, then close again for several seconds, before
finishing the exposure. This should only happen if the unit is left for a period of time.
Successive rapid exposures would not fail, since it takes many minutes for the unit to over cool.
This over cooling situation could also be due to a bad idle capacitor, which would not allow
sufficient energy to the lamp to keep it warm.
 After checking the capacitors, mark the factory setting of the trimpot that is located on the back
side of the PC board. The trimpot sets the power level that the lamp idles at. Turning the
trimpot counterclockwise will first slow the lamp blowers. As the lamp reaches the new idle
setting, the blowers will speed up to hold the new level. Setting with a meter is done by
measuring the lamp voltage on terminals 2 and 3. See section on Lamp Voltage for proper idle
voltage setting. The voltage will increase with a counterclockwise and decrease with a
clockwise direction. This voltage change is a secondary effect after the lamp has responded to
the change in cooling. The changes should be done in small increments, waiting between
adjustment for the voltage to stabilize.
 The idle setting affects the power that the lamp attains on warm-up cycle, before switching to
idle and the idle temperature of the lamp. If the setting is too high (too far counterclockwise),
the unit will run at high power, with no cooling until the thermostats switch the unit off. The
idle temperature of the lamp affects its life and reliability. If the idle setting is too low (too far
clockwise ), the lamp will be slow to come to power for exposures, and the unit may close the
shutter, after the unit has begun to expose to warm back to power. For these reasons, please
take care when making this adjustment and check other problems first.
22.20 Lamp Head Blowers

 The lamp head blowers are controlled by the printed circuit board to provide the correct
cooling to the lamp. During warm-up, the blowers are off or run very slowly. At idle and
during low exposure, the blowers vary in speed. Both at high exposure and cool-down the
blowers run at full speed.
 A symptom of a defective blower would be: during high power exposure, after approximately
10 seconds, the lamp extinguishes and requires 2 to 4 minutes to restart. One blower will speed
up to compensate for the defective unit or low power. When the unit switches to high power,
the additional heat causes one of the lamp thermostats to open. (See also Interlock System for
information on the thermostats.)
 To test the blowers, turn the power supply main switch on then off. During the cool-down
cycle, place a piece of paper over each intake vent located on the lamp end. The paper should
be drawn to the lamp end. If one lamp end does not draw, that blower is suspect.
 To replace the blower in the lamp head, see section Opening Lamp Head.   Blown Fuse on PC
Board
 If the fuse blows on the printed circuit board, check if the fuse is a 5 amp fuse.
 The printed circuit board drives five or six circuits: the lamp head blowers, shutter motor,
power supply blower, and the relays. To find the cause, unplug the unit and replace the fuse;
then disconnect the wires to the lamp head on terminals 5 and 6, and disconnect one of the wire
nuts connecting the blower in the power supply. The relay coils rarely cause any problem.
 Plug in the unit and turn on the power switch for 10 seconds. If the fuse blows, the problem is
either: the power supply blower, the p.c.board or in one of the relay coils. Unplug the unit and
reconnect the red wire to the terminal strip. Plug in the unit and turn on, then off. The shutter
should now turn. If the fuse blows, the problem is in the shutter motor or wiring to the motor.
Unplug the unit and connect the blue wire to the terminal strip. Turn on the unit, then off for
the cool-down cycle to test the lamphead blowers. If the fuse blows during this test, the
problem could be with either of the two blowers in the lamp head. Normally, when the coil on a
blower fails, the coil will become discolored. See section Opening Lamp Head. If the fuse has
not blown throughout the test, the power supply blower is suspect.
22.21 Lamp Head Signals

 Signals at the Terminal Strip (Cable to the Lamp Head)
 A great deal of information about the operation of the lamp may be found at the terminal strip,
in the power supply that connects to the lamp head. The terminals are counted number 1 at the
end where the cable begins, and wire number 18 is the last wire. Terminal number 1 is closest
to the dividing wall in the power supply.
A great deal of information about the operation of the lamp may be found
at the terminal strip, in the power supply that connects to the lamp head.
The terminals are counted number 1 at the end where the cable begins,
and wire number 18 is the last wire. Terminal number 1 is closest to the
AccuTray Service Manual
dividing wall in the power supply. version:7/10/12 page 214
Terminal# Description
#1 Ground to lamp head
#2 Lamp
#3 Lamp
#4 V ~ co m m o n
#5 Lamp fans
#6 Shutter motor
#7 Shutter position switch
#8 Not currently used
#9 Shutter position switch
#10 Interlock and thermostat switching
#11 Not currently used
#12 Incoming voltage
#13 Autoformer
#14 Incoming voltage
 #1 The ground terminal is for safety purposes and carries no current.

 •#2#3
#1 Lamp Theterminals
ground terminal
2 and 3iscarry
for safety purposes
the power to and carries Ifnothe
the lamp. current.
lamp is hot or fails to start, the
•voltage
#2#3 should
Lamp be terminals
600 to2 950V~.
and 3 carry Duringthe power to thethere
this time, lamp.areIf the lamp pulses that may damage a
voltage
is hot orvoltmeter.
sensitive fails to start, the voltage after
Immediately should thebelamp
600 to 950V~.the
strikes, During
voltage thiswill drop as low as 20V~,
time,
then risethere
as thearelampvoltage
warms pulses
to thethatoperating
may damage a sensitive
voltage, between voltmeter.
180 and 240V~.
 #4 V~ common terminal is the V~ return for the lamp fans, the 20V~,
Immediately after the lamp strikes, the voltage will drop as low as shutter motor, and the interlock
then rise
switch. On as the lamp
120V~ warms to this
equipment, the operating
is the V~voltage,
common between
from180 the and
power line. This potential is
240V~.
generated on 208/240V~ equipment and may be 60V~ from the line common.
 •#5 #4 V~ common
The voltage appliedterminal
to theis lamp
the V~fan return for the
varies lamp fans,isthe
as cooling shutter The voltage is measured
required.
motor, and the interlock switch. On 120V~ equipment,
referenced to terminal 4 and terminal 5. This voltage starts at 0V~ this is the V~ during unit warm-up and
common
when the lampfromtemperature
the power line. risesThis potential isAs
it increases. generated
the lamp onreaches
208/240V~ temperature, the fans speed
 8-24equipment and may be 60V~ from the line common.
 •94MS54
#5 The voltage
Rev. A applied to the lamp fan varies as cooling is required.
 increases
The voltage is measured
to regulate referenced
the lamp. At idle,to terminal 4 andisterminal
this voltage typically 5. 45
This- 90V~ and depends on the
voltage starts at 0V~ during unit warm-up and when the lamp temperature
lamp age and ambient temperature. When an exposure at high power is initiated, the lamp
rises rises
voltage it increases. As the lamp
to the maximum. The reaches
voltage temperature,
remains there the after
fans speed
the lamp returns to low power,
until the lamp temperature again stabilizes.
 • #6 The shutter voltage is present during the rotation94MS54 of the shutter.
Rev. AThe shutter motor runs on
120V~ measured to terminal 4.
 #7
 #8
 #9
 #10 Interlock and thermostat switching. During normal operation, terminal 10 is shorted to
terminal 4 (V~ common). An V~ voltage present would indicate the glass switch or one of the
two thermostat switches open.
 #11 Not presently used.
terminal 10 is shorted to terminal 4 (V~ common). An V~ voltage present
would indicate the glass switch or one of the two thermostat switches
open.
• #11 Not presently used.
• AccuTray
#12#14 Service
Incoming voltage.Manual
To get loadversion:7/10/12
voltage, meter page 215
between
terminals 12 & 14 while power is on. On 208/240V~ equipment set
 #12#14 Incoming voltage.
voltageToselection
get loadswitch accordingly,
voltage, (low=219V~
meter between or below,
terminals 12 &high=220V~
14 while power
is on. On 208/240V~or equipment
above). set voltage selection switch accordingly, (low=219V~ or
below, high=220V~ • or#13
above).
a. Autoformer
 #13 a. Autoformer.
Light Function States
22.22 Light Function States
Model Warm-Up Idle Low Exp. Med Exp. High Exp. Cool Down Trigger
Unit Fans On / On On / On On / On On / On On / On On / On On / On
Power Relay On / On On / On On / On On / On On / On Off / Off Off / Off
Shutter Closed / Off Closed / Off Open / Off Open / Off Open / Off Open / Off * / Off
Lamp Fans Off / Off Var.Slow / On Slow/Med. / On Med./Fast / On Fast / On Fast / On
Off / Off High Relay On / On Off / Off Off / Off Off / Off On / On */*
*/* Medium Relay On / On Off / Off Off / Off On / On On / On */*
Warm-Up - Occurs after the lamp ignites and ends when the lamp has
 Warm-Up - Occurs after the lamp ignites and ends when the lamp has warmed to operating
warmed to operating temperatures. The lamp fans are held off and the
temperatures. The lamp fans are held off and the unit goes to high power. Due to the
unit goes to high power. Due to the technology of the power supply, the
technology of the power supply, the units do not draw large amounts of current during warm-
units do not draw large amounts of current during warm-up. Due to the
up. Due to the restrictive cooling, the lamps warm up rapidly, without surge current. The
restrictive cooling, the lamps warm up rapidly, without surge current.
shutter will not open until the unit reaches temperature.
The shutter will not open until the unit reaches temperature.
 Idle - Between exposures, the lamp is held in idle. During this period, the lamp fans vary in
speed to maintain the proper lamp temperature. This allows the unit to consume less power on
94MS54idle, and
Rev. A provides a wider range of exposure capabilities, since this same low power level
8-25 is
available for exposures. The lower idle saves power, generates less heat, and extends the lamp
life.
 Expose - The units allow exposures at three levels. At high power, the high and medium relays
are activated. At medium power, the medium relay is activated.
 Cool-Down - When the unit is switched off, all fans are turned on to cool the equipment. After
the cooling period, the unit disables all of its functions until it is started again.
 Trigger - If the lamp is turned on before the unit has fully cooled, the fans will run at full
power and a trigger pulse is created. This mode will release itself when the lamp strikes. The
unit is responding to conditions to provide these functions. It is therefore not possible to
confuse the unit. If there is a momentary loss of power, the unit will cool the lamp until it
strikes. It is recommended that the unit be shut off and allowed to cool, rather than turning off
the power supplied to the unit.
22.23 Printed Circuit Board Layout

 This is a description of the signals and voltages present on the pins of the printed circuit board.
 64MV407V03 Control Board layout. Used on all BUT 8kW light sources 64MV407V24
Control Board layout. Used on all 8kW light sources
Note: Graphic of the new style p.c.board is shown. Relay style p.c.board has the same
connector hookups and pin outs, however the LEDs are on the component side of
the p.c.board not on the solder side as on the new style. The old style board is
replaced by the new style and is interchangeable.
Note: Graphic of the new style p.c.board is shown. Relay style p.c.board
has the same connector hookups and pin outs, however the LEDs
are on the component side of the p.c.board not on the solder side
AccuTray Service
as on the new Manual
style. The old style boardversion:7/10/12
is replaced by the216
page new
style and is interchangeable.
F1 P2
P1
K1 A B C D
R101
E
R102 R103 R104 Front View of Control Board
U101 U102 U103 U104
G F H I J
R108
Triacs & Relay
R106
R110
R112
R10
R105
R107
R109
R111
TR101 TR102 TR103 TR104
J1 K1 Unit Power
C103 C104 R9
C102
C101 R11
22K
TR101 Shutter Motor
M 120K
K L
R59 2
TR102 High Relay
8.2K
TR103 Medium Relay
REV.
64MV407V
470K
TR105
R50
32TRN02
TR104 Main Contactor

HS101
U8 U9 U6 TR105 Lamp head fans
REV.
64MV504V
COIL2 COIL1
P1 Power Connector P2 Switch Connector LED's

1 AC Hot 7 Unit Fan 1 AC Hot 7 High Switch D18 Lamp head fans
2 AC Common 8 Power Relay 2 AC Common 8 Low/Med Switch D13 Power Supply Fan
3 Lamp Fans 9 Not Connected 3 Not Connected 9 Manual Expose D17 Shutter Motor
4 Shutter Motor 10 Aux Terminal 4 Aux Terminal 10 Interlock D15 High Relay
5 High Relay 11 DC Common 5 DC Com/Ground 11 Not Connected D16 Medium Relay
6 Medium Relay 12 Position 6 Power Switch 12 +12 VDC D14 Power Relay
Check Idle Voltage on Board or on Terminal Strip Lugs #2 and #3
Switch Connector Power Connector

D18
D14
D16
D15
D17
D13
Idle Voltage Adjustment Back View of Control Board
94MS54 Rev. A 8-27

22.24 Signal Description
Power Connector
Signal Description
Power Connector AccuTray Service Manual version:7/10/12 page 217
P1) V~ Hot: Supply to board approximately 125V~.
V~ Common: Common to board is the common also for relays, shutter fans,
P2) and the internal lamp head interlock. (This may not be at ground potential
and should be measured with caution).
P3) Lamp Fans: V~ proportional drive output for the blowers in the lamp head.
P4) Shutter: V~ output to drive the shutter motor.
High: V~ Output to drive the high relay, which engages the high power
P5)
capacitor bank during warm-up and high power exposures.
Medium: V~ Output to drive the medium relay which engages the medium
P6)
capacitor bank during warm-up and both high and medium level exposures.
P7) Unit Fan: V~ Output to drive the power supply blower or fans.
Power Relay: V~ Output to drive the main relay. This provides power to the
P8)
lamp circuit.
P9) Not currently used.
Aux: Terminal connects to the signal connector for accessories (Not used in
P10)
most equipment).
DC Common: Circuit common for low voltage signals from the lamp (this
P11) may not be the same potential as V~ Common connection and should never
be interchanged).
Position: Shutter switch active signal from the lamp head - Low voltage
P12)
when the shutter is open and 12VDC when closed.
Switch Connection
S1) V~ Hot: Output, V~ supply for internal accessories.
S2) V~ Common: Output, V~ common for internal Accessories.
S3) Not currently used.
Aux: Terminal connects to the power connector for accessories (Not used in
S4)
most equipment).
DC common: DC circuit common for switches (Not the same as V~

S5)
Common).
Power Switch: Switch to turn on power. Low (0V) for power on. The power
S6) can also be turned on by the integrator through the outlet. (Only a signal !
Power is always present on the PC Board).
94MS54 Rev. A
S7) High Switch: Switch to select high power level. Low (0V) for high.
Low/Med Switch: Switch to select power level when high switch is off. Low
S8)
(0V) for medium power, High (12VDC) for low power.
S9) Manual Switch: Manual expose switch. Low (0V) to cause exposure.
Interlock: External interlock outlet. Line must be connected to DC common

S10)
to allow an exposure. (Outlet is normally shorted when plug in not inserted).
S11) Not currently used.
S12) +12V: Output for internal accessories (Not used in most equipment).
DIN Connection
Expose: High expose when connected to a compatible integrator. High /

D1) Medium / Low expose depending on the unit switches when connected to an
older style integrator or other manufacturer’s equipment.
D2) DC Common: Common for all signals.
D3) Low Exp: Low expose input.
D4) Power: Signal from integrator to turn on the power.
D5) Medium Exp: Medium expose input.
LEDs
The LEDs
22.25 LED’s are an indicator of an acting command that you are asking the
control board to do. For a list of which commands activate which LEDs,
 The LEDs are an indicator of an acting command that you are asking the control board to do.
look at the chart above, labeled LED indicators. The LEDs light when
For a list of which commands activate which LEDs, look at the chart above, labeled LED
they detect a ground or negative going pulse.
indicators. The LEDs light when they detect a ground or negative going pulse.
8-29
8-30
110 VAC 1
E1
AC Common 2 Lamp Signal
E2
Not Used 3
Aux terminal 4 AUX

12 V Power Supply
Connector P2
DC Common 5
22.26 Circuit diagram
Power Switch* 6 1 110 VAC

Circuit for
High Switch* 7
Output for Lamp 2 AC Common
Lamp Cooling Logic Blowers
B
Diagram
D18,U4,U5
Low/Medium Switch* 8 3 Lamp Fans
Input Filters
Output for Shutter
Manual Expose Switch* Motor
9
407 board
D17,Q6,K5 A 4 Shutter Motor
Safety Interlock* 10 Output for High

5 High Relay
Relay
D15,Q4,K3 A
(64MV407
Not Used 11
Output for Medium 6 Medium Relay
Relay D16,Q5,K4
+12 V 12 Output for Power A
7 Unit Fan
Connector P1
Supply fan
– 60Hz.60Hz)
Shutter and Intensity Logic D13,Q2,K1 A

Output for Power
Relay 8 Power Relay
D14,Q3,K2 A
9 Not Connected
1 High Expose
AUX 10 Aux Terminal
4 Power On
AL55, 65, 75, 95, 96

Ouput Type "A"
*No Switches on Models

AC Source Ouput Type "B"
2 DC Common A K__ 11 DC Common
J1 Signal B
Output AC Source
5 Medium Expose D18 12 Shutter Position
Input Filters
3 Low Expose D__
U4 U5
Signal Q__ Output
94MS54 Rev. A
Lamphead for all Lights
22.27 Lamp Head for All Lights
Thermostat Thermostat
Shutter Position Switch
Safety Glass Switch

11 12
9 10
Shutter Motor
7 8
Blowers
5 6
3 4
1 2
Lamp
Trigger Board
94MS54 Rev. A 8-31

AL 54 Power Supply 60Hz

22.28 AL54 Power supply 60Hz
208/240 VAC
INPUT
Tap Switch Voltage
Selection Toward
COM COM front of unit
Board
Safety Interlock 208 240 240 208 240 208
18
Ballast Ballast Power Relay

120 0 17
Din 3 Amp
Socket Slow Blow
16µƒ 12µƒ 12µƒ 16µƒ Fuse 16
12
Position 2 15
11
P2 Position 1
10 blu
Medium High
9 Relay Relay P
8 14 O
P
O 7 blk W
W E
E 6 R
R 5 wht 13 S
4 Power wht U
C Supply
O 3 P
Blower P
N
T 2 L
R 12 Y
1
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A I
11 org N
R
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 9 P
5 blu/wht
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
5
12 11
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7
3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1 Toward
center of unit
8-32 94MS54 Rev. A

ALAccuTray Service
54-480 Power Supply 60Hz Manual version:7/10/12 page 222
22.29 AL54-480 Power supply 60Hz
120 VAC
INPUT
480 VAC 60Hz
INPUT
Toward
277 277 front of unit
Safety Interlock
18
Com
17
Din
Socket
10µƒ 10µƒ 16µƒ 16µƒ 16
12
11 15
P2
10 blu
Medium High
9 Relay Relay
14 P
P 8 O
O 7 blk W
W E
E 6 R
R 5 wht 13 S
C 4 Power wht U
O Supply P
3 Blower
N P
T 2 L
R 1 12 Y
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A 11 org I
R N
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 9 P
5 blu/wht
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
12 11 5
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7 3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1 Toward
center of unit
94MS54 Rev. A 8-33


220 VAC 50HZ
INPUT
Voltage
Toward
Selection front of unit
COM COM
Board
Safety Interlock 240 240 240
18
Ballast Power Relay

Ballast
120 0 17
Din 3 Amp
Socket Slow Blow
12µƒ 8µƒ 16µƒ 12µƒ 16µƒ Fuse 16
12
Position 2 15
P2 11
10 blu Position 1
Medium High
9 Relay Relay P
8 14 O
P
O 7 blk W
W E
6 R
E
R 5 wht 13 S
C 4 Power wht U
O Supply P
3 Blower
N P
T 2 L
R 1 12 Y
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A I
R 11 org N
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 P
9
5 blu/wht
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
5
12 11
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7 3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1
Toward
center of unit
8-34 94MS54 Rev. A


220 VAC 50HZ
INPUT
Tap Switch Voltage Toward
COM COM Selection front of unit
240 208 240 208 Board
Safety Interlock 208
18

120 0 17
Din 3 Amp
Socket Slow Blow
10µƒ 16µƒ 12µƒ 12µƒ Fuse 16
12
15
P2 11
10 blu
Medium High
9 Relay Relay
14 P
P 8 O
O 7 blk W
W E
E 6 R
R 5 wht 13 S
C 4 Power wht U
O Supply P
3 Blower
N P
T 2 L
R 1 12 Y
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A I
R 11 org N
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 9 P
5 blu/wht
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
12 11 5
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7 3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1 Toward
center of unit
94MS54 Rev. A 8-35

AL 84-480 Power Supply 60Hz
22.32 AL84-480 Power Supply 60Hz
120 VAC 60HZ

INPUT
480 VAC 60HZ
INPUT
Toward
front of unit
277 277
Safety Interlock
18

17
Din
Socket
10µƒ 10µƒ 12µƒ 12µƒ 16
12
15
P2 11
10 blu
Medium High
9 Relay Relay
8 14 P
P O
O 7 blk W
W E
E 6 R
R 5 wht 13 S
C 4 Power wht U
O Supply P
3 Blower
N P
T 2 L
R 1 12 Y
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A 11 org I
R N
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 9 P
5 blu/wht
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
12 11 5
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7 3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1 Toward
center of unit
8-36 94MS54 Rev. A

AccuTray
AL Service
94 Power Supply 50Hz Manual version:7/10/12 page 226
220 VAC 50HZ
INPUT
Toward
COM COM front of unit
Safety Interlock 240 240 240
18

120 0 17
Din 3 Amp
Socket Slow Blow
16µƒ 12µƒ 4µƒ 16µƒ 12µƒ Fuse 16
Position 2
12
Position 1 15
P2 11
10 blu
Medium High
9 Relay Relay
14 P
P 8 O
O 7 blk W
W Power E
E 6 Supply R
R 5 wht Blower
13 S
C 4 wht U
O 3 P
N P
T 2 L
R 1 12 Y
O red
L T
E
B R
O 12 gry 11 M
A I
R 11 org N
D 10 brn A
L
9 10
8 red/wht blk S
T
7 org/wht R
6 brn/wht I
P1 P
5 blu/wht 9
clear
4 red
3 blu
2 wht 8
1 blk brn
7
org
6
red
12 11 5
blu
10 9 4
wht
8 7 3
pur
Interconnecting 6 5
Beau Plug 2
Connector yel
4 3
1
grn/
yel
2 1 Toward
center of unit
94MS54 Rev. A 8-37

Interconnect Cable

22.34 Interconnect Cable
WHITE GREEN
2 1
YELLOW
4 3
VIOLET
6 5
RED BLUE
8 7
BROWN ORANGE
10 9
HEAT SHRINK BLACK

12 11
WHITE GREEN
2 1
YELLOW
4 3
6 VIOLET
5
RED BLUE
8
7
BROWN ORANGE
10 9
HEAT SHRINK BLACK

12 11
8-38 94MS54 Rev. A

22.35 Printing Light Checklist
Check List for Printing Light Troubleshooting and Service.
1. Disconnect the integrator/timer from the power supply.   This will make sure that a faulty
integrator or cable is not responsible for the malfunction and also eliminate a bad DIN socket
on the p.c.board.
2. Check the tap switch (208/240V~ power supplies only. If the top LED is lit, make sure the
switch is in the UP position, and if the bottom LED is lit, make sure the switch is in the DOWN
position (see Printing Light Installation Manual). Improper setting will most likely cause
blower, capacitor, and/or PC board failure and will prematurely age the lamp.   The LEDs next
to the switch are not controlled by the switch, the LEDs tell you where to put the switch.
a. If the tap switch is set for 240V~ and you have 208V~ coming in, the light source is
going to draw excess amperage (as voltage goes down amperage draw has to go up). If
when you open the power supply you notice right off burnt wires or connectors, one of
the most likely causes is the tap switch in the wrong position. This condition usually
take months and sometimes years (depending upon the degree of voltage discrepancy)
to show up. When the burnt wire is on the tap switch itself or on the bottom side of the
power relay it is very difficult to see the burnt wires without some disassembly of the
power supply.
b. If the tap switch is set for 208V~ and you have 240V~ coming in, the p.c.board and the
blowers are usually the two items to get damaged. Over voltage to the blowers will burn
them out and are usually the first to component damaged, the p.c.board will also be
damaged under extended usage in an over voltage condition.
c. If the voltage fluctuates there is a line that you can not cross 219V~ 220V~ the voltage
must always stay 220V~ or above or always stay 219V~ or below.   If the switch itself
is bad with no external signs of burning make sure that the user is not flipping the
switch with the power supply on. Flipping the switch with the light source turned on
will cause damage to the switch that may take time to show up.
3. Check the safety glass for proper installation. The long dimension of the glass goes parallel
with the long dimension of the lamphead. Improper installation can cause the glass to shatter
and/or an 'open' in the safety interlock circuit.
a. You must be able to reach up, place your fingers against the safety glass and there must
be play front to back and side to side. Otherwise the glass does not have room for
expansion and will more than likely shatter under use.
4. Check the beau plug at the lamp head. Make sure it is pushed in all the way. The most likely
problem caused by a loose beau plug is an erratic shutter operation or an open safety interlock
circuit.
Just push in on the beau plug while rocking it up and down to make sure it is in all the way.
5. Check the lamp head interlock circuit. Remove or lower the safety glass. Turn the power
supply on. Check for 120V~ from terminal 4 to terminal 10; when the glass is reinstalled, the
voltage should go low. (See Interlock System for operation.)
With the interlock open what should happen is the shutter should close and the power supply
blower should come on, that's all. After you remove the glass and you turn on the power
supply, if the light source comes on turn power off immediately and determine what is shorting
out and bypassing the safety interlock circuit. If this does happen it is possible that the safety
interlock circuit is shorting to ground. On older light sources this condition would burn up the
autoformer. On newer light sources this condition will blow the 3A slow blow fuse on the
dividing wall below the wiring harness.
6. Check input voltage with the power off at terminals 12 & 14. Then with power on, intensity
level on high, and manual expose set on, check the voltage again. If the voltage drops more
than 6 V~, the incoming power is most likely a problem.
You can do checks 6 and 7 at the same time. Write down the voltage that you get before
turning power on and after turning power on but before the light source completes the warm up
cycle. This is maximum amperage draw so the voltage will show maximum drop.
If the voltage in check 6 drops more than 6V~ the incoming power is a problem and it can not
be corrected in the power supply (there is nothing you can do in the power supply to correct
bad voltage from the wall).
7. Check input voltage to the PC board with the power off at pins 1 & 2 (see p.c.board layout for
pin location). Then with power on, intensity level on high, and manual expose set on, check the
voltage again. If the voltage drops more than 6 V~, the autoformer is most likely a problem.
 If and only if the voltage on12and14insted 6 is good can you say that the autoformer is
definitely bad, if the voltage on 12 and 14 in step 6 is bad you can not get a correct reading for
step 7.
8. Check capacitors and relay circuit by:  The capacitors and relays are checked by watching the
voltage changes that take place at the different intensity levels. If a capacitor is not in the
circuit the voltage readings on input and output will be the same. If the capacitor is pulled into
the circuit the input and output voltages will be hundreds of volts apart. Now the tricky part, if
a capacitor is pulled into the circuit the way it is supposed to be then we need to look at the
voltage itself to see if we see an increase in the overall voltage to make sure that the capacitor
is adding voltage to the circuit. If the capacitor is pulled into the circuit when it is supposed to
be but the overall voltage does not increase then the capacitor is defective.
9. Check voltage from terminal 3 to the capacitor input (orange wire on top of the capacitors).
The voltage should be 500+ V~. If voltage is lower, check the power path to the tap switch and
ballasts. 500+V~ is typical for 5kW light sources and 700+ V~ for the 6kW and 8kW light
sources. If the voltage on a 208/240V~ is low, then not all the ballasts are being powered
properly. This is usually caused by a bad tap switch or a burnt connector at the tap switch,
however any of the wiring between ballast and tap switch is suspect. If the voltage is zero then
a burnt wire at the power relay or a bad power relay is most likely the problem. There is a
possibility that if there is zero V~ that you might have a grounded safety interlock circuit.
 At idle, check voltage from terminal 3 to the capacitor outputs (yellow, brown, and blue
wires on top of the capacitors).  
 On the following charts find the Wattage of the unit you are working on and then for
the lamp installed into the unit, these are the general voltages you should read. These
voltages are a ball park figure depending upon several factors and the actual voltage is
not as important as to whether or not the voltages change on the capacitors according to
intensity level. For instance on a 5kW light with an L1250 lamp at low intensity one
capacitor will be about 200V~ and three capacitors will be over 500V~. Now when you
go to medium intensity you should see two capacitors at about 230V~ and two
capacitors at over 500V~. NOTE the number of capacitors at the lower voltage (i.e. in
the circuit) and the voltage increase from the previous intensity 200V~ at low and
230V~ at medium.
 At low power, manual expose on, check voltage from terminal 3 to the capacitor
outputs (yellow, brown, and blue wires on top of the capacitors).
 At medium power, manual expose on, check voltage from terminal 3 to the capacitor
 At high power, manual expose on, check voltage from terminal 3 to the capacitor
SEE CHART FOR PROPER VOLTAGE READINGS (ALL VOLTAGES ARE READ TO
TERMINAL 3).
5kW with
5kW with L1250
L1250 LAMP
LAMP
ORANGE
ORANGE YELLOW
YELLOW BROWN
BROWN BLUE #1
BLUE #1 BLUE #2
BLUE #2
a.
a. IDLE/LOW
IDLE/LOW 500+
500+ 200
200 500+
500+ 500+
500+ 500+
500+
b.
b. MEDIUM
MEDIUM 500+
500+ 225
225 225
225 500+
500+ 500+
500+
c.
c. HIGH
HIGH 500+
500+ 270
270 270
270 270
270 270
270
5kW with
5kW with L1252
L1252 or
or L1261
L1261 LAMP
LAMP
ORANGE
ORANGE YELLOW
YELLOW BROWN
BROWN BLUE
BLUE #1
#1 BLUE
BLUE #2
#2
a.
a. IDLE/LOW
IDLE/LOW 500+
500+ 200
200 500+
500+ 500+
500+ 500+
500+
b.
b. MEDIUM
MEDIUM 500+
500+ 230
230 230
230 500+
500+ 500+
500+
c.
c. HIGH
HIGH 500+
500+ 270
270 270
270 270
270 270
270
8kW with
8kW with L1280
L1280 LAMP
LAMP
ORANGE
ORANGE YELLOW
YELLOW BROWN
BROWN BLUE #1
BLUE #1 BLUE #2
BLUE #2
a.
a. IDLE
IDLE 700+
700+ 360
360 700+
700+ 700+
700+ 700+
700+
b.
b. LOW
LOW 700+
700+ 360
360 700+
700+ 700+
700+ 700+
700+
c.
c. MEDIUM
MEDIUM 700+
700+ 390
390 390
390 700+
700+ 700+
700+
d.
d. HIGH
HIGH 700+
700+ 425
425 425
425 425
425 425
425
8kW with
8kW with L1281
L1281 LAMP
LAMP
ORANGE
ORANGE YELLOW
YELLOW BROWN
BROWN BLUE #1
BLUE #1 BLUE #2
BLUE #2
a.
a. IDLE
IDLE 700+
700+ 395
395 700+
700+ 700+
700+ 700+
700+
b.
b. LOW
LOW 700+
700+ 395
395 700+
700+ 700+
700+ 700+
700+
c. MEDIUM 700+ 425 425 700+ 700+
c. MEDIUM 700+ 425 425 700+ 700+
b. LOW 700+ 360 700+ 700+ 700+
c. MEDIUM 700+ 390 390 700+ 700+
d. HIGH 700+ 425 425 425 425

8kW with L1281 LAMP
ORANGE YELLOW BROWN BLUE #1 BLUE #2
a. IDLE 700+ 395 700+ 700+ 700+
b. LOW 700+ 395 700+ 700+ 700+
c. MEDIUM 700+ 425 425 700+ 700+
d. HIGH 700+ 485 485 485 485
8kW with L 1282 LAMP
ORANGE YELLOW BROWN BLUE #1 BLUE #2
a. IDLE 700+ 395 700+ 700+ 700+
b. LOW 700+ 395 700+ 700+ 700+
c. MEDIUM 700+ 430 430 700+ 700+
d. HIGH 700+ 510 510 510 510
8-42 ‡ The voltage readings described in the following are typical of 5kW light 94MS54sources see
Rev.voltage
A
chart to find high and low values for others.
10. If a reading remains high (500V~ or more see note ‡) and it should be low (less than 300V~ see
note ‡), the capacitor is not being pulled into the circuit. Check the respective relay, resistor,
and wiring for an open.
11. If a reading remains low (less than 300V~ see note ‡) and it should be high (500V~ or more see
note ‡), the capacitor is locked into the circuit. Check the respective relay, wiring, and PC
board for a short.
12. If the readings show voltage changes from high to low and from low to high, but the overall
low reading does not increase from the previous power level, then the capacitor being pulled
into the circuit has failed.
13. Check the blowers using a piece of paper held up to the intakes at each of the lamphead during
a cool-down cycle. The paper should get held up to each intake, if it doesn’t, the blower is bad.
Blowers speed can not be checked until this point because all previous checks affect the
operation and can make them appear to be operating incorrectly. Also check blower voltage at
terminals 4 & 5 for most lights this voltage should be a MINIMUM of 45V~ some lights this
voltage will be higher depending on lamp used and lamp condition.
14. Check for cooling obstructions on intakes and exhausts. If any are found, remove them.
15. Check lamp idle voltage at terminals 2 & 3. This voltage should match the voltage chart above,
if not, YOU MUST install a new lamp and recheck (see Idle Setting if adjustment is necessary).
  DO NOT ADJUST idle voltage with a used lamp.   Lamp voltage can be effected
by all the checks in the check list to this point. So if this check list is used properly (followed
step by step) if at this point the lamp voltage is out of specification it can now be adjusted if the
lamp is less than two weeks old AND "not or" has no sign of deformation otherwise a new
lamp must be installed before adjusting. Adjusting lamp idle voltage without first checking
other causes of the lamp voltage deviation can damage the equipment.
16. If used, check the power supply safety interlock jack next to the power supply power on/off
switch. A failure in this circuit will not allow the unit to do an exposure, the only time the
shutter will rotate if this circuit is open, is when the power is turned on or off.   If you suspect
this circuit is faulty, turn the manual expose switch on, then short the blue and white wires on
the jack together with a screwdriver (make sure you do not short to ground) and see if the
shutter opens, if it opens the circuit is at fault.
17. Check for smooth shutter rotation. If the shutter rotates smoothly, skip to step 20, otherwise
continue.
18. If the shutter does not rotate smoothly, it may not stop in the correct position and the bearings
must be greased.
19. If the shutter fails to rotate at any time, then check the following:
20. When the shutter is supposed to be moving. Check for 120V~ between terminals 4 & 6. If there
is voltage, go to the lamphead and check for voltage at the shutter motor then skip to step 22.
21. If there is no voltage between terminals 4 & 6, check the PC board output for voltage at pins 2
& 4 (see PC Board Layout for pin location).
22. Check to make sure the shutter stops immediately in the correct position.
23. If the shutter stops immediately, but in the wrong position, check the shutter position switch.
24. If the shutter coasts to a stop in the wrong position, check the shutter brake.
25. If you run into a situation were you are not getting voltage at the terminal strip, relay, blower,
etc. make sure you go to the PC board itself and Double check the PC board outputs before
replacing it.
26. Before you reassemble everything it is a real good idea to: Check the manual operations of the
light source. Just to make sure everything is back together.
27. Reconnect all wires to the integrator and then: Check the remote operations of the light source
from the integrator.
No Strike Fault Tree
22.36 No Strike Fault Tree
No Strike
Yes
Is there 0 VAC across pin Does shutter rotate No

#3 purple on terminal Yes Are there any LED's
when power is turned lit on the PC board?
strip and orange com. on on?
capacitor pack? No
Repair or replace
wires at power Yes Yes
relay or replace
power relay-
No Verify operation
Is the PC board fuse
Is safety glass good?
installed and lever
actuated? Yes
No
Is there less than
500VAC but more Yes
than 0 VAC across#3 Replace
purple on terminal fuse-
strip and orange verify
com. on capacitor operation
No pack? Is power relay No
pulling in?
Repair or
Is there 190 to 245
Yes No replace
Yes VAC on #12 red & wires-
#14 black to top of
Verify
power relay? operation.
Check wiring from Is the lamp new? Yes

voltage selector
assy through No
Replace
ballasts to
thermostats,
capacitors-
Replace Yes Is there 0 VAC across No safety switch
Verify
pins #4 and #10? or associated
operation lamp- wiring-
Verify Verify
operation. operation.
Is there 500+ VAC Yes
on pins #2 yellow
and #3 purple?
No
Is there 120 VAC on Replace

500+ VAC:
PCB connector pins No PCB
Check wiring from Yes
capacitors, through #2 white and #8 Verify
resistor board, to red? operation
terminals #2 and #3. If
wiring is O.K., check Faulty lamp
across terminal strip pins or trigger
1 to 2 and 1 to 3. If either board- Yes
is less than 50 VAC, that Verify
pin is shorted to ground. operation.
Repair or
replace
wires-
Verify
operation
94MS54 Rev. A 8-45

Shutter Rotation Fault Tree
22.37 Shutter Rotation Fault Tree
No Shutter Rotation
Yes
Yes Does the shutter seem to Yes Does the shutter No No

Is the lamp lit?
bind during rotation? rotate at any time?
Yes
No
The shutter will

not open for an
Check the set exposure without
screw on the shutter Is LED #3 lit on PC No
the lamp being lit.
motor gear and the Board? Go to the No Strike
shutter position Fault Tree.
switch.
Yes
Check for 120 VAC on

Is the chain too tight terminal 4 white and No
or bearings worn? terminal 6 red on the
terminal strip when
No shutter should be
rotating.
Yes
If LED #3 is lit, check
for 120 VAC at pins No
Possible Yes 2 and 4 at power
faulty connector on
shutter PC board.
motor.
Adjust shutter
motor and/or Check for 120 VAC Yes
replace bearings at shutter motor.
and air tubes.
Yes
Repair or
replace wiring Replace
No from PC Board PC board
to terminal
strip.
Replace
shutter
Power Supply PCB-Rear View
motor. Repair or
replace wiring
from terminal
strip to shutter
motor.
LED #3
8-46 94MS54 Rev. A

23. Vacuum System

23.1 Vacuum Pumps Description:
The printer uses two 1/4-hp oilless rotary vane vacuum pumps, one for each exposure frame. Pressing
the button on the front nose assembly activates the pump for frame that is out of the cabinet. The
vacuum gauge on the front panel indicates which pump is activated.
23.2 Pump Construction:
This is an oil less vacuum pump; it should never be lubricated. The pump end
plate, body, rotor, and mounting bracket are cast iron. Consequently, any moisture that accumulates in
the pump will corrode the interior, especially if it stands idle. The muffler box on the front of the unit
is made of aluminum.
1. The vanes are hard carbon and are precision ground. They should last many thousands of
hours, depending upon the degree of vacuum or pressure at which the pump is run. The carbon
vanes and grease-packed motor bearings require no oil.
2. Filtration: Be certain that dirt, chips, and other foreign material, often found in new plumbing,
is not allowed to enter the pump. Liquid, moisture vapor, or oil-based contaminants will affect
pump performance and must be prevented from entering the pump. Dirty filters restrict air flow
and, if not corrected, could lead to motor overload, poor performance, and early pump failure.
Check the filters semi annually or when necessary. The filters can be dried with compressed
air. Filters should be cleaned or replaced every 1500 to 3000 hours, depending on the
application.
23.3 Flushing the Pump
Wear eye protection and flush the pump in a well-ventilated area. Do not use
kerosene or other combustible solvents to flush the pump. Use Gast AH 255
flushing solvent or its equivalent. If excessive dirt, foreign particles, moisture,
or oil enter the pump, the vanes will act sluggish or may even break. Flushing
the pump should remove these materials. There are two options for flushing
the pump.
Flushing Option #1
1. This option requires two pipe nipples at least 4" (102 mm) long with 3/ "
2. NPT threads on one end.
3. Remove the filter elements from the front of the muffler box and screw the nipples into the
same holes.
4. With the pump running, allow about 2 tbsp. of flushing solvent to be ingested into the vacuum
side of the unit.
5. Repeat the flushing procedure. If it does not correct and clear the pump, remove the end plate
for further examination.  
Flushing Option #2
1. Remove the filter elements from the front of the muffler box.
2. Carefully remove the five bolts that hold the muffler box in place (be careful not to damage the
gaskets). Tap the box with a small hammer to break it loose.
Prying with a screwdriver will damage the gasket. This will allow access to
the intake and exhaust ports.
3. Follow through with steps 2 and 3 for Flushing Option #1.
23.4 Pump Disassembly

1. Pump disassembly is required if flushing does not remove the foreign materials.
2. Disconnect the power to the pump motor.
3. Remove the six bolts holding the end plate to the body.
4. Remove the end plate and the four vanes (do not remove the rotor or loosen any electric motor
through-bolts).
5. The vanes could be worn or only require further cleaning. The top clearance (between rotor and
body) may be adjusted by:
6. Loosening the body bolts.
7. Lightly tapping on the pump body and turning the rotor, while setting this clearance, to assure
that all points on the rotor clear the body.  
23.5 Pump Checkout
1. If the pump does not activate when the button is pressed, see the Diagnostics section,
then:
2. Ensure that the exposure frame is in its full outward position.
3. Check for switch continuity at the switch connector. The switch harness connector is
under the nose assembly, where it meets the front bulkhead.
4. Check if the vacuum pump LED is lit at the control box. If so, check for voltage at the pump. If
voltage is present at the pump connector, but the pump fails to operate, replace the pump. If the
control box LED is not on, check the wiring and connections from the switch to the control
box.
23.6 Pump Replacement
1. Vacuum pump replacement is straightforward. The left-hand pump controls the lower frame;
the right-hand pump controls the upper frame. (Left and right as viewed by the operator.)
2. Open either the left or right side cabinet door, depending on which pump is to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tubing from the pump. Push the outer ring on the connector and pull
the vacuum tubing out.
4. Disconnect the in-line electrical pump connection located approx. 6" from the motor end of the
pump.
5. Remove the four 1/2" nuts that secure the pump mounting plate to the isolation mounts. Then
lift the pump out of the unit.
6. Remove the mounting plate from the defective pump and install it on the new pump.
7. Note the wire positions and remove the electrical harness from the defective pump and install it
on the new pump.
8. Install the new pump in reverse order of removal and verify the correct operation and rotation.
 
23.7 Tubing/Fitting Replacement  
1. If a vacuum line or connection is cracked, loose, leaking or broken, replace it as soon as
possible. A faulty vacuum line or connection will greatly increase the vacuum drawdown time
required, if not eliminate full vacuum altogether. All vacuum lines are separated from the
connectors by pressing down and holding the connection outer ring while pulling the vacuum
line out. To replace the vacuum line into the connections, simply push the line all the way into
the connection.
9-4
E
COMPRESSED
AIR FROM
SOLENOID
TO COMPRESSED
%db("ESTCODE")
AIR FROM E
TRAY
SOLENOID
%db("ESTCODE")
TO HOOD
REDUCER
GAGE
E E
M/F
%db("ESTCODE")
Y
%db("ESTC ODE")
%db("ESTCODE")
23.8 Combined Vacuum Layout
COMPRESSED
%db( "ESTCODE")
AIR FROM Y
E T
MANIFOLD
COMPRESSED
%db("ESTCODE")
AIR FROM E
SOLENOID
FROM
%db("ESTCODE")
E E E VACUUM
PUMP
UPPER TRAY VACUUM CONFIGURATION
E
Combined Vacuum Layout
COMPRESSED
AIR FROM
SOLENOID
TO
TRAY
%db("ESTCODE")
E
M/F
TO HOOD
REDUCER
GAGE
%db("ESTCODE")
8 49DCT23 3/8" HOSE 8'
T
%db("ESTCODE")
7 49DCT44 1/4" HOSE 20'
Y 6 49VAV01 NEEDLE VAVLE 4
5 43FIT07 ELBOW 3/8" 8
%db("ESTCODE")
4 43FIT08 ELBOW M/F 3/8" 2
E T 3 43FIT09 T 3/8" 4
NOTES:
1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. 2 43FIT22 Y 3/8" 2
2. TUBING LENGTH WILL BE DETERMINED
BY SPACE AVAILABLE. 1 43FIT13 REDUCER 3/8"-1/4" 2
3. ALL FITTINGS ARE SHOWN AS INSTALLED.
SOME CHANGES MAY BE REQUIRED TO ITEM PART OR NOMENCLATURE QTY
VACUUM PUMP ACCOMODATE SPACE AVAILABLE. NO.
E E IDENTIFYING NO. OR DESCRIPTION REQD
4. PARTS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANE AS ROUTING
AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT CHANGES. PARTS LIST
LOWER TRAY VACUUM CONFIGURATION
94MS54 Rev. A
94MS54 Rev. A
SEE
UPPER
TRAY
VACUUM
LAYOUT
23.9 Compressed Air Layout
% d b (" E S T C O D E ")
COMPRESSED
%db("ESTCODE")
REDUCER AIR FROM E

SEE SOLENOID
LOWER
TRAY
VACUUM
Compressed Air Layout
LAYOUT
COMPRESSED
% db("ESTCODE")
AIR FROM Y
MANIFOLD
% d b (" E S T C O D E ")
COMPRESSED
%db("ESTCODE")
REDUCER AIR FROM E

SOLENOID
NOTES:
1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE
2. DASHED LINES REPRESENT TUBING
3. ALL ELBOWS SHOWN ARE MEARLY TO FIT DRAWING TO
PAPER SPACE. ACTUAL FITTINGS NEEDED ARE LISTED IN REWORK KIT.
4. PARTS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AS ROUTING AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT CHANGE.
9-5
9-6
% d b (" E ST C O D E " )
TO HOOD
E
T GAGE
Y
COMPRESSED
%db("ES T CO D E ")
AIR FROM
SOLENOID
% d b( "E S T C O D E ")
E REDUCER E
% db("EST C O D E " )
FITTING
E TO TRAY COMPRESSED
% d b (" E S T C O D E " )
AIR FROM
23.10 Pneumatic Layout
SOURCE
% d b ( "E S T C O D E ") TO TERMINAL BLOCK

T XXXX, PIN # XX
TO TERMINAL BLOCK
XXXX, PIN # XX
FITTING
Y
COMPRESSED E
% d b (" E S T C O D E ")
AIR FROM
MANIFOLD
VACUUM PUMP
E
Pneumatic Layout
TO TERMINAL BLOCK
XXXX, PIN # XX
TO TERMINAL BLOCK
XXXX, PIN # XX
COMPRESSED
% d b (" E S T C O D E " )
AIR FROM
% d b (" E ST C O D E " )
TO HOOD SOURCE
E FITTING
T GAGE
Y
COMPRESSED
%db("ES T CO D E ")
AIR FROM
SOLENOID
% d b( "E S T C O D E ")
E REDUCER
% db("EST C O D E " )
E TO TRAY
% d b ( "E S T C O D E ")
NOTES:
1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE
2. DASHED LINES REPRESENT TUBING
3. ALL ELBOWS SHOWN ARE MEARLY TO FIT DRAWING TO
PAPER SPACE. ACTUAL FITTINGS NEEDED ARE LISTED IN REWORK KIT.
4. PARTS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AS ROUTING AND INSTALL CHANGE.
VACUUM PUMP
94MS54 Rev. A
23.11 AT30 E-Vacuum Assembly
23.12 ATH30 and ATH32 E-Vacuum Assembly

24. Cooling System

24.1 Cooling Requirements
Minimum pressure and flow rate of the chilled water depends on input temperature. For proper cooling
system selection, contact OLEC.
If water temperature and water flow do not meet the following

specifications the unit will overheat, one or both lights sources will shut
themselves off randomly under heavy usage and damage to the unit will be
the result.
24.2 Connecting the Chiller

1. Mount the Flow Meter and Temperature Gauge assembly on a wall in the upright position.
The Flow Meter and Temperature Gauge assembly must be mounted level
or the Flow Meter will not function properly.
2. Connect the hose from the chiller outlet to the to the flow meter.
3. Connect another hose from the temperature gauge to the Closed Loop inlet.
4. Connect the hose from the Closed Loop outlet to the chiller inlet.
24.3 Filling and Bleeding the Closed Loop System
Make sure that all hoses and fittings are tight before proceeding. When
filling and bleeding the closed loop system, it is recommended that the
chiller be bypassed, so as not to deplete the water level in the chiller
reservoir. Once the air is bled out of the system, the chiller should be
activated.
If the Closed Loop System is not filled properly the unit will overheat, one
or both lights sources will shut themselves off randomly under heavy usage
and damage to the unit will be the result.
24.4 Verify the Temperature Setting

1. Turn the main power on. Turn the integrator power on.
2. On the integrator, adjust the temperature setting from 20 o Celsius to 12o Celsius. Doing this
will open all three of the closed loop valves.
3. Press .
4. Press .
5. Press repeatedly until the temperature setting mode is selected.
6. Press to make a change to the current value. 
7. Enter a value of 12o Celsius for the temperature setting. 
8. Press to save the change in memory. 
9. Press to exit the Setup Mode.
Verify that all three of the valves are open by checking the LED indicators on the cooling control PCB.
1. Open the incoming water valve. Leave the outgoing water valve closed. The system will fill
with water. 1. Open the incoming water valve. Leave the outgoing water valve closed.
2. Slowly open the bleed Thevalve.
system will fill
Check the with
flow water.
of the water until it flows evenly from the bleed
valve (no air bubbles).
2. Slowly open the bleed valve. Check the flow of the water until it flows
3. Close the bleed valve. evenly from the bleed valve (no air bubbles).
3. Close the bleed valve.
TO CHILLER FROM CHILLER
OUTGOING INCOMING
4 1 BACK OF SYSTEM
CLOSED CLOSED
2 3
CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
OPEN
BLEED
METER GAUGE
TO DRAIN
INLET
OUTLET
6. Returning to the integrator, reset the temperature from 12º Celsius to 20º
6. Returning to the integrator, o o
Celsius.reset the temperature
Installation complete.from 12 Celsius to 20 Celsius. Installation
complete.
24.5 Connecting Power and Checking the Evaporator

1. Place the evaporator flat on the floor.
2. Connect the hose from the evaporator to the bottom of the rear panel drain.
Make sure the hose end on the evaporator is lower than the bottom of the
rear panel drain or moisture will collect in the bottom of the Closed
Loop System.
3. Route the electrical cord through the bottom of the lower left through hole in the floor, and
connect it to the 3 pin connector marked "Evaporator" provided inside the unit.
Note: The evaporator is on when the machine is on.
4. If the fan in the evaporator does not come on when the machine is turned on, unplug the
electrical connector P8 on the evaporator and check with a voltage meter the P8 connector
between pins 1 & 2 for 240V~.
5. If voltage is present and the blower is not running replace the blower.
6. If voltage is not present go to the control box and unplug the J12 connector and measure for
240V~ between pins 3 & 4 on the board, if voltage is present there is a brake in the cable from
the board to the evaporator and it needs to be replaced, if there is no voltage replace the
64CT464 PCB, see section 64CT464 PCB.
24.6 Closed Loop System Troubleshooting.

1. Make sure temperature and pressure in the system meets those in the Cooling Requirements
section.
2. Make sure the air in the system is properly bled.
3. Make sure the four blowers in the back of the unit are all spinning.  
a. Turn the unit off and wait for the cool down cycle to finish.
b. Remove the upper and lower rear panels. 
c. Remove the rear plate and turn the unit on to inspect the blowers.
4. Check the 3 flow solenoids feeding the heat exchangers to make sure they are operating.
a. Turn the unit off and wait for the cool down cycle to finish.  
b. Open each side door and unplug the 5 pin din plug in the front of each light source
power supply then close both doors.  
c. Remove the bottom rear panel in the back of the unit.   When looking at the back of the
unit locate the 3 flow solenoids on the left side just at the bottom of the top rear panel .
 
d. Pull the solenoid coils off the solenoid valve base. The coils are retained by a spring
clip and should pull off easily. Do not remove the spring clip from coils.
e. Set the temperature of the unit to 100°F (20°C) and turn the unit on. The flow meter
should read no flow.  
f. Turn the unit off and reconnect one of the coils and turn the unit back on. The flow
meter should show water flowing through the unit. Turn the unit off and disconnect the
coil. Repeat for each of the other two coils.  
g. If water does not flow with any of the coils connected, go to the J1 connector on the
64AX501V01 PCB and measure for 240V~ from pin 6 (white) to pin 3 (black) for
valve #1, pin 6 (white) to pin 2 (green) for valve #2, and pin 6 (white) to pin 1 (red) for
valve #3.
Closed Loop Cooling Assembly
24.7 Closed Loop System Assembly Drawing

ITEM Q'TY DESCRIPTION : OLEC PART # NOTE
1 3 SOLENOID VALVE, TWO WAY 31S0V09 5
2 3 SOLENOID COIL 31S0V09-C240 24 25
3 1 1/2" NPT BALL VALVE, MANUAL 43FIT41
4 5 1"HOSE ID.BARB-1"NPT MALE PIPE 43FIT42
5 1 1"HOSE ID.BARB-3/4"NPT MALE PIPE 43FIT43
6 1 1" NPT HEX NIPPLE - MALE 43FIT44
7 10 1/2" NPT HEX NIPPLE - MALE 43FIT57
8 3 REDUCER NIPPLE - MALE 3/4"-1/2" 43FIT46
9 2 BUSHING - FEMALE TO MALE 1"-1/2" 43FIT58
22 9
10 1 NIPPLE, FLOW METER (1"NPT) 12D3466A07 1
11 2 1" NPT FEMALE COUPLING 43FIT49
12 1 LONG NIPPLE 1/2"NPTx4"LONG 43FIT59
13 2 MALE-FEMALE ELBOW 1"NPT 43FIT51
14 3 FEMALE TEE 1"NPT 43FIT52 FROM TO
15 3 1/2"NPT MALE BRANCH TEE 43FIT53
16 1 FEMALE CROSS 3/4"NPT 43FIT54 CHILLER SYSTEM
17 3 1/2" NPT BRAIDED HOSE, 24" lg. 49DCT35
18 2 1/2" NPT FEMALE-FEMALE ELBOW 43FIT60
OUTLET
19 30 ft BRAIDED CLEAR PVC TUBING 49DCT34 2
20 6 HOSE CLAMP FOR 1" HOSE 43CLM10
21 3 1/2" NPT BRAIDED HOSE, 10" lg. 49DCT36 10
22
23
2
4
MOUNTING PLATE
HOSE CLAMP, o 1.5"-2"
11D3382A62
43CLM13
4 11 23 14 4
24 1 FLOW METER 43FLOW01 2 PL
25 1 TEMPERATURE GAGE 49THERM01 14
26 TAPE, TEFLON 1/2" WIDTH 81TAP12 3
9
12
UPPER HEAT-EXCHANGER AIR

VENT
21 21 21 3
15 4
3 PL
17
7
2 6 PL
3 PL
1
7 3 PL
22 7
2 PL
18 18 19 20 19 20
16 23 8 2 PL 2 PL 2 PL
17 2 PL 2 PL
FROM
4 GAUGES
5 17
14
LOWER HEAT-EXCHANGER 13
6
1 TO SECURE FLOW METER (ITEM 24) TO NIPPLE (ITEM 10) USE
HOSE CLAMPS SUPPLIED WITH FLOWMETER.
2 CUT TUBING (ITEM 19) TO ONE 42.5" LONG AND TWO 12 FT. RETURN TO
LONG PIECES. 11 CHILLER
3 APPLY TEFLON TAPE (ITEM 26) TO ALL PIPE THREAD
CONNECTION.
4. DO NOT OVERTORQUE FITTINGS.
13 4 19 20
5 ASSEMBLE THE SOLENOID VALVE BRANCHES FIRST BEFORE
CONNECTING THEM TO CROSS (ITEM 16). 2 PL
6. SOME FITTINGS MAY BE ORIENTATED DIFFERENTLY THEN
DEPICTED IN THIS SCHEMATIC.
10-6 94MS54 Rev. A

24.8 AT30 Cooling system
7 E 8 9 2 PL 28 8 29
D 3
11 2 PL
F J
D 3
3 2 PL
23 24
G
K J
10
4 PL
7
1
5
6
C A B 6 4 PL 2 H
94MS54 Rev. A 10-7

6 1 14 13 5 15 2 17
REF. REF. REF. REF.
20
18
14 16
11
3 REF.
2 11 DETAIL A 6 DETAIL B DETAIL C DETAIL D
REF.
REF. 8 PLACES REF. 8 PLACES 4 PLACES 12 PLACES
21 7 8 17 3 24 19 17
1 20 18 REF. REF. 2 PL 2 PL
REF.
20 27 REF.
23
REF.
12
9
2 PL
25 REF.
5 1
1 10
REF.
REF. REF.
22 4 DETAIL E DETAIL F DETAIL G DETAIL H
26
2 PL 6 PLACES 2 PLACES 16 PLACES
11 27 20 31
1 REF. 3 REF.
REF. 12
17
20 18 30
3 REF. 32
REF. 19
DETAIL J DETAIL K REF. 3 DETAIL L

REF. 4 10 PLACES 6 PLACES 4 PLACES
34 - ADHESIVE, SPRAY 82ADH15

33 4 FOAM SHEET 1.0 X 24 X 60.0 72FOM42
32 4 6-32 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 41 60WLS
31 4 #6-32 WASHER, FLAT 41 06WFR
30 1 ASSY., UPPER COLLECTOR 11D3936A17
29 1 DUCT,INTAKE (UPR. HEAT EXCH.) 11D3369B17
28 1 LABEL, BLACK 15D509
27 6 ft. FOAM TAPE, .5 x .12 THK. 81TAP18
26 1 CLAMP CABLE 1/2" 43CLM01
25 8 ft. GASKET 1/16 THK. 44GKT01
24 1 BOX, ELECT. HANDY 43HBX02
23 1 COVER, ELECT. HANDY BOX 43BXC01
22 6 #8-32 HEX KEP NUT 41 08NKP
21 6 #8-32x.38 PHIL. PAN HD. 41 08PPS.37
20 46 #10 WASHER, FLAT 41 10WFR
18 34 #10-32 HEX KEP NUT 41 12NKP
17 26 #10-32x.38 PHIL.PAN HD. 41 12PPS.37
16 4 1/4 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK 41 F0WLS
15 4 1/4-20x.62 BUTN. HD.SCREW 41BF0SHC.62
14 12 1/4 WASHER, FLAT 41 40WFR
13 8 1/4-20 NUT, HEX NYLON LOCK 41B40NLN
12 6 #6-32x.38 PHIL.PAN. HD. 41 06PPS.38
11 2 HEAT EXCHANGER 34" 39HTX01
10 4 BLOWER, 495 CFM 39BLO17
9 2 BRACKET, DOOR HOLDER 11D3379A62
8 1 COVER,LARGE (REAR) 11D3373A00
7 1 COVER, SMALL (FRONT) 11D3372A00
6 4 BRACKET, MOUNT 11D3371A62
5 1 MOUNTING PLATE, VALVES 11D3382A62
4 1 PLATE, REAR (BLOWERS) 11D3381A17
3 2 PANEL, SIDE (HEAT EXCH.) 11D3374A17
2 1 DUCT,INTAKE (LOW.HEAT EXCH.) 11D3930A17
1 1 WELDMENT, CABINET 63D3326A08
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO.
10-8 94MS54 Rev. A

24.9 ATH32 Cooling system
13
3 1
12
16
4 13
15 7
62
2 ITEM QT
1 1
2 1
3 1
15 4 1
17 5 1
17
6 4
7 2
8 1
5 9 1
10 1
11 1
12 2
16 6 12
13 2
13
9 14 1
15 4
18 16 2
17 2
9 18 1
10
7
62-05-0800 AXH28/ATH32 Cooling Assm.

Parts List
1 1 11-05-0805 Midwall, AXH28 Cooling
2 1 11-05-0808 Panel,AXH28 Cooling
3 1 11-05-0823 AirDuct,AXH28-Upper
4 1 11-05-0852 RearCover,Upper,AXH28
5 1 11-05-0853 RearCover,Lower,AXH28
6 4 11D3371A35 Bracket, Mount, Heat Exchanger
7 2 11D3374A17 Panel, Side (Clsd Loop)
8 1 11D3381A35 Plate,RearBlowers(Clsd. loop)
9 1 11D3685A00 Duct,Intake AP42
10 1 11D5905A05 Drip Pan, AX28 Weldment
11 1 11D8564A07 Assy, Upper Collector
12 2 13-05-0801 Tape(07) 1/8"x1"x40.38in,45deg ends
2
13 2 13-05-0802 Tape(07) 1/8"x1"x63.25in,45deg ends
14 1 18-00251-00 Polycarbonate Window,10"x3.4"
15 4 39BLO17 Blower, 495CFM 220V
16 2 39HTX03 HeatExchangerClosedLoop
17 2 44HDL01 Handle, Plastic, OV24
9 18 1 63-05-0801 AXH28 Door Frame
13 14
3
1 3
21
3 21
13
12
14
9
17
62-07-090
11 15
ITEM QTY PART
1 1 11-07-
8 10 16 2 2 11-07-
6 6 3 2 11-07-
18
10 4 2 11-07-
2 8 19 5 (4) 11-07-
6 2 11-07-
10
7 1 11D39
9
8 4 11D94
11
9 9 2 11D94
5 10 2 12-07-
4
21 11 4 41S06
3 12 4 41S08
19 13 12 41S08
3 21
14 12 41S08
13 14 15 26 41S10
3
16 26 41S10
3 17 8 41S12
3
18 26 41S12
19 4 41SBS
7
21
20 4 41SF0
13 21 2 62LH8
12
14
62-07-0901 LH & Cooling Assm.

15 Parts List
1 1 11-07-0901 Midwall, ATH32
16 2 2 11-07-0905 Plate, ATH32 Air Duct
18 3 2 11-07-0906 LH Bracket/Air Deflector ATH32

4 2 11-07-0907 ATH32 Mounting Bracket, LH Pivot
19 5 (4) 11-07-0908 Intake Shield, ATH32 LH
6 2 11-07-0909 Air Duct, ATH32 Door
10
7 1 11D3988A17 Box, Elec., Cooling Module
8 4 11D9400A AirDeflector,Duct,Internal
9 9 2 11D9409A71 AirDeflectort,ATH30
4 10 2 12-07-0807 Mounting Bar, LH Pivot
21 11 4 41S06PF0.37 Screw,SS Phllips Flat, 6-32 x .375"
12 4 41S08NKP NUT, 8-32 UNC KEPS
19 13 12 41S08PPS.37 Screw, Pan Head 8-32 x .375"
14 12 41S08WLS LockWasher_#8
15 26 41S10WFR Washer,SS Flat 10-32
16 26 41S10WLS Lock Washer, #10
3 17 8 41S12PF0.37 Screw, Phillips Flat, 100deg
18 26 41S12PPS.50 SCREW, 10-32x.50" Pan Head
19 4 41SBS02 Shoulder Bolt, SS 1/4-20
5/16x.25L
20 4 41SF0SHC.75 SHCS 1/4-20 x .75"
21 2 62LH83-ATH30 Lamphead, ATH30/ATH32
12. Diagrams
25. DiagramsControl Box Front View

25.1 Control Box Front View
T
HIGH LOW
R SPEED SPEED 2
A COMMUNICATION
4 5
INC. INC. 1 3
Y Blk Red Blk Red
- + - 6 4 6 4
MOTION CONTROL
12 VDC 1 1 3 1 3 1
STOP SLOW Blk Red Blk Red Wht Red Blk Wht Red Blk
12 VDC 208/240V RESET
IN OUT AUX
E C L U
Blk Red 15 15 5
A A A
6 4 M M M
P P P
3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 F1 F3 F5
Wht Red Blk 220~ 120~ Blk Red Blk Red
15
A
15
A
5
Wht Org Wht Blk Blk Red Blk Red M M
A
M
MOTOR A/C VACUUM P P P
L - SWT ACCESSORY PUMPS F2 F4 F6
COMPUTER (208V) COOLING SYS (208V) WORKLIGHT (120V)
25.2 60Hz AccuTray Wiring Diagram W/Sensor
94MS54 Rev. A 12-1

60 Hz AccuTray Wiring Diagram w/Sensor
BLR5 BLR6
BLOWER
(120V) XMR
BLOWER
240V
(120V)
P66
16D3793A00 RED 16D3794A00 RED
BRN 1
120V BLK BLK
BRN 2
BLU 16D2621B00 (GRAY, 5 COND.)

16D1003A06 BLK
BLU 0V
16D1003A06 (BLACK, 5 COND.)
TERMINAL 16D1003A09 (BLACK, 5 COND.)
STRIP BLR1 BLR2

BLK
1
BLOWER BLOWER
WHT (240V) (240V) 16D1003A09 (BLACK, 5 COND.)
L1 WHT 2 FAN
SW8 UPPER UPPER
SWITCH LEFT RIGHT
WORK LIGHTS J5 J4 J3 J2 J1 P2 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1 P2
(120V) 3 RED
WHT BLK
15K/2W
L2 WHT
4 RED
SW9 BLK P1 P1
16D3249A00
LIGHT
SWITCH
5 16D3810A00
BLK
RED
MAIN BOARD REMOTE BOARD
BLK 16D4173A24 (GRAY, 20 COND.) VAC./TEMP. BOARD
25.3 60Hz AccuTray Wiring Diagram

RED
(64AX503V00)
X1 P8
BLK
RED
P1
BLK
RED
3 6
BLOWER BLOWER (BLACK, 15 COND.) 16D7020A05 2 5
62D3476A00 (240V) (240V) 1 4
P2
P63 6 5 4 R48
GRN/YEL
LOWER LOWER
BLK RED LEFT RIGHT MEMORY BOARD 1
S1 1 P74 X2
WHT BLK 6 5 4 3 2 1
EVAPORATOR 2
GRN
3 P58 P6
3 2 1 P1
(240V) BLR4 BLR3
SOL1 SOL2 SOL3 DISPLAY BOARD
X3
RED
RED
62D3798A00
240V 240V 240V P7
16D4170A12
X4
GRN/YEL
REFER TO SHEET 2
RED
BLK
MOT1
DRIVE MOTOR P60 (STOP) (GO)
WHT RED
16D4169A09
1 P73
(90VDC) BLK P3
2 1 3 7 4 8 P77
RED
BLK
GRN
WHT
BLK BLK WHT
3 1 BLK P2 P3 P4 P5
RED BLK
4 2
GRN 1 1 1 1
3 RED
RED
4
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
CB1 BLK
16D3808A00 RED
BLK (15 A)
BLK
RED
16D6666A00
WHT
BLK
GRN
RED
GRN/YEL BLK
BRN
CB2 16D4172A08
P61 WHT (15 A) 8 7 6 5
1 P50
2 4 3 2 1 P1
BLU
1
P52 UPPER TRAY
16D4171A12
P62 (64AX505V03)
T2 T3 T1 1 BRN
1 BRN BLK
2 2
VACUUM AND TEMPERATURE MONITOR
P1 3 3 16D2970A00 SW1
6 6
COMM. 2 2
MOTOR
VACUUM 5 5
6 5 4
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
J14 PUMPS 1 1 (4)

J11 4 4
RED
BLK
3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
J15 J4 J1
J12 A/C J13 ACCESSORY 12VDC BRN 1
BRN
BLK SW2
2
RED
BLK
BLOWER SOL3 SOL2 SOL1
16D4168A00 P54 16D2970A00 LOWER TRAY
16D2495B00
6 5 4 2 1
J20 RED BLK
BLK RED PHOTOCELL
3 2 1 12VDC RED BLK
CONTROL BOX AUX BLK RED
J21 (208V) FAST MED SLOW J5
6 5 4
COOLING CTRL BOARD 8 7 6 5
P59 16D1003A06 (BLACK, 5 COND.)
3 2 1 (64AX501V03) P51
J3 J4 J5 J6 4 3 2 1 UPPER LAMPHEAD
RED
16D0957-10
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
VAC1
RED
BLK
RED
BLK
(32)
UPPER
P64 VACUUM PUMP
16D2319A00
(BLACK, 18 GA)
NO
COMPUTER
(208V)
(208V)
(120V)
RED BLU
1
WORK LIGHT
J1 J2 BLK BRN
COOLING SYS
2
16D2412A00
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL (240V)
3
16D2741A00 LEFT SW3 CONTROL
DOOR UPPER POWER SUPPLY
16D4249A08 CM
22 12
CM CM CM CM
BLK
16D2740A00
VAC2
SW14
SW13
SW12
SW11
21 11 LOWER
P65 VACUUM PUMP PHOTOCELL
RED BLU NC NC NC NC NO
1
DOOR MOTOR BLK BRN
2 (240V)
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL (1) (8)
3
EMERGENCY SW7 16D2741A00 RIGHT SW4
SWITCH
DOOR
UPPER
LMT. SW
LOWER
LMT. SW
UPPER
POS. SW
LOWER
POS. SW
LOWER LAMPHEAD
CM
REFER TO SHEET 2 16D0957-5
CONTROL
LOWER POWER SUPPLY
D7783
12-2 94MS54 Rev.A

60 Hz AccuTray Wiring Diagram
INTERFACE BOARD (64AX518V00)
1 + 24 VDC 0 VDC BLK

2 20
O 10 I7
19 UPPER FILM VAC
3 + 24 VDC 10 + 24 VDC RED
4 18
O9 0 VDC BLK R1 S1
17 2.7K
5 + 24 VDC 9 1 I7 I6 WHT
6 16
RED O8 + 24 VDC RED
UPPER FILM VAC 15 LOWER FILM VAC
RED 7 + 24 VDC 8 2 I6 0 VDC BLK
SOL1 8 14 R2 S2 UPPER
BLK O7 I5 WHT 2.7K
13 GLASS VAC TRAY
RED 9 + 24 VDC 7 3 I5 + 24 VDC RED
UPPER LOWER FILM VAC 12
BLK 10 O6 0 VDC BLK R3 S3
TRAY GLASS VAC SOL2 11 2.7K
RED 11 + 24 VDC 6 4 I4 I4 WHT
SOL3 12 10
BLK O5 + 24 VDC RED
9 UPPER FILM VAC
13 + 24 VDC 5 5 I3 0 VDC BLK
14 8 R4 S4
RED O4 I3 WHT 2.7K
7 LOWER FILM VAC
RED 15 + 24 VDC 4 6 I2 + 24 VDC RED
UPPER FILM VAC 6
BLK 16 O3 0 VDC BLK R5 S5
LOWER FILM VAC SOL4 5 2.7K LOWER
LOWER RED 17 + 24 VDC 3 7 I1 I2 WHT
18 4 TRAY
TRAY SOL5 BLK O2 + 24 VDC RED
P3 3 GLASS VAC
RED 19 + 24 VDC 2 0 VDC BLK
GLASS VAC 2 R6 S6
BLK 20 O1 I1 WHT 2.7K
SOL6 1
1
P2 P1
P4
P5
4 3
+ 24 VDC 2 1 0VDC
(16D6039A13) BLK
TO TS1-2
RED
TO TS1-1
CONTROL BOX
240VAC
J12
NOISE FILTER
+S
-S
5
+OUT
+OUT
-OUT
-OUT
BRN BLK
1 C RF1 B 4
24VDC/12A 240VAC
3 RED
A 3
POWER SUPPLY 2
PS2 BLU
4 D G 2
120VAC
1 D7783
(REFER TO SHEET 1)
12-4 94MS54 Rev.A

25.4 Tray Wiring Layout
50Hz AccuTray Filter Wiring Diagram - Double
62D6002A00 62D6002B00
(RED, 8GA) (WHT, 8GA) (RED, 8GA) (BRN, 8GA)

D D
FILTER POWER SUPPLY FILTER POWER SUPPLY
LINE
LINE
(UPPER) (UPPER)
LOAD
LOAD
E P/S #1 E P/S #1
RF1 RF1
(BLK, 8GA) (BLK, 8GA) (BLU, 8GA) (BLU, 8GA)
25.5 50Hz Accutray Filter Layout Double
(10GA)
(10GA)
(GRN/YEL)
(GRN/YEL)
(BLU, 10GA)
(BLU, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
FILTER FILTER
LINE
LINE
LOAD
LOAD
(BLU, 10GA)
(BLU, 10GA)
RF2 RF2
(BRN, 8GA) (WHT, 8GA) (BRN, 8GA) (BRN, 8GA)

G G
FILTER POWER SUPPLY FILTER POWER SUPPLY
LINE
LINE
(LOWER) (LOWER)
LOAD
LOAD
F P/S #2 F P/S #2
RF1 RF1
(BLK, 8GA) (BLK, 8GA) (BLU, 8GA) (BLU, 8GA)
(10GA)
(10GA)
(GRN/YEL)
(GRN/YEL)
(BLU, 10GA)
(BLU, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
(RED, 10GA)
FILTER FILTER
LINE
LINE
LOAD
LOAD
(BLU, 10GA)
(BLU, 10GA)
RF2 RF2
68D5776B02
94MS54 Rev.A 12-11

26. Parts List
26.1 ATH32 Bill OF Materials

Part Number Description Quantity
90ATH32C-102 ATH32 ATION EXPO SYS 1
15D3583A00 DU-LABEL, CE 1
18-07-0300 MIRROR, ATH32, 35"X38.8' R70 1
43PNL08 JIT-TOUCH SCREEN 15" 1
62-05-0800 ATH32/AX COLLING ASSEMBLY 1
13D5268A00 P1 FOAM SET, AX28 CHILLER 1
15D3587A00 B LABEL, FLOW DIRECTION 2
15D3587B00 B LABEL, FLOW DIRECTION 2
15D509 A Label Plate Black(50) 1
15D5708A00 A LABEL, WARNING, REAR DOOR 1
16D3808A00 B HARNESS, VALVES 1
16D9137A00 A CABLE,BLWRS/C251,CL AX28 1
39BLO28 PSC Blower, 230V 50/60Hz 4
39HTX03 E HEAT EXCHANGER COATED 2
39PMC05 PUMP, CONDENSATE 1
41B40NLN NSI 1/4-20 LOCKNUT NYLON INS 8
41BF0SHB1.00 A SCREW, 1/4-20 X 1, HEX 4
41S06PPS.37 N-6-32x3/8 PPMS Stainless 4
41S06WFR N-6-32 Flat Washer 4
41S06WLS N-6-32 Lockwasher Spit 4
41S10WFR N-#10 Flat Washer S/S 46
41S10WLS NO 10 WASHER LOCK SPLIT 10
41S12NKP N-10-32 Kep Nut 36
41S12PPS.37 NSI 10-32x3/8 PPMS 22
41S40WFR N-1/4 SAE FLAT WASHER 34
41SF0SHC.62 N-1/4-20 X .62 SOCKET HDC 22
41SF0WLS N-1/4-20 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 26
41SF3NHX HEX NUT S/S N-3/8-16 26
43BXC02 WEATHER PROOF OUTLETCOVER 2
43CLM10 HOSE CLAMP 1" ID 10
43FIT204 3/8" BRASS PLUG 1
43FIT205 STRAIGHT 3/8" BRASS HOSE 2
43FIT206 3/8" BRASS 90^ HOSE BARB 1
43FIT216 CLAMP HOSE MAX 7/16" HOSE 3
43FIT41 MANUAL BALL VALVE 1
43FIT42 BARB MALE STRAIGHT CONNEC 1" 3
43FIT43 MALE STRAIGHT CONN 1" TO 3/4" 8
43FIT44 1" NIPPLE-MALE BRASS 1
43FIT49 FEMALE CONN. 1" NPT, BRASS 1
43FIT51 1" MALE-FEMALE ELBOW 90^ 2
43FIT52 FEMALE TEE, BRASS, 1"NPT 2
43FIT57 HEX NIPPLE-MALE 1/2" NPT 1
43FIT58 BUSHING,FEMAL-MALE 1"X.5" 1
43FIT73 3/4" NPT BRASS 90^ ELBOW 1
43FIT74 3/4" HEX PLUG BRASS 2
43FIT75 3/4" NPT X 3" LONG BRASS 1
43FIT76 3/4" NPT BRASS FEMALE TEE 2
43FIT77 3/4" NPT BRASS 90^ STREET 2
43HBX04 WEATHER PROOF OUTLET BOX 2
44GKT01 B GASKET, 1/16 THK 1/2W(FT) 8
44GKT81 RUBBER FOAM, POLYETHYLENE 2
44HDL01 DU-Handle, Plastic OV24 2
49DCT24 DU-TUBE, 5/16ID X 1/2OD 8
49DCT34 BRAID CLEAR PVC TUBING 20
49DCT38 HOSE,BRAIDED 1/2"NPTX20"L 3
49DCT41 HOSE INSULATION(300) 20
72FOM43 FORM CLSD CELL POLYE 4
81TAP07 DU-TAPE, 1/8" X 1" X 25' 2
81TAP12 TAPE, TEFL SEAL 1/2"W(50) 2
13-05-0801 A TAPE (07) 1/8X1X40.4 2
13-05-0802 A TAPE(07) 1/8X1./63.1 2
18-00251-00 B ACRYLIC, BLANK 4.7"X3.5"X 1
62CLM-01 CLC MOUNTING HARDWARE 1
41BF1SHC.37 - NSI SHOULDER SCREW,BLK. 1/4 X 1
41SF3SHC1.25 N-3/8"-16X1.25 SOC HDCPSC 28
41SF3WFR MIRROR LOWER ASSM,WEBX40 28
41SF3WLS N-3/8-16 LOCK WASH SPLIT 28
42F3INS A 3/8-16 EXTERNAL THEADED 1
43HNG06 HINGE 4"WX5"LX1/2" THK 6
44GKT14 A D SHAPE .375X.750 EPDM 25
54CAB11 CUSTOM SWAGGED CABLE ASSY
11D3931A17 B MOUNTING BRACKET #12389 2
11D3984A17 C BOX, ELEC. COOLING MOD #19184 1
11D3982A17 E MIDWALL #12086 1
11D3920A17 C BRACKET #12191 1
11D3857A17 D BRACKET #11015 1
11D3685A17 B DUCT, INTAKE #9242 1
11D3381A35 E PLATE REAR BLOWERS #8689 1
11D3374A17 D PANEL, SIDE #8684 2
11D3371A62 C BRKT MOUNT HEAT EXCNG#8681 4
11-05-0853 A REAR COVER LWR AXH28#19388 1
11-05-0852 A REAR COVER UPPER AXH28 #19357 1
11-05-0808 A PANEL AXH28 COOLING #16785 1
11-05-0805 A MIDWALL AXH28 COOLING #16784 1
11-05-0807 A AIR DUCT AXH28 UPPER #16813 1
11D5797A71 D PLATE #12054 1
11D5905A07 A WELDMENT PUMP STAND # 15862 1
11D6091A71 C FILTER MNT BLOWER #13650 4
11D8564A07 B ASS'Y UPPER COLLECTOR #14980 1
62D4850A00 A PLUMBING ASSEMBLY #19847 1
51WRC02 NSI Crimp Cap, 16-10, Ins 1
51T2019 NSI Butt Conn Vinyl Ins. 22-16 3
43FIT65 1/2" NPT MALE BRANCH "T" 3
43FIT60 FEMALE ELBOW,1/2"NPT 2
43FIT54 BRASS BAR STK FITNG CR3/4 1
43FIT46 REDUCER NIPPLE-MALE 3
43CLM13 HOSE CLAMP 01.5"-2.5" 2
42HHS2175 NSI GROMMENT,RUBBER 3/4X 2
31SOV09 TWO WAY SOLENOID VALVE 3
31SOV09-C240 SOLENOID VALVE COIL 208/240V 3
11D3382A62 C MOUNTING PLATE, PLUMBING 1
63-05-0801 A WELDMENT FRAME #16747 1
13-7004 POWDER/ZINC RICH 1
HCF8-C008 POWDER/SILVER BONDED/OLEC 1
63-05-0801-1 REV.A ITEM 1 2
13GA-4X12 CRS 48 X 144 13 GA (.089)
63-05-0801-2 REV.A ITEM 2 2
13GA-3X10 CRS 36 X 120 13 GA (.089)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 8
63-05-0801-3 REV.A ITEM 3 2
MISC PLACE HOLDER FOR BOM
2008-1 WELD NUT 3/8-16,SHORT PILOT 2
63-05-0801-4 REV.A ITEM 4 1
13GA-4X12 CRS 48 X 144 13 GA (.089)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 5
63-05-0801-5 REV.A ITEM 5 1
13GA-3X12 CRS 36 X 144 13 GA (.089)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 18
63-05-0801-6 REV.A ITEM 6 2
63-05-0801-7 REV.A ITEM 7 1
13GA-4X12 CRS 48 X 144 13 GA (.089)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 7
63-05-0801-8 REV.A ITEM 8 1
13GA-3X12 CRS 36 X 144 13 GA (.089)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 18
63-05-0801-9 REV.A ITEM 9 1
63-05-0801-10 REV.A ITEM 10 1
13GA-3X12 CRS 36 X 144 13 GA (.089)
10GA-3X12 CRS 36 X 144 10 GA (.135) 1
62-07-0901 A LH & COOLING ASSY. ATH32 1
41S06PF0.37 N-6-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 4
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 12
41S08WLS N-8-32 Lock Washer Split 12
41S12PF0.37 N-10-32X3/8 PHIL FLT 100^ 8
41S12PPS.50 N-10-32x1/2 Phil Pan MS 26
41SBS02 SHOULDER BOLT SS 1/4-20TK 4
11-07-0901 A ATH32 MIDWALL CABINET 1
11-07-0905 A PLATE, ATH32 AIR DUCT 2
11-07-0906 A LH BRACKET/AIR DEFLECTOR ATH32 2
11-07-0907 A MOUNTING BRACKET 2
11-07-0908 A INTAKE SHIELD ATH32 LH 2
11-07-0909 A AIR DUCT, ATH32 DOOR 2
11D9400A07 A ATH30 MANIFOLD AIR DEFL #16369 4
11D9409A71 A AIR DEFLECTOR #16370 2
12-07-0807 A MTG BAR, LH PIVOT #19335 2
11-07-0911 A BRACKET, COOLING DOOR ATH32 2
11-07-0917 A REAR DOOR PLATE, BOTTOM 1
11-07-0918 A BRACKET, COOLING ASSY ATH32 1
62-07-0902 A ATH32 MIRROR ASSEMBLY 2
18-07-0300 MIRROR, ATH32, 35"X38.8' R70 2
41SF0NLN N-1/4-20 LOCKNUT 16
41SF0SHC1.50 1/4-20 X 1.5 SOCKET HEADC 16
41SF0WFR WAX 32
12-07-0902 A MMOUNTING BLOCK MIR-R70 ATH32 8
12D9424A07 A MIH-RUBBER SPAACER STRIP 8
12-07-39445 A MIRROR FRAME TOP/BOTTOM 4
12-07-39446 A MIRROR FRAME SIDE ATH32 4
63-07-39403 ATH32-MIRROR ASSY. 2
18-07-0300 MIRROR, ATH32, 35"X38.8' R70 2
41SF0NLN N-1/4-20 LOCKNUT 16
41SF0SHC1.50 1/4-20 X 1.5 SOCKET HEADC 16
41SF0WFR WAX 32
12-07-0902 A MMOUNTING BLOCK MIR-R70 ATH32 8
12D9424A07 A MIH-RUBBER SPAACER STRIP 8
12-07-39445 A MIRROR FRAME TOP/BOTTOM 4
12-07-39446 A MIRROR FRAME SIDE ATH32 4
11-07-0914 A BRACKET, ATH32 MIRROR 8
62-07-03002 A ASSY, OUTER FRAME ASSY , AT32 1
41SM4SHC.16MM N-Screw, SOC CAP, M4x16 18
43BSH09 BUSHING, 08 X 8 2
41SM4WLS Spring Lock Washer M4 18
11-07-36199 A PLATE, BOTTOM (TRAY) AT32 1
12-07-36195 A SUPPORT BRACKET, CORNER FRONT 2
12-07-37879 B BAR OUTER FRAME FRONT 1
12-07-37880 A BAR ,TRAY(REAR RH) ATH32 1
12-07-37885 A BAR ,TRAY(SIDE RH) ATH32 1
12-07-37889 A BAR ,TRAY(SIDE LH) ATH32 1
12D6196A76 C SUPPORT, CORNER(LH REAR) 1
12D6197A76 C SUPPORT, CORNER(RH REAR) 1
62AL96-ATH-L1 LAMPHEAD ASSY 240VAC 50HZ 2
15D1909 A2 SERIAL NO LABEL, LT 8 2
15D3237A00 A1 LABEL, L1281 2
35LMP18 F JH-LAMP L1281 2
62B2755A00-N B1 PA91 PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY#19551 2
11D2721A02 B PHOTO CELL #14748 2
11D3485A02 A PLATE, PA91/93 2
11D3546B71 B1 PHOTOCELL SHUTTER 2
12D9554A07 B BRACKET DIN CONNECTOR #19466 2
13D147 PHOTOCELL RING(600) 4
15D2748A00 A1 LABEL, PHOTOCELL, PA91 2
17PA482 B PCB, PHOTOCELL 2
18D1014 A DIFFUSER DISK CLEAR PA 2
18D2088A00 GLASS, PHOTOCELL PA88,89 2
25PHO07 A PHOTO DETECTOR .100X.200 2
41-08WSP NSI Spring Washer 3502-08 2
41S04NKP N-#4 KEP NUT STAINLESS STEEL 4
41S04PPS.37 N-4-40X.37 Phil Pan Ms 4
41S06PF0.37 N-6-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 4
41S08PPS.25 N-8-32 X 1/4 PPMS 2
41S08PPS.62 NSI 8-32 X 5/8 PPMS ZINC 4
42HHS8445 NSI Standoff, 8-32x3/4 he 2
44WFN01 NSI NYLON WASHER 2
53DIN07 A DIN, 5 PIN FEMALE, 90^ 2
94MAI-25800 A ASSEMBLY INSTR. PA86/88
62LH8-ATH30 LAMPHEAD 8K ATH30 #20189 2
94MAI-20100 A1 MAI FOR 62LH83SE-XX
62LH83-BAS-ATH BASE KIT 8K LAMPHEAD 2
12D1577 A SPRING, IDLER-5K SHUTTER 2
12D1997A99 A1 SPROCKET, HUB MACH(PG) 2
12D959 A PO-SPRING FOR 5K GLASS 4
13D1713A00 B COVER, PLUG 2
15D1484 A Label, IEC Grounding 4
15D1857 C LABEL, CAUTION, HOT 4
15D3516A00 A LABEL,LAMPHEAD REFL&ORIEN 2
15D4581A00 A Label, dome, OLEC logo 4
15D479A00 C CAUTION LABEL, EYE UL 4
16D0180A00 M J21-HARNESS, LAMPHEAD 5 K 2
18D319 A GLASS, 5K FROSTED DIFFUSE 2
18D9394A07 B SAFETYGLASS,ATH-30 2
31MOT42 MOTOR, SHUTTER 2
39BLO14 BLOWER, 50/60 HZ (8K) #19684 4
41-06NLM NSI 6-32 FLEXLOCK NUT 2
41-08NLN NSI 8-32 LOCKNUT NYLON 6
41-12PPMS1.0 NSI 10-32 X 1 PPMS ZINC 8
41-NHX01 HEX NUT PLATED 4
41-NVC NUT, VOLUME CONTROL(200) 4
41N10WFR NSI #10 WASHER,NYLON FLAT 8
41S04PPS.50 N-4-40X.50 PHIL PAN MS 8
41S04WFR N-4-40 WASHER FLAT 4
41S06NHX SS 6-32 Hex Nut 2
41S06NKP N-KEP NUT 6-32 8
41S06PF0.37 N-6-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 12
41S08NHX N-8-32 HEX NUT 12
41S08PPS.25 N-8-32 X 1/4 PPMS 8
41S12SHC.62 N-10-32 X .62 SKT HEAD C 14
42HHS9207 NSI #6 x .187 Round Spacer 2
43BKT01 NSI Brkt, PCB 4
44CPG01 CAPLUGS,TYPE "O",RED(400) 4
44WFN02 DU-1/4 ID NYLON WSHR(500) 2
45KOB05 KNOB, GLASS. CARRIAGE 4
55SW03 SWITCH, GLASS, 2 POS BLK 2
56THM01 THERMOSTAT, MODEL K 4
94MAI-20100 A1 MAI FOR 62LH83SE-XX
11D0863A71 A2 GLASS CLAMP # 14720 4
11D0999A71 B1 SAFETY GLASS #14746 2
11D0999B71 B1 SAFETY GLASS SUPP.#14762 2
11D1870A71 A2 BLOWER MTG PLATE #14640 4
11D9440A02 A END COVER ATH30 #16523 2
11D9440B02 A END COVER ATH30 #16523 2
11D1959A03 C AIR BAFFLE #14642 4
11D2009A71 C HOLDER DIFFUSSION GL#14726 2
11D2101A99 A2 REFLECTOR, PHOTOCELL, 2
11D212 D SWITCH LEVER #14744 2
11D2915A02 D WALL CONNECTOR - 5K L/H 4
11D3670A02 C LAMPHEAD CHASSIS 5K SE 2
62LHK03 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 2
55SW157 SWITCH, TIMING (SHUTTER) 2
11D226 C SWITCH BRACKET #14745 2
51FQ18-2E NSI Q.D. F/I FML. 22-18, .110 6
63D3669A00 B IDLER, ARMS ASSY LT8 #19791 2
11D3605A62 A1 BRACKET IDLER-SHUTTER AY 2
12D0700A64 B PO-DRIVE GEAR, ROLL FLTR 2
41-06SBL.62 NSI 6-32X5/8 SHOULDER BOLT 2
43BLB15 BEARING, FLANGED .187 I.D 4
64MV414V01 PC BOARD, TRIGGER 8K #19754 2
64MV414V00 E J-ASSY, TRIGGER BOARD 8K 2
13D2917A00 A INSULATION, PC BOARD FOR 2
62LHK02-83 ROLLER ASSEMBLY AL 83 #19982 2
11D215 H1 AL25-53 ROLLER BACKUP BKT 2
12D3515A00 A2 BEARING, BALL 2
41B06SHF.87 NSI 6-32X7/8 SOC.FLAT HEAD CAP 2
42HHS8421 NSI 6-32X.250 HEX THD SPACER 2
42HHS9207 NSI #6 x .187 Round Spacer 2
11D3741A02 B CVR, EXHAUST SLT LH #12116 2
11D9441A07 B REFLECTOR END #16524 4
62SA83-ATH SHUTTER ASSY ATH30 #20188 2
12D2060A07 C SPRING, SHUTTER AL 83 4
11D6693-MOD REFLECTOR INNER RF83ATH30 2
62SA83SE-BASE A1 AL 83 SHUTTER #19979 2
63D3950B62 A1 AIR TUBE LT-8 , DRIVE(REAR) 2
63D3950C62 A1 AIR TUBE LT-8 , FRONT 2
12D3515A00 A2 BEARING, BALL 12
41-06NLM NSI 6-32 FLEXLOCK NUT 8
41B06SHF.43 6-32X.7/16 SOC FLAT 4
41B06SHF.62 NSI 6-32X5/8 SOC FLAT HD BLK Z 8
41S04NHX N-4-40 Self lock hex Nut 4
41S04PF0.25 N-4-40X1/4 100^ FLT HD. 4
41S06PF0.37 N-6-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 6
41S06WLI N-#6 INTERNAL LOCK WASHER 6
41S08PPS.25 N-8-32 X 1/4 PPMS 8
42HHS8500 NSI #6 X.125 ROUND SPACER 8
42HHS8779 NSI #6 BRASS 6-32 RND THD, SPA 12
43CLP02 NSI Fuse Clip 4
63D3530A62 A2 IDLER ARM, SHUTTER 4
68D2986A00 SHUTTER ASSEMBLY AL 83
94MAI-15100 A2 MAI FOR 62SA83SE-XX
11D0210A62 F3 TIMING DISC LT-1 2
11D1949A71 D SHUTTER END #14412 4
11D2216 A LT8 SHUTTER-REFL ASSEMBLY 2
12D1998A99 A1 SPROCKET, PLAIN, MACH 2
12D2060A07 C SPRING, SHUTTER AL 83 4
12D3550A62 A BUSHING, IDLER ARM 4
SCRSS-PHP-632X.38 Planning Bill, DSI-30-C 24
63D0142B05 A 8K LAMP SUPPORT BRACKET 4
11D0967A60 C LAMP SUPP BRKT #2085 4
12D0965A00 B THUMB NUT, LAMP SUPPORT 4
41-08FIL.75 NSI 8-32 x 3/4 Filstr.Hd 4
41S08PPS.31 8-32 x .31 PPMS Stainless 8
42SPC02 #8 Ceramic Stndoff(100) 8
43CLP01 NSI LAMPCLIP 4
51TI02 NSI N-Faston Tab 250x.032 8
11-12-0107 B INTAKE SHIELD WEBX LH (L) 2
11-12-0108 B INTAKE SHIELD WEBX RH (R) 2
62CL96-CE B POWER SUPPLY CL 96 2
64MV407V22 A PCB, Power Supply 8K 50Hz 2
41-06PPS.18 NSI 6-32 x 3/16 PPMS Zinc 4
68MV407V22 A Mod. Dwg for 64MV407V22
26-4-68 Resistor, .25W, 1%, 68K 2
64MV504V00 A1 C 5K ASMBLD TRAIC PCB B #19443 2
64MV407V00 B1 J-PCB UV Light Control Bd 2
54GRN28 Wire wrap, 28 GA, grn(100 1
44PAD02 Adhesive Square 6
32COI06 Choke, 500uH / 2A 2
26TP4-10 A Potentiometer Top Adjust 2
26-5-47 Resistor .25 W 1% 475 K 2
26-5-12 Resistor .25 W 1% 120 K 4
26-4-22 Resistor .25 W 1% 22.1K 2
26-4-10 Resistor .25 W 1% 10 K 2
26-3-68 RESISTOR,.25W,5%,6.8K OHM 2
26-3-30 Resistor, .25W,1%3.01 2
21MPS-A13 Semi NPN Darlington Trnst 2
211N4148 Semi Diode Signal Tape & 2
15D3677A00 A MIH-Label, PCB 407VXXX 2
13D1714A00 A1 Cover PCB UV Controller 2
62D9700A00 A ASSEMBLY, CAPACITOR CLX94 2
13D1800 B COVER, CAP PACK, AL 65 2
15D1029 A Label, 5 K Hi-Lo 2
15D9535A00 LABELPOWERENHANCEDBALLAST 2
26S6-10 Resistor 1 W 10% 1 Meg. 32
34CAP12-HV Capacitor 12uF 1200 V 4
34CAP16-HV CAP 16UF 1200 V 2
34CAP19 1000 V Dual Cap 12uf+4uf 2
54D0562B00 Cap, jmpr 14ga UL1015(10) 2
54D525 A Cap jumper, Org,14ga,2.5 4
55SW01 Switch, CW 2
68D9700A00 A INS.ASSY CAPACITOR PACK
64MV422-84 A RESISTOR PCBA, AL 84 #19319 2
64MV422V00 B RESISTOR BOARD AL53/50,50 2
11D9704A49 A CAP TOP NARROW BODY ALX94 2
51WRN07 NSI Wire crimp nut 12
41S12PPS.37 NSI 10-32x3/8 PPMS 8
11D1250A02 C DIVIDER, OEM #19041 2
11D1251 B2 COVER, OEM #14724 2
11D4329A02 B Base weldment, wide chass 2
11D1050 A1 COVER MOUNT OEM #14723 4
11D1049A62 C MODIFIED BEAU BRKT #14722 2
11D2650A00 A MEM2 Component Wall, AL 2
11D1254A71 B1 AIR DAM WD, CHASS #14725 2
13D1712A00 B Cover, Terminal Strip 2
11D939 A1 SLOTTED BALLAST #14721 4
15D1313 B Label, Interlock/Timer 2
15D0520A00 A Caution Label 2
15D2552A00 A SERIAL NO LABEL AL 96 2
15D509 A Label Plate Black(50) 2
15D2553A00 A LABEL, AL96 - POWER 2
16D4063A08 A1 Cable, harmonized,8awg(ft 2
16D1585 A Interlock Harness 2
16D1045A00 C Harness, Beau Plug OEM 2
16D2629A01 ASSY, HARNESS 8K-B 2
33RLY24 Relay,Contactor600VAC/40A 2
32TRC08 Autoformer 208/225/240 V 2
32BAL01-2 A J10-Ballast, 60hz. 8
39BLO23 A BLOWER,OLEC,50/60HZ 2
33RLY04 J30-Relay, Sealed 4
41-14SLR3.5 NSI 10-24 X 3 1/2 SLOT ROUND 16
43CLM06 1" CABLE CLAMP(10) 2
41-08WSP NSI Spring Washer 3502-08 4
41-14SLR6.5 NSI-10-24 x 6.5 Slot Rnd 6
41B06PST.37 NSI 6-32 x 3/8 Phil Pan T 4
41S06WLX Washer Lock Ext Tooth #6 6
41S08PPS.50 N-8-32 x 1/2 PPMS 4
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 12
43BKT01 NSI Brkt, PCB 4
44RUB11 Grommet,Continuous .085 3
43SPR08 Compr. Sprg 7/16 Di24(100 4
56THM03 DU-Thermostat, 90^C (+/-) 2
52FUH04 FUSE HOLDER, 3AG/3AB 2
56FUS23 Fuse, 4 Amp 250V Slo-BLo 2
11D544 B1 BRKT SLOTBALST #14719 4
15D2509A00 B LABEL, FUSE, TUV T 4A 2
15D0795A00 B Label, beau plug 2
62AT32-T02 A FINAL TRAY ASSY, AT32 2
12D5677A71 C PO-BLOCK, BEARING MNT AT 4
12D5678A71 E PO-BLOCK, WHEEL MOUNT(A/T 4
13D9235A00 A COVER, INSULATION PCB 569 2
13D9236A00 A COVER,INSULATION PCB 570 2
13D9237A00 A COVER, INSULATION PCB 551 2
15D6084A07 A SERIAL NO LABEL ACCUTRAY 2
41-04JS.31 JACK SCREW, 4-40X.31 4
41SM3SHB6MM SCREW SOC HD CAP BUTTON 24
41SM3WLS N-M3 Lock washer aplit 56
41SM4WFR Washer, Flat S.Stl, M4 14
41SM5WFR WASHER, FLAT S.STL M5 32
43BLB19 BEARING, LINEAR 5/8 4
43BLB20 CAM FOLLOWER 1 1/8 DIA 4
43FIT09 TEE,UNION-3/8 TBG OD(100) 4
43FIT10 CONNECTOR,MALE 3/8 OD(50) 12
43FIT13 REDUCER,TUBE3/8-1/4(50) 4
43FIT15 STGHT UNION,3/8" TUBE(20) 2
62AT32-TRY02 A ASSY FINAL ACCUTRAY 4 CAM AT32 2
41BM3SSC.6MM SOC. SET SCREW M3X6 4
41S04WSH01 WASHER, S.STL, # 4 8
41SM3SHB.12MM N-M3x12mm Soc Hd Btn Scw 24
41SM3SHC.10MM N-SCREW, SOC CAP M3X10 12
41SM3SHC.6MM N-SCREW, SOC CAP, M3X6 32
41SM3SHC.8MM N-Screw, SOCK CAP M3x8 4
41SM4SHC.10MM N-Screw, SOC CAP, M4x10MM 8
41SM4SHC.8MM N-Screw, SOCK CAP, M4x8 8
41SM5SHCL.10MM N-SOC HD CAP SCREW M5X10 32
42HHS8500 NSI #6 X.125 ROUND SPACER 8
43CLP12 PIN, CLIP GAS SPRING 16
43FIT199 ELBOW, (MINI)TUBE 03MM 6
43SPR60 *GAS SPRING FOR AT30 4
43SPR65 GAS SPRING, 150N, 15MM 4
49DCT88 TUBING 08MM O.D.
49DCT90 *TUBING, 02MM I.D. 8
49VAC03 VACCUM CUP, BLUE 4
81TAP36 TAPE, TEFLON 2"W X 10MIL THK 2
81TAP44 TAPE, ACRYLIC VHB FOAM 2
62-07-30001 A ASS'Y MAIN FRAME AT32 2
12-07-36152 A RAIL, GUIDE(CAM.BAR)LH , AT32 2
12-07-36153 A B2-RAIL, GUIDE(CAM)RH, AT32 2
41BM4WFRT WASHER, FLAT M4(THICK) 8
41SM4SHC.25MM N-SCREW, SOC CAP, M4X25MM 8
43FIT196 CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT, 2
43FIT201 T-CONNECTOR, MINI 3MM 2
43FIT202 ELBOW, W/INSERT 8MM 4
43SPR58 SPRING, COMPRES. .25"OD 8
44ORNG15 *TIMING BELT 6T2.5 4
49DCT88 TUBING 08MM O.D.
62D6435C P ASSY PCB BD & CABLE ASSY 2
16D6422A01 A CABLE, RIBBON, 15 COND, 8"L 2
41-04WLS #4 SPLIT LOCK WASHER(150) 60
41SM3SHB.6MM Screw Soc Btn Hd M3x6mm 44
16D6427A01 A *CABLE, RIBN C2/C3,16COD, 12"L 2
16D6428A01 B CABLE, RIBBON C3/C5A,34"L 2
62SWPX01 A ASSY, SWTCH PROXIMITY AT#20026 2
49DCT02 Heat Shrnk tub, 1/8"(150) 1
51TML20 Term,Fml,250V/3A, 22AWG 4
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
54RIB10 A Cable, Ribbon, 10 Cond HF 1
55SW108 SWITCH, PROX 1.25X.75X.25 2
68D6559A00 B INSTR.ASSY CABLE SWTH PRO
64AT585V01 PC BOARD, DRIVER #19316 20
64AT585V00 A PCB ASSEMBLY, DIGITAL DRIVER 20
64PCB-AT30V03 ASSEMBLED PCB PANEL AT30#20327 2
17PCB-AT30V03 PCB PANEL ,4 CAMERA AT30 SEEB 2
64AT545V00 B ASSY, INTERFACE, RIGHT 2
64AT546V00 B ASSY, INTERFACE, LEFT 2
64AT551V00-1 B *ASSY, INTERFACE, DRV FR#19798 2
27DT7-10-3 Cap, Tantalum Dip 10uF 6
27EA9-47-3 A CAP, 4700UF, 35V,ELECTROL 2
53CTS112 HEADER, .1",3 PIN SINGLE 6
53CTS141 HEADER, .100", 10 PIN STRAIGHT 2
53CTS145 HEADER,.100",14 PIN STRGH 4
53CTS149 HEADER,100"X.318",6 PIN 18
64AT578V00-1 A ASSY INTERFACE REAR/RHT 2
53CTS04 Connector 36 Pin Mal Blk
53CTS159 HEADER, 1MM, 8 PIN,90 DEG 4
53CTS160 HEADER, 1MM,14 PIN, 90^ 4
64AT579V00-1 B ASSY INTERACE REAR/LEFT# 2
53CTS159 HEADER, 1MM, 8 PIN,90 DEG 4
53CTS160 HEADER, 1MM,14 PIN, 90^ 4
64AT659V00-1 A PCB INTERFACE DRIVE RIGHT 2
2278M12 Regulator, 12v 2
43HSK01 Heat Sink 2
53CTS142 HEADER,.100", 14 PIN 90^ 4
53CTS143 HEADER, .100, 16 PIN 4
53CTS149 HEADER,100"X.318",6 PIN 18
64AT660V00-1 A PCB INTERFACE DRIVER LEFT 2
2278M12 Regulator, 12v 2
43HSK01 Heat Sink 2
53CTS142 HEADER,.100", 14 PIN 90^ 4
53CTS143 HEADER, .100, 16 PIN 2
53CTS149 HEADER,100"X.318",6 PIN 4
16D6423A01 B *CABLE, RIBBON 10 COND, 5.87"L 2
16D6423B01 B CABLE, RIBBON, 10 CD , 6"L 2
16D6424A01 A CABLE, RIBBON, 14 COND,14"L 2
16D6425A01 A CABLE, RIBBON 14 COND , 9.75"L 2
62D6628 B ASSY X-AXIS SPRING BLOCK#20028 2
12D6128A07 A BUSHING, SLOTTED 2
43PPR09 PIN, SPRING 02.5 X 12 2
43SPR52 SPRING, COMPR 2
12D6127A71 C B1-BLOCK, SPRING 2
62D6659 B ASS'Y FILM VAC ( LOWER)#20052 2
43FIT191 CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT 4
43FIT198 CONNECTOR, MINI-ELBOW 4
49DCT87 TUBING, 06MM O.D.
12D6178A71 C *R*B1-BLOCK, FILM VAC(LW) 2
62-07-0157 ASSY,VALVE BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2
12-07-0157A76 B MINITURE SOLENOID MANIFOLD 2
31VLV31 VALVE, SOL 6
41SM3SSS.4MM N-SCREW, SOC SET M3X4MM 6
43FIT253 FITTING, STRAIGHT M3 6
470004 FITTING, ELBOW,3MM TUBE 4
43CON04 CONNECTOR, CABLE 6
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 6
62-07-36640 A ASSY, FLOATING BAR LH ,AT32 2
41SM4SSS.4MM N-SCREW, SOCK SET, M4X4MM 2
43SPR60 *GAS SPRING FOR AT30 4
43SPR65 GAS SPRING, 150N, 15MM 4
12-07-36191A76 B BAR, FLOATING AT32 2
12-07-36192A71 B1 B2- BLOCK, PIVOT 2
12D6193A67 B1 BLOCK, HINGE (LOWER) 2
12D6194A67 B1 BLOCK, HINGE(FLOATING) 2
12D6675A07 B DOWEL PIN, HINGE PIN 2
62-07-36641 A ASSY, FLOATING BAR RH ,AT32 2
12-07-36192A71 B1 B2- BLOCK, PIVOT 2
12D6193A67 B1 BLOCK, HINGE (LOWER) 2
12D6194A67 B1 BLOCK, HINGE(FLOATING) 2
41SM4SSC.3MM SCREW, SOCK ST M4X3MM 2
12D6192A71 B B2-BLOCK, PIVOT FLTNG BAR 2
12D6675A07 B DOWEL PIN, HINGE PIN 2
12-07-36224 A BAR, FLOATING , AT32 2
62-07-36650 A ASSY LINEAR RAIL RIGHT, AT32 2
12-07-36020 A PO-RAIL, LINEAR AT32 398MM 2
12-07-36155 A BAR,LINEAR RAIL MNT(RH AT32 2
41S04WLS N-4-40 WASHER LOCK 50
41SM2SHC.8MM N-SCREW, SOCK CAP M2X8 4
62D6627B00 ASSY,IDLER PULLEY BLK#20034 2
41DPNMM3X20 DOWEL PIN 03 X 20 2
12D6173A07 A MAC-PULLEY, IDLER (BELT) 2
12-07-0214 B PULLEY MOUNT 2
62D6627A00 ASSY,IDLER PULLEY BLK #20034 2
12D6172A71 C B1-BLOCK, IDLER PULLEY 2
62D6644 E ASSY, MOTOR CAMERA XR #20035 2
43RRB02 RETAINING RING, EXTERNAL 2
31MOT47 MOTOR, DRIVER 2
12D6238A07 B PO-SHAFT, ROLLER/COUPLER 2
12D6237A07 C PO-BEARING, OUTER 2
12D6236A07 A *BEARING, INNER 2
12D6168A07 B MAC-PULLEY, DRV BELT(MTR) 2
12D6167A71 F MOUNT CAMERA MTR(RH-X) 2
12D6160A07 A PO-COUPLER, SPINDLE MOTOR AT 2
62SWM04 A ASSY SWITCH,MINIATURE AT#20036 2
49DCT92 A TUBING,HEAT SHNK, 1/16(50 1
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
55SW107 SWITCH 2
68D6429A00 C INSTR. ASSY, CABLE SWITCH
62-07-36651 A ASSY, LINEAR RAIL, LEFT AT32 2
12-07-36020 A PO-RAIL, LINEAR AT32 398MM 2
12-07-36154 A BAR, LINEAR RAIL MT(LH ATH32 2
62D6643 E ASSY, MOTOR CAMERA XL #20038 2
12D6166A71 G MOUNT, CAMERA MTR(LH-X) 2
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
55SW107 SWITCH 2
62-07-36655 A ASSY PLATE FRAME (LOWER)ATH32 2
12D6180A07 A PO-PISTON, CYL (PANCAKE) 8
11D6102A07 A DISK SHIM 018 # 12567 16
12D6181A79 C PO-CYLINDER, PANCAKE 8
12D6182A07 A PIN, CYLINDER (LIFT) 8
43FIT197 CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT(MINI) 12
44ORNG16 O RING 0 22 X 1.3 8
44ORNG19 ORING 017 X 1.78 8
12-07-36105 A HINGE HOLD DOWN 4
12-07-36104 A B1-PIVOT BLK, GASSPRNG(UP 4
12-07-6177 A AIR MANIFOLD LOWER 2
12D6111A78 C PO-PIVOT BLOCK, UPPERFM 2
12D6110A78 B PO-PIVOT BLOCK, UPPER FM 2
12D6159A07 B PO-SHAFT, TENSION SPRING 2
43SPR94 SPRING, Z100SI 4
12-07-36101A76 A B1-PLATE, FRAME (LOWER) AT32 2
12-07-6178A76 C1 AIR MANIFOLD FILM 2
12D6176A76 C B2/B1-PLATE, BASE(CYL RR) 4
12D6175A76 E B2/B1-PLATE, BASE(CYL RR) 4
12D6114A76 D B1-PLATE, LATCH RETAINER 4
12D6113A76 B B1-PIVOT BLK, GASSPRNG(RH 2
12D6112A76 B B1-PIVOT BLK, GASSPRNG(LH 2
12D6109A76 E1 B1-MOUNT, LINEAR RAIL(INN 8
12D6108A76 B B1-MOUNT, LINEAR RAIL(END 4
12D6106A76 C B1-MOUNT PLATE, MAG, SWTH 2
12D6104A67 C PIVOT BLOCK, GAS SPRING 4
12D6103A76 C B1-BLOCK, STOP SWITCH 10
62-07-37892 A ASSY, PIN BAR ASSEMBLY AT32 2
12D6129A07 C PO-WASHER, CSK 012MM 4
12D6134A07 A PO-SPACER, THRD 012-M3 4
12D6411A00 C HEX STANDOFF 1/4X.230,M3 10
41SM3SFS.4MM N-SCREW, FLT HD SLTD M3X4 4
41SM4SHF.6MM N-SCREW, SOC FLT HD M4X6M 4
12-07-37805 B PIN, BAR AT32 2
12D6241A71 D B1-PLATE, SWITCH MOUNT 6
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
55SW107 SWITCH 2
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 4
55SW107 SWITCH 4
62-07-37893 A ASSY, ALIGN BAR , REAR , AT32 2
12D6129A07 C PO-WASHER, CSK 012MM 8
12D6411A00 C HEX STANDOFF 1/4X.230,M3 22
41SM4SHF.6MM N-SCREW, SOC FLT HD M4X6M 8
43SPR66 SPRING, COMPRESSION, 7MM 6
12-07-36137 A PO-BLOCK, POSITIONING 4
12-07-36232 A BLOCK, TENSIONING ATH32 4
12D6156A71 F MAC-BLOCK Y-MTR MNT(L/R) 2
12D6128A07 A BUSHING, SLOTTED 2
12D6163A71 D PO-BLOCK, X-MTR MNT(L/R) 2
41DPNMM5X10 DOWEL PIN, 05MMX10MM LONG 4
43BLB58 BEARING, BALL METRIC 5MM 2
12-07-37887 A PLT END, BAR(REAR), AT32 2
12-07-38001 A SPRING RETAINING 6
12-07-36232 A BLOCK, TENSIONING ATH32 4
12D6127A71 C B1-BLOCK, SPRING 2
12D6231A71 B B2-BEARING, BLOCK, FIXED#20231 2
12D6230A71 C B2-BEARING,BLOCK,TENSION#20230 2
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 6
55SW107 SWITCH 6
62D6630 A ASSYALIGN BAR BEARING FX#20059 2
12D6231A71 B B2-BEARING, BLOCK, FIXED#20231 2
62D6629 A ASSY,ALIGN BAR BEARING#20058 2
12D6230A71 C B2-BEARING,BLOCK,TENSION#20230 2
12D6241A71 D B1-PLATE, SWITCH MOUNT 6
12D6233A07 A SHOULDER BOLT(M4X12.2 6
62-07-37908 A ASSY, CAMERA BAR RH AT32 2
11-07-30211 A CAMERA ARM COVER RIGHT 2
11-07-30212 A STRIP RUNNER MAGNETIC, AT32 2
11-07-30201 A CAMARA ARM COVER RIGHT 2
41SM3SFS.3MM N-SCREW, FLT.HD.M3X3 SLD 10
41SM3SHC.14MM Screw, SOC, Cap M3x14 6
41SM4SHC.6MM RW WEDGE SWITCH ASSEMBLY RIGHT 4
42STD-M3-25MM STANDOFF, ZINC PLATED HEX 2
43BLB53 BEARING, ROLLER 4X9X2.5 6
54FLX01 A 1MM FLAT FLEX CABLE, 12"L, 14C 2
54FLX14 CABLE, FLAT FLEX 14 COND,14 IN 2
54FLX10 CABLE, FLAT FLEX,8COND 27"L 2
54FLX08 CABLE, FLAT FLEX 24", 8Conduct 2
81TAP36 TAPE, TEFLON 2"W X 10MIL THK 3
81TAP60 TAPE, CLEAR 4910
12-07-30211 A AT32 CAMERA RIGHT ARM T FRONTA 2
62D7945 D CAMERA SLED #20065 2
12D6209A07 A PIN, SLED CAMERA 12
41NM3WFR WASHER, M3 FLAT, NYLON 8
43BAL01 BALL, CHROME STEEL 04 MM 4
43MAG14 MAGNET, 010 X 5 4
43PRL01 PIN, ROLLER 4
43SPR82 COMPRESSION SPRING 4
46LEN01 LENS,SYMMETRIC-CONVEXGL 2
46MIR01 J-MIRROR R-ANGLE 10X10X10 2
46MIR02 J-MIRROR, RIGHT-ANGLE 2
46PRI01 PRISM, R-ANGLE 10 X 10 X 10 4
12D7454A71 E B2-COVER, CAMERA SLED RH 2
12D7409A71 C HOUSING, LENS MOUNT 2
12D6210A07 A *CYLINDER, 04.9MM 4
64AT583V04 ASSY, SMT LED-IR 2
64AT580V05 ASSY LED SMT W/LEADWIRE 8
64AT649V02 A PCB LED BASE W/O PLUG&LED-IR 2
64CM559V04-T PC BOARD, CAMERA #19537 2
64CM559V04 A ASSY,PCB CAMERA II W/LED 2
25OV7411 CAMERA, CMOS, NTSC,B/W 2
12D8996A07 B SCREW, SHOULDER M3X3 4
12D7490A71 D RM,B2 CLAMP, CBL, CAMERA 2
12D7487A71 G CHG-B2-PLATE,MOUNT,MIRROR 2
12D7486A71 B B2-PO-BLOCK, LED MOUNT 2
12D7483A76 E1 B1-SLED, CAMERA LH 2
43MAG48 MAGNET, NEODYMIUM (NDFEB) 4
62D7970 B CAMERA SLED STATIONARY RH 2
12D7480A71 A B3-COVER,CAMERA STA,RH#19988 2
12-07-07458 A CAMERA SLED, MOUNTING BRACKET 2
12D7482A76 D B3-SLED, CAMERA STA RH#19990 2
41-M3NLN M3 HEX LOCK NUT (NYLON) 8
41SM3SSS.10MM SCREW, SOC SET M3X10MM 8
12-07-0215 B RETAINER, CAMERA SLED 2
12-07-0216 A RETAINER, CAMERA SLED SHORT 2
12D6412A00 A *HEX STANDOFF 1/4X.325,M3 6
12D6861A07 C CLAMP, CABLE, STRADDLE MT 2
12D7447A71 C B2-CLAMP, DRIVE BELT TOP 4
12D7448A71 A B2-CLAMP,DRIVE BELT,BTM 4
12D7459A71 C B2-BLOCK, SWITCH, CMR ARM 2
12D7488A71 B B2-CLAMP, GEAR BLT,BT 4
12D7489A71 A B2-CLAMP, GEAR BELT, TOP 2
62D6648 E ASSY MOTOR CAMERA YL #20062 2
12D6164A71 G PO-MOUNT,CAMERA MTR(LH-Y) 2
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
54RIB10 A Cable, Ribbon, 10 Cond HF
55SW107 SWITCH 2
62-07-37909 A ASSY, CAMERA BAR LH 2
11-07-30210 A CAMERA ARM COVER LEFT AT32 2
11-07-30212 A STRIP RUNNER MAGNETIC, AT32 2
11-07-30200 A CAMARA ARM COVER LEFT 2
41SM3SHS.3MM M3/04MMX3MM SLOTTED SHD 4
41SM4SHC.6MM RW WEDGE SWITCH ASSEMBLY RIGHT 4
43BLB53 BEARING, ROLLER 4X9X2.5 6
54FLX01 A 1MM FLAT FLEX CABLE, 12"L, 14C 2
54FLX14 CABLE, FLAT FLEX 14 COND,14 IN 2
54FLX10 CABLE, FLAT FLEX,8COND 27"L 2
54FLX08 CABLE, FLAT FLEX 24", 8Conduct 2
12-07-0215 A RETAINER, CAMERA SLED 2
12-07-0216 A RETAINER, CAMERA SLED SHORT 2
12-07-30210 A AT32 CAMERA LEFT ARM T FRONT E 2
62D7944 D CAMERA SLED 2
12D6209A07 A PIN, SLED CAMERA 12
43PRL01 PIN, ROLLER 4
12D6210A07 A *CYLINDER, 04.9MM 4
12D7485A71 E B2-COVER, CAMERA SLED LH 2
12D7484A76 E1 B1-SLED, CAMERA RH 2
12D7490A71 D RM,B2 CLAMP, CBL, CAMERA 2
62D7971 B CAMERASLED STATIONARY LH#20071 2
12D7481A76 D SLED, CAMERA STA LH #19989 2
12-07-07458 A CAMERA SLED, MOUNTING BRACKET 2
41-M3NLN M3 HEX LOCK NUT (NYLON) 8
12D7479A71 A COVER, CAMERA STA, LH#19987 2
64AT579V00 B ASSY INTERACE REAR/LEFT#20117 2
12-07-0215 B RETAINER, CAMERA SLED 2
12D6412A00 A *HEX STANDOFF 1/4X.325,M3 6
12D6861A07 C CLAMP, CABLE, STRADDLE MT 2
12D7447A71 C B2-CLAMP, DRIVE BELT TOP 4
12D7448A71 A B2-CLAMP,DRIVE BELT,BTM 4
12D7459A71 C B2-BLOCK, SWITCH, CMR ARM 2
12D7488A71 B B2-CLAMP, GEAR BLT,BT 4
12D7489A71 A B2-CLAMP, GEAR BELT, TOP 2
62D6649 E ASSY, MOTOR CAMERA YR #20069 2
12D6165A71 E MOUNT, CAMERA MTR(RH-Y) 2
53CTP05 PLUG,.100",3 POS. 2
54RIB10 A Cable, Ribbon, 10 Cond HF
55SW107 SWITCH 2
12D6130A07 E SPACER, FLANGED 012MM 8
12D6131A07 D ASS'Y MAIN FRAME # JAD 8
12D6132A07 A *SPACER, FLANGED 014MM 8
12D6133A07 D PO-SCREW,SHOULDER 07X16 8
62D6632 E ASSY DISTRIBUTOR VAC BLK#20029 2
43FIT10 CONNECTOR,MALE 3/8 OD(50) 2
12-07-6177A76 C ** no desc for part 2
41SM5SSS.6MM N-Screw, SOCK SET M5x6MM 2
41SM6SSS.8MM N-SCREW, SOC SET, M6X8MM 4
43FIT200 ELBOW, (MINI) TUBE 06MM 4
43FIT217 FITTING, PLUG, G-1/8 2
62D6645 D ASSY, MOTOR "Y" LR & RF #20032 4
12D6008A07 B SPINDEL , DRIVE 4
12D6009A07 C PO-NUT, DRIVE 4
12D6156A71 F MAC-BLOCK Y-MTR MNT(L/R) 4
12D6162A07 B *SCREW, SET(SHLDR) M4X8 4
12D6226A07 B PO-DISK, 011MM 4
12D6235A07 A DISK, BALL 4
62D6646 D ASSY, MOTOR "Y" RR & LF #20033 4
12D6157A71 E BLOCK, Y-MTR MNT(RR&LF) #20218 4
12D6226A07 B PO-DISK, 011MM 4
62D6647 E ASSY, MOTOR "X" LR & RF #20037 4
12D6163A71 D PO-BLOCK, X-MTR MNT(L/R) 4
12D6226A07 B PO-DISK, 011MM 4
62-07-36674 A ASS'Y PLATE FRAME UPPER AT32 2
13-07-36010 A SEAL, UPPER FRAME PLATE AT32 2
41SM5SHCL.8MM N-SOC HD CAP SCREW M5X8 8
41SM5WLS N-M5 Lock Washer 8
41SM5SHLM4X5M SHOULDER SCREW M5 SHDLXM4X5MM 4
81TAP44 TAPE, ACRYLIC VHB FOAM
81TAP60 TAPE, CLEAR 4910 1
62-07-39253 A ASSY HINGE BLK ATH32 2
12D7765A71 A SPACER, HINGE PIN 2
43BLB52 BEARING, BALL 10X19X5 2
43BLB55 BEARING, NEEDLE 2
12-07-36120 B HINGE BLOCK UPPER FRAME 2
12-07-37767 A PLUG 2
12-07-37768 A SHAFT 2
62-07-39254 A ASSY,HINGE BLK LEFT ATH32 2
12-07-36120 B HINGE BLOCK UPPER FRAME 2
12-07-37767 A PLUG 2
12-07-37768 A SHAFT 2
12-07-6179 E FILM VAC UPPER FRAME MANIFOLD 2
12-07-36115A76 A PLATE, FRAME (UPPER) ATH32 2
11D6121A07 A DISK SHIM 010 # 12566 8
12D6122A76 B B1-MOUNT, BLOCK SPRNG BAR 4
62D6639 B ASSY, LATCH HANDEL ASSY #20021 4
12D6118A76 F B1-HANDLE, LATCH (LH) 4
12D6123A07 D PO-KNOB, LATCH 4
12D6124A07 E MAC-HUB, LOCKING 4
13D6733A07 A WASHER, TERCITE, 12.74MM 4
41SM4SHF.16MM N-Screw, Socket Flat Head 4
43PLG02 PLUNGER, SPRING M4 4
62D9253 A ASSY, HINGE BLK RIGHT #20023 2
12D6120A71 D HGE, BLK (UPPER FRAME 2
12D7767A07 B PLUG 2
12D7768A07 B SHAFT 2
12D6105A71 B B1-PLATE, RETAINER(HINGE) 2
12D6239A71 B B1-PLATE, RETAINER(HINGE) 2
12D6860A07 C CLAMP, CABLE, BTM MOUNT 4
12-07-0909 A TRAY SWITCH ACTIVATION BLOCK 4
12-07-0908 A BLOCK, SPACER BEARING MOUNT 4
11D6031A17 B PLATE, CABLE TRACK MNT 2
62ATH32-SUB01 ATH32-50HZ -SUB-ASSY 1
15D3583A00 DU-LABEL, CE 1
16D4056A00 C HARNESS,EMRG/RESETSWAP30#20830 1
62ATH32-NSA01 ATH32-50HZ -SUB-ASSY 1
15D7782A00 B OVERLAY, GO/STOP 1
16D2412A00 B HARNESS, EMERGENCY SWITCH 1
16D4061A00 B HARNESS LIGHT/BLOWAP30-CE 1
16D4183A04 B HARNESS,WORK LIGHT 250V4' 2
16D6666A00 A HARNESS, MEMORY, STOP/GO 1
41-08PF0.37 NSI-8-32X.38 PHFLTHD 100^ 32
41B06PST.50 NSI 6-32X1/2 BK PP SELF TAP TY 2
41S06PF0.37 N-6-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 14
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 4
42SWP01 PLATE, EMERGENCY SWITCH 1
43FIT14 Connector, 1/4 Tube to 2
44PAD03 NSI TIE WRAP ADH. MNT. BASE 3
44TIE02 Cable Tie 4" #18 Max Bdl 7/8 3
49DCT90 *TUBING, 02MM I.D. 31
49VAG02 Vacuum Gauge,0-30" 2
51SI18E Spade, Ins. 22-18Ga #8 4
51TML01 TERMINAL MALE 18-22 AWG 3
52CTP08 Plug, 3 Pin Molex, .093 Pin 1
52TS05 5 POSITION TERMINAL STRIP 1
54JMP03 KULKA JUMPERS 602J 2
55SW119 Switch,Pushbutton, S/Stl 2
55SW53 PUSHBUTTON, EMERGENCY SW 1
81TAP24 DU-TAPE DOUBLE SIDED 216' P/RL 6
62D8873 D TOUCHSCREEN ARM ASSY 1
41S12PF0.37 N-10-32X3/8 PHIL FLT 100^ 8
41SM4WFR Washer, Flat S.Stl, M4 4
41SM5WFR WASHER, FLAT S.STL M5 4
41SM5WLS N-M5 Lock Washer 4
44ARM02 ARM, MONITOR 1
54CAB156 CABLE, SVGA, HD15, COAX, 1
54PWR12 A POWER CORD FOR 50 HZ CTL BOX 1
53PLG06 POWER PLUG, INTERNATIONAL 1
11D9706A32 A LCD+KEYBOARDMOUNTINGPLATE 1
11D9707A32 A LCD MOUNTING BRACKET #19460 1
12-00374-00 C MOUNTINGPLATE FOR CAMERA 1
11-07-09206 A NOSE PANEL BASE, ATH32 1
11-07-09208 A NOSE FRONT, ATH32 1
11-07-09204 A NOSE RIGHT SIDE, ATH32 1
11-07-09205 A NOSE LEFT SIDE, ATH32 1
54CAB187 CABLE USB EXT M TO FEMALE 2
64PCB-DIS06 ASSY. PCB, SYSTEM DPLY CE 1
64MI477V05 A1 ASSY,SUPPL KEY BD A-OV-CE 1
64MI478V07 C ASSY, KEYBOARD 1
16D7020A09 CBL DISPLY/MAIN AP/OV #20191 1
65D7644A00 B BRKT STOP/GO # 14179 1
8103-60918 PAINT013/DARK COOL GRAY/OLEC 1
18GA-4X10 CRS 48 X 120 18 GA (.048) 1
63-07-3304 A COVER RAILS ATH32 1
62D4051A00 ASS'Y PWR CBL CD AP30CL 1
15D3973A00 A LABEL, CABLE ID 1
15D3977A00 A1 LABEL, POWER CORD ID 1
43FIT78 REDUCING WASHER,1.25"-1" 2
44BSH01 BUSHING, SNAP-IN, OPN 1
52CON02 CONNECTOR,CONDUIT STRGHT 1
54BLK08 Wire, hk-up, 08ga,blk 20
54BLU08 WIRE, HK-UP .08GA BLU(200 20
54BRN08 WIRE, HK-UP .08GA BRN(200 20
54CDT02 CONDUIT, FLEX, 1.0"(250) 10
54GND08 B Wire 8awg Yel/Grn(200) 25
54RED08 Wire, hk-up.08GA,red(250) 20
62D4055A00 A ASS'Y EMER.W/RELAY-AP30CL 1
55SW45-5 Barrier 2
55SW45-8 Button, White "RESET" 1
55SW45 Switch, Nose AP30/33 1
62-07-0906 CTRL BX 380V,50HZ ATH32#20645 1
15D3833A00 A LABEL, HIGH VOLTAGE 1
15D6004A00 A LABEL, WIRING CONN ACUTRY 1
15D6026A00 C OVERLAY, CONTROL BOX A/T 1
15D6028A00 A MIH-LABEL,PWR SOURCES,ID 1
15LBM01 A LABEL POWER BLOCK "L1"
15LBM03 A LABEL, POWER BLOCK "L3"
15LBM04 A LABEL, POWER BLOCK,"N"
16D3451F02 B JUMPER 10GA GRE/YEL 2" 2
16D3451G02 B JUMPER 10GA RED 2" 4
16D3451K02 B JUMPER 10GA BLUE 2" 4
16D6027A00 C HARNESS, CT BX ACCUTRAY 1
21MOV02 MOV, 250VAC 1
29PLF02 FILTER POWER LINE 25A, 250V 5
31MSC02 MOTOR,SPEED CONTROL 1
32PSF07 A POWER SUPPLY, SWITCHINGAT 1
39BLO23-2 BLOWER,OLEC, 220V/60HZ 1
41-06WFN NSI #6 NARROW WASHERS 12
41S06PPS.75 N-6-32X3/4 PPMS 8
42HHS8343 NSI 6-32 X .500 Round Thd 4
42HHS8502 NSI #6X.375 ROUND SPACER 12
42HHS9223 NSI #10 Thru Spacer .437L 4
44CPG08 PLUG,PLASTIC,BLACK 1.5" 2
44RST16 STRAIN RELIEF, .708-.984 2
51RI14E NSI Ring Term 16-14GA #10 1
51TML03 Terminal male 14-20 AWG 1
52LUG01 LUG CONNECTOR, #2-#8 WIRE 1
52RCP34 RECEPTACLE, 16A, IEC 4
52TS24-1 END STOP, .236" 2
52TS24-2 DIN RAIL, STEEL 7.50MMX35MMX2M 1
52TS24 POWER, DISTR BLOCK 8-2 GA 4
54GND16 A WIRE,16AWG G/Y UL1015 1
56BRK01 CIRCUIT BREAKER 5 AMP 2
56BRK02 Circuit Breaker 15 AMP 2
56BRK19 A Circuuit Breaker,20A,250V 2
11-07-0937 A CONTROL BOX ATH32 1
11-07-0938 A FRONT CONTROL BOX - ATH32 1
11D4174A02 B BRACKET #11650 2
11D1834A62 B HINGE ACCUPRINT CT BX #14577 2
11D1834B62 B HINGE ACCUPRINT CT BX #14577 2
62D4057A00 A1 Assy, emergency relay 1
26-3-22 Resistor .25 W 1% 2.2 K 1
27EA9-47-1 Cap, Electro Axial 4700uF 16V 1
33RLY21 Relay,DPST-NO,12VDC 1
49DCT08 Tubing, teflon 2
51PI14 NSI Piggy back Ins. 16-14 .250 2
51RI18E NSI Rng Term. Ins. #8 22- 1
54GND18 B Wire 18awg yel/Grn UL1015 1
64CT464V00 D2 PCB ASSY CONTROL AP30 1
62D6002B00 C CONTROLBOX 380V~ 50HZ 1
15D6004A00 A LABEL, WIRING CONN ACUTRY 1
15D6026A00 C OVERLAY, CONTROL BOX A/T 1
15D6028A00 A MIH-LABEL,PWR SOURCES,ID 1
15LBM03 A LABEL, POWER BLOCK "L3"
15LBM04 A LABEL, POWER BLOCK,"N"
16D3451F02 B JUMPER 10GA GRE/YEL 2" 2
16D3451G02 B JUMPER 10GA RED 2" 4
16D3451K02 B JUMPER 10GA BLUE 2" 4
16D6027A00 C HARNESS, CT BX ACCUTRAY 1
21MOV02 MOV, 250VAC 1
29PLF02 FILTER POWER LINE 25A, 250V 5
31MSC02 MOTOR,SPEED CONTROL 1
32PSF07 A POWER SUPPLY, SWITCHINGAT 1
39BLO23-2 BLOWER,OLEC, 220V/60HZ 1
41-06WFN NSI #6 NARROW WASHERS 12
41S06PPS.75 N-6-32X3/4 PPMS 8
42HHS8343 NSI 6-32 X .500 Round Thd 4
42HHS8502 NSI #6X.375 ROUND SPACER 12
42HHS9223 NSI #10 Thru Spacer .437L 4
44CPG08 PLUG,PLASTIC,BLACK 1.5" 2
44RST16 STRAIN RELIEF, .708-.984 2
51RI14E NSI Ring Term 16-14GA #10 1
51TML02 Terminal Female 18-22 AWG 4
51TML03 Terminal male 14-20 AWG 1
52CTP16 Plug, 4 Pin Molex Intntl. 1
52LUG01 LUG CONNECTOR, #2-#8 WIRE 1
52RCP34 RECEPTACLE, 16A, IEC 4
52TS24-1 END STOP, .236" 2
52TS24-2 DIN RAIL, STEEL 7.50MMX35MMX2M 1
52TS24 POWER, DISTR BLOCK 8-2 GA 4
54GND16 A WIRE,16AWG G/Y UL1015 1
56BRK01 CIRCUIT BREAKER 5 AMP 2
56BRK19 A Circuuit Breaker,20A,250V 2
68D5776A00 C ASS'Y INSTRUCTION
11D3847A02 D CHASSIS, CT BOX OV45 CE 1
11D1834A62 B HINGE ACCUPRINT CT BX #14577 2
11D1834B62 B HINGE ACCUPRINT CT BX #14577 2
11D4054A02 D FRNT, CONTROL BX #9785 1
11D4174A02 B BRACKET #11650 2
64CT464V00 D2 PCB ASSY CONTROL AP30 1
62D4057A00 A1 Assy, emergency relay 1
26-3-22 Resistor .25 W 1% 2.2 K 1
27EA9-47-1 Cap, Electro Axial 4700uF 16V 1
49DCT08 Tubing, teflon 2
51PI14 NSI Piggy back Ins. 16-14 .250 2
51RI18E NSI Rng Term. Ins. #8 22- 1
54GND18 B Wire 18awg yel/Grn UL1015 1
62ATH32C-BS01 ATH32C-BASEKIT 1
12D4389A71 C PO-SHAFTSUPPORTRAILLNG 2
12D4389C71 E SHAFT SUPPORT 24" 2
12D4599B00 A JIT-PO-SHAFT, ACCUTR 5/8", 73" 2
15D2067 A LABEL, CAUTION 1
15D3508A00 A LABEL,HOSE - CLS 1
15D3587A00 B LABEL, FLOW DIRECTION 1
15D3587B00 B LABEL, FLOW DIRECTION 1
15D3830A00 OVERLAY, CONTROL AP/OV 1
15D3832A00 A LABEL, HOT SURFACE 6
15D4129A00 C LABEL, COMPONENTS 1
15D4581A00 A Label, dome, OLEC logo 1
16D0957A15 J CABLE, INTERCONNECT 15 FT 2
16D1003A10 D J30-CONNECTOR CABLE 10 FT 3
16D1003A15 D J30-15 FT SHLD 24AWG CBL 4
16D2182A60 C GROUND WIRE PRIMARY 60"L 1
16D3406A00 A1 HARNESS, ACCESSORY-CLOSED 1
16D3793A00 B HARNESS,12VDC POWER AP42 1
16D3808A00 B HARNESS, VALVES 1
16D4168A00 B HARNESS,SWITVCHES-CLS,CE 1
16D4171A12 B HARNESS,VALVES,CLS(FEET) 1
16D4173A40 CABLE,RIBBON,20PIN,40" L 1
16D417708 B CABLE,POWER 250V/50H 8FT 2
16D7990A00 A CABLE, 24VDC P/S, EVAP 1
16D9135A00 B CABLE,ADAPTER,TXD/RXD BTM 1
16D9137A00 A CABLE,BLWRS/C251,CL AX28 1
16D9138A00 A CABLE,BLWRS, EXT CL AX28 1
29PLF01 RFI POWER LINE FILTER 1
32PSF16 POWER SUPPLY, 24 VDC 1
39REG02 REGULATOR 1
41S06PF0.18 6-32X3/16 PFMS 100 S.STL 4
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 8
41S08SHC1.25 N-8-32 X 1.25 SOCKET HDC 1
41S12PPS1.25 10-32X1.25 PPMS S.STEEL 5
41S40NHX 1/4-20 HEX NUT S.STEEL 6
41S40NLN NSI 1/4-20 LOCKNUT NYLON INS 4
41SF0BHX.75 NSI 1/4-20X3/4 HEX HD BOL 4
41SF5NHX 1/2-13 HEX NUT S.STEEL 4
41SF5WFR 1/2 FLAT WASHER S.STEEL 4
43BXC01 COVER, HANDY BOX 1
43CLM10 HOSE CLAMP 1" ID 2
43FIT07 ELBOW, UNION - 3/8 TUBING 4
43FIT08 STEM ELBOW,PLG-IN 3/8(100 4
43FIT102 ELBOW MALE 1/2 NPT 2
43FIT203 POLYPROPYLENE SINGLE-BARB 1
43FIT22 Y UNION 3/8 2
43FIT23 STEM HOSE BARB,ADP3/8(100 4
43FIT96 ANCHOR COUPLING 1/2" P.T 1
43HBX02 HANDY BOX, 4 X 2.12 X 1.87 1
44CPG07 Caplug 0.750 12
44GKT01 B GASKET, 1/16 THK 1/2W(FT) 18
44GKT72 POLYETHLINE FOAM 1/4" THK 6
44GKT81 RUBBER FOAM, POLYETHYLENE 1
44MNT08 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT 8
45KOB06 KNOB, LITE STD 2
49DCT22-C Wire Duct Cover 16
49DCT24 DU-TUBE, 5/16ID X 1/2OD 6
49DCT34 BRAID CLEAR PVC TUBING 4
49DCT40 A Wirewy 1x1.5 16
49DCT41 HOSE INSULATION(300) 4
49DCT47 A POLYURETHANE TUBING BLACK 6
49DCT63-C A WIREWAY COVER 2" BLK 6
49DCT63 A WIREWAY 2 X 2(SELF ADHESIVE) 6
49DCT88 TUBING 08MM O.D. 6
49SLD20 SLIDE, DRAW, 1200MM 2
49VAV01 VALVE, VACUUM RELIEF 4
54CAB126 CABLE, EXTENSION, 75 OHM 4
54CAB127 CABLE EXTENSION 75 OHM 4
54PWR12 A POWER CORD FOR 50 HZ CTL BOX 1
55SW55 SWITCH, DOOR 2
62AT30-KTPC02 A ASSY, BRACKET PC-AT SYS#20105 1
11D9130A47 B BRACKET, PC, TOP/BOTTOM 2
11D9131A71 A BRACKET, PC, END - AAT 1
11D9132A07 A SUPPORT, 1X1X19-PC 2
41CF0FHB.37 NSI 1/4-20X3/8 SOC BUTTON 12
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 2
43NUT01 DOUBLE ECONOMY T-NUTS 4
500900-34-01 NUT,SQUARE,1/4-20 4
94INS241 A INSTR. TOWERPC MOUNTING
62AT32-CTA01 A CABLE TRACK, TOP TRAY , AT32 1
16D3451A98 B CABLE,GRD WIRE R/R 98" L 1
16D9723A13 B CABLE, I/O/VIDEO TRAY13FT,4XCM 1
43HCC08 HOSE AND CABLE CARRIER 1
49DCT88 TUBING 08MM O.D. 3
81TAP26 TAPE, POLYETHYLENE BLACK 5
62AT32-CTA02 A CABLE TRACK, BOTTOM TRAY 1
16D3451A98 B CABLE,GRD WIRE R/R 98" L 1
16D9723A13 B CABLE, I/O/VIDEO TRAY13FT,4XCM 1
43HCC15 CABLE TRACK 1
49DCT46 POLYURETHANE TUBING 3/8" 16
49DCT87 TUBING, 06MM O.D. 12
81TAP26 TAPE, POLYETHYLENE BLACK 5
62AT32-RDA01 ASSEMBLY RAIL/ DRIVE ASSY AT32 1
16D2495B00 B HARNESS, EMERGENCY SW-EXT 1
41-04PPS.62 NSI 4-40 X 5/8 PPMS ZINC 2
41-F0BHX.75 NSI 1/4-20X3/4 HEX HD BLT 4
41-F2WLS 5/16 SPLIT LOCK WASHER 1
41-F3NLN 3/8-16 NYLON LOCK NUT OV45 1
41B08PF0.25 NSI 8-32X.25 FLAT HEAD,100^,BL 2
41B08PF2.62 NSI 8-32X5/8 FLAT HD 82^ 4
41B08SHC1.25 8-32X1.25 SOCKET HD (100) 1
41B08SHC1.50 8-32X1.50 SKT HEAD CAP 1
41B40BHX1.2 NSI 1/4-20 X 1.25 HEX BLT BLK 1
41B40BHX1.7 NSI 1/4X20X1-3/4 HEX BOLT BLK 2
41B40NLN NSI 1/4-20 LOCKNUT NYLON INS 4
41BF0SHC1.75 1/4-20X1-3/4 SOC HD (10) 3
41BF0SHF1.75 1/4-20X1-3/4 SOCK FLAT HD 1
41BF2BHX.75 NSI 5/16-18X3/4 HEX BOLT BLK Z 1
41S06PPS.75 N-6-32X3/4 PPMS 4
41S08SHC.50 N-8-32 X .50 SOCKET HD CP 23
41S12SHC.75 N-10-32 X .75 SKT HEAD C 2
43SPR48 A SPRING, EXT 3/4" O.D.27LB 1
61-07-37035 A DRIVE CHAIN ASSY AT30 1
43CHA05 CHAIN, #35 RLR - 10 FT 10
12D1757A62 C PO-CHAIN YOKE 2
62D3798A00 B ASS'Y DRV MTR W/CONNECT #19912 1
31MOT41 MOTOR, DRIVE, 1/8HP, H.S. 1
43OSD01 OVERTORQUE, SAFETY 1
43SPK07 SPROCKET, 35A22, FOR OSD 1
44TIE09 MARKER TIE, 4" 1
49DCT05 Heat Shrnk tub 1/4"(200) 1
51TML04 Terminal female 14-20AWG 4
51TML05 TERMINAL, FEMAL MINIFIT 2
52CTP16 Plug, 4 Pin Molex Intntl. 1
52RCP28 RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN, 1
54M18GRY2 CABLE, 18 AWG, 2 COND. 1
62SW03 A ASSY SWITCH TRAY #19913 1
11D2111A62 D SWITCH MOUNT, AP30/OV33 1
11-07-02646 A PLATE,ROLLER SW . ADAPTOR 4
11D6713A62 B SWITCH MOUNT #12859 1
12D4516A71 B BLOCK SWITCH BRKT MNT 1
12D4517A76 C BLOCK SWITCH BRKT MNT 1
16D2319A00 B HARNESS, MOTOR - POS SWT 1
41-04NLM NSI 4-40 FLEXLOCK METAL 6
41S06PF0.18 6-32X3/16 PFMS 100 S.STL 4
41B08PF0.25 NSI 8-32X.25 FLAT HEAD,100^,BL 2
41S08SHC1.50 N-8-32 x 1.50 Soc hd Cp 2
41S08PF0.37 N-8-32X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 2
41-08WLS NSI #8 SPLIT LOCK WASHER 2
41-08NLN NSI 8-32 LOCKNUT NYLON 1
41S04PF0.37 4-40X3/8 PHIL FLAT 100^ 1
41S04PPS.31 SCREWPHILPANHD 4-40X31 8
44TIE08 NSI Cable Tie, UV, 4" 6
55SW157 SWITCH, TIMING (SHUTTER) 4
12D1750A62 E PO-SLIDE 1
12D1751A07 C MAC-THREADED ROD #19908 1
12D1753A00 D PO-IDLER SPROCKET #19907 3
12D1754A00 D PO-IDLER SHAFT #19371 3
12D1755A00 C MAC-TENSIONER BUSHING #19909 1
12D1996A62 C PO-TENSIONER SPROCKET #19910 1
63D8342A62 A SLIDER ASSY CHAIN WELDMENT 1
12D8342-0 B SLIDER BASE 1
12D8342-1 B SLIDER BASE END TIP 1
62BLO08 ASSY, PSC BLOWER UPPER 2
43CLM01 CABLE CLAMP , 3/8".(200) 2
11-07-0260-71 A COVER MOTOR DRIP AT30 #18155 2
62KLBL02 A KIT, LABELS AP SYSTEM 1
15D5304A00 A LABEL,MAIN OV/AP SYS 1
15D5315A00 A LABEL, REMOTE AP SYS 1
15D5330A00 A LABEL, CABLE, "CTRL"(100) 4
15D5331A00 A LABEL, CABLE "COMM."(20) 4
15D5332A00 A LABEL, CABLE "MEMORY"(50) 2
15D5333A00 A LABEL,CBL "PHOTOCELL"(50) 4
15D5334A00 A LABEL, CABLE "12VDC"(100) 3
15D5337A00 A MIH-LABEL, CABLE "SENSOR" 2
15D5338A00 A LABEL, CBL "COOLING"(10) 2
68D5316A00 A INSTR.INSTL,LABELS,CTL SY
63-07-0922A44 A CABINET, WELDMENT, AT32#20608 1
11-07-0923 REV A BASE CAB WELDMENT ATH32 1
11-07-0924 REV A FRONT PANEL ATH32 CAB 1
11-07-0925L REV A CORNER PANEL CAB WLMNT L 1
11-07-0925R REV A CORNER PANEL CAB WLMNT R 1
11-07-0926L REV A DBL RAIL DRIVE SD ATH32 1
11-07-0926R REV A DOUBLE RAIL RIGHT ATH32 1
11-07-0927 REV A TOP PANEL CAB, ATH32 1
11-07-0928 REV A MOUNT MOTOR AT32 1
11-07-0929 REV A BRACKET END STOP (L) 1
12-07-0929 REV A END STOP (R) ATH32 1
63D7195C07 C FILTER. CLC INLET FILTER 4
72FOM51 FOAM, SHEET (BOTTOM) 1
72FOM52 FOAM, SHEET (TOP) 1
72FOM53 FOAM, SHEET (END) 2
78PLE01 PLASTIC ENVELOPE, 10"X12" 1
81TAP16 DU-TAPE GLIDE (BLK UHMW)
82ADH15 ADHESIVE SPRAY #77 1
11-07-0932L A DUCT, REAR, VERTICAL ATH32 L 1
11-07-0932R A DUCT, REAR, VERTICAL ATH32 R 1
11-07-0933 A PAN, ACCUVAC ATH32 1
11-07-0920L A SLIDING DOOR, ATH32 L 1
11-07-0920R A SLIDING DOOR, ATH32 R 1
62-07-0907 A SHUTTER BLADE ASSY ATH32#20638 1
31CYL111 CYLINDER , .75" BORE 8" STRK 1
43BLB146 LINEAR BALL BEARINGS 4
43SFT18 SHAFT, SS, .375"D, 12"L 2
11-07-0934 A1 BRACKET, GUILLOTINE BLADE 1
11-07-0935 A LOWER LIGHT BLOCK FIXED 1
12-07-0904 A SUMOUNTING BLOCK,BUSHING EXT 2
12-07-0905 A MOUNTING BLOCK, BUSHING ATH32 2
12-07-0906 A MOUNTING BLOCK, SHAFT ATH32 5
12-07-0907 A SUPPORT PLATE,BEARING BLOCK 2
13-07-0901 A SHUTTER BLADE, ATH32 1
43SFT19 SHAFT, SS, .375"D, 18"L 2
65-07-0930 ASSY. BEZEL ATH32 1
15-07-0930 SILKSCREEN OVERLAY, ATH32 1
11-07-0930 A BEZEL, ATH32 1
11-07-0936L A LIGHT BLOCK, TRAY SIDE 2
11-07-0936R A LIGHT BLOCK, TRAY SIDE RIGHT 2
11-07-0931 A BRACKET, CABLE TRACK 2
11-07-0939 A Panel, Rear, Top ATH32 1
11-07-0940 A PANEL, EVAC, ATH32 1
11D6023B07 A STRIP, RIGHT RAIL, ATH30 2
52RCP24 RECEPTACLE, 250V/50A 2
52CTP45 PLUG, NEMA 6-50P 2
11D2133A08 B COVER, PLATE, VACUUM 1
11D2141A02 B PLATE COVER FRONT PANEL #5695 1
11D3374A17 D PANEL, SIDE #8684 2
11D3376A62 C BRACKET, TOP (CTRL. BOX) 2
11D3378A62 D BRACKET, SIDE (CTRL BX)#8687 1
11D3379A62 A1 BRAKET DOOR HOLDER #8688 2
11D3381A17 E PLATE REAR BLWR #8689 1
11D3857A17 D BRACKET #11015 1
11D3984A17 C BOX, ELEC. COOLING MOD #19184 1
11D4176A17 B PCB SENSOR BRKT #12136 1
11D4837A00 B SHIELD #11306 2
11D5377A62 A BRACKET, DOOR SWITCH(LEFT 2
11D5377B62 A BRACKET, DOOR SWITCH(RIGH 2
11D5685A17 B BRKT, E-CHAIN MNT. #12053 2
11D5691A17 B BRKT, HNGE # 12261 1
11D5927A62 D RAMP TRAY POS SWITCH AT #12099 2
11D6001A17 A SUPPORT CBL TRAK #12151 2
11D6023A07 A STRIP, RHT RAIL #12100 2
11D6029A71 A RAMP, POS SWITCH #12604 1
11D6091A71 C FILTER MNT BLOWER #13650 4
11D8564A07 B ASS'Y UPPER COLLECTOR #14980 1
11D9230A44 A COVER, SMALL (CLSD LOOP)#20143 1
11D9231A44 A COVER, LARGE (CLSD LOOP)#20142 1
11D9399A07 A ATH30 AIR DUCT #16368 2
11D9400A07 A ATH30 MANIFOLD AIR DEFL #16369 4
11D9404A44 B BRCKT ATH30 LAMPHEAD LT #20144 2
11-07-0903 A BRACKET , MIRROR MNT , UPPER 4
11-07-0904 A BRACKET , MIRROR MNT , LOWER 4
11D9409A71 A AIR DEFLECTOR #16370 2
11D9415A44 B BRACKET ATH30 UPPER LH#20166 2
11D9434A44 A MOUNTING PLAATE 24V PS#20167 1
11D9435A07 A COVER, 24V PS , ATH30#20168 1
11D9436A44 A CHAIN GUARD, ATH30 #20169 1
11D9438A44 A PLATE TOP REAR ATH30 #20170 1
11D9439A44 A PLATE BOT REAR ATH30 #20171 1
11D9442A44 A PAN BOTTOM ATH30 #20172 1
11D9443A07 A CABLEDUCT BOT-REAR AT30H#20173 1
12D9437A44 A MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE #20174 1
12D9450A44 A LAMPHEAD MOUNTING BAR #20175 2
12D9453A44 A LAMPHEAD MOUNTING BRKT#20176 2
12D9487A63 A BRACKET SHIPPING ATH30 #20177 2
16D2740A00 B CABLE, VAC. PUMP/DELAY #19827 1
16D3794A00 C HARNESS,PCB POWER AP42CL#19828 1
16D9134A00 B CBL, ADAPTOR TXD/RXD TP#19831 1
62-03-100 B AT30 LIGHTFIXTURE5CELL#19832 1
12-03-001 B PO-EXTRUSION CORNER MNT. 2
12-03-005 B PO-1X3 EXTRUSIONAT 2
12-03-006 B PO-1X3 EXTRUSION AT 2
18-03-110 A ACRYLICYELLOWFILTER AT30 1
41SF0SHC1.0 N-1/4-20 X 1.0 SOCKET HDC 20
43NUT03 T-NUT 1/4-20 SINGLE, 10
E11401-143 BRACKET,ANGLE,90~,#22-143 4
62-03-104 A OVERHEAD LIGHTR, AT30 1
32BAL26 BALLAST, ELECTRONIC 4 LMP 1
32BAL27 - BALLAST, ELECT, 2 LAMPS 1
35LMF28 LAMP. FLOUR 25W 36" T8 5
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 20
42HHS8445 NSI Standoff, 8-32x3/4 he 10
43LPE01 LAMP ENDS 10
51FC18-M NSI COUPLER, F/I MALE 18 AWG. 3
51FQ18E NSI Q.D. F/I FML. 22-18, 8
51RI18 NSI RING TERM INS. #8 22-18 1
54CAB05 Cable,Int'l 18 Ga(700) 6
54RED18 Wire, Red 18ag UL1007 3
55SW01 Switch, CW 1
11-03-002 C AT REFLECTOR CELL 5
11-03-101 A LAMPMOUNTINGPLATE 1
44RST05 NSI STRAIN RELIEF, SR5N4 1
42HHS8914 NSI CLAMP, 3/8" O.D. 1/2" W 1
11D9333A70 A BRACKET, ANGLE, TOP LIGHT 2
62D4850A00 A PLUMBING ASSEMBLY #19847 1
43FIT65 1/2" NPT MALE BRANCH "T" 3
43FIT60 FEMALE ELBOW,1/2"NPT 2
43FIT54 BRASS BAR STK FITNG CR3/4 1
43FIT46 REDUCER NIPPLE-MALE 3
43CLM13 HOSE CLAMP 01.5"-2.5" 2
31SOV09 TWO WAY SOLENOID VALVE 3
31SOV09-C240 SOLENOID VALVE COIL 208/240V 3
11D3382A62 C MOUNTING PLATE, PLUMBING 1
62EVAC04 ELEC VAC ASS'Y(DOUBLE)#19928 1
16D6052A17 C CABLE, POS, SW, ACCUTRAY 1
41B06PPS1.25 NSI 6-32 X 1-1/4 PHIL PAN MS B 2
43FIT189 Bushing, Reducing 2
43FIT22 Y UNION 3/8 2
43FIT213 FITTING, ADAPTER,1/4 NPT 2
43FIT214 FITTING, CONNECTOR,STRGHT 2
44WSH08 WASHER, FIBER 6
62D9427 A ASSEMBLY, ELECTRICAL VAC 1
16D6037A05 F CABLE, PCB/RELAYS, 5 FT 1
16D6038B22 A CABLE, SOURCE 24VDC 22" 1
16D6039A13 A CABLE, SOURCE 24VDC 13 FT 1
16D6043A00 C CABLE, I/O/VIDEO, TOP 1
16D6044A00 C CABLE, I/O/VIDEO, BOT 1
16D6046A12 A CABLE, SOURCE, 12VDC 12FT 1
16D6694A00 D CABLE, VAC. SOL., AT 1
16D7168A00 A CABLE, INTERFACE,518 PCB 1
26-3-27 RESISTOR .25 W 1% 2.7 K 6
31MNF09 MANIFOLD 4-1/8NPT OUT 1/4 1
31VLV16 A Valve 5-Way 10-32 Base 2
31VLV26 CHECK VALVE 2
41-04JS.31 JACK SCREW, 4-40X.31 2
41-04WLI #4 LOCKWASHER INT. TOOTH 6
41-04WLS #4 SPLIT LOCK WASHER(150) 4
41B04SHC.25 SCREW SKT HD 4-40X.25 2
41B06PPS1.25 NSI 6-32 X 1-1/4 PHIL PAN MS B 2
41S06WLX Washer Lock Ext Tooth #6 4
41S08PPS.37 N-8-32 x 3/8 PPMS 2
41S12SHC.62 N-10-32 X .62 SKT HEAD C 8
43FIT103 ELBOW, MALE 3/8 ODX1/4NPT 3
43FIT113 Male elbow 1/4T 10-32 4
43FIT127 MALE CONNECTOR 1/2" TUBE 1
43FIT140 10-32 SCREW PLUG 2
43FIT171 COUPLING, SHORT 10-32 2
43FIT188 ADAPTER 1/8 NPT(M)-R1/8(F 8
43FIT193 CONNECTOR,ELBOW R 1/8-6MM 8
43FIT79 PLUG,COUNTERSINK H HD 1/4 2
43FIT80 Union "Y" 1
43FIT83 Male elbow 1
43FIT92 COUNTERSUNK H-HEAD PL 1/8 7
49DCT40 A Wirewy 1x1.5 5
49DCT44 Tubing 1/4" OD. black 20
53CTS68 PLUG, 3.81MM, 20 PINS 2
53CTS69 PLUG, 16 POS. 1
53CTS71 PLUG, 3.81MM, 10 POS 1
53CTS72 PLUG, 7 POS., 3.81MM 1
53CTS75 HEADER,CHASS,16POS,3.81MM 1
54CAB133 CABLE, EXTENSION,DB25,M/F 1
91VAG02 VACUUM GENERATOR P0740-A 1
64PCB-SYS02 A ASSY, PCB, SYSTEM, MAIN #19916 1
16D2621B00 A1 CABLE, TELECOM, 6 PIN 1
64MI441E H J-MAIN PCB BOARD 1
61D4236A00 C FIRMWARE,SYSTEM MASTER 1
15D4235A00 C MIH LABEL SYSTEM MASTER 1
24ME27512 IC, EPROM 512K 1
68D4234A00 C SOFTWARE SYSTEM MASTER
61D4239A00 D FIRMWARE, SYSTEM REMOTE 1
15D4238A00 D MIH LABEL SYSTEM REMOTE 1
24ME27512 IC, EPROM 512K 1
68S4237A00 D SOFTWARE SYSTEM REMOTE
64MI441EV03 B ASSY, PCB, MAIN-AP/OV #19915 1
64IF556V00 B ASSY, PCB, INTERFACE, 1
64MI441E H J-MAIN PCB BOARD 1
26-3-12 RESISTOR .25 W 1% 1.2 K 2
64AX518V00 A ASSY PLC MODULE I/O #19848 1
16D9261A00 A CABLE,POWER,TCHSCREEN #19849 1
11D5957A17 B PCB MNT PANEL # 12098 1
11D5002A70 C BRKT I/O BOARD #14714 1
64PI541V00 B PCB ASSY INTRFACE,PARAL#19542 1
11D5958A17 B PCB CV PNL, #12097 1
62HXL01 B ASSY LOWER HEAT EXCHANGE#19893 1
11D3930A17 C DUCT #9426 1
43FIT51 1" MALE-FEMALE ELBOW 90^ 1
82ADH15 ADHESIVE SPRAY #77
62HXU03 ASSY UPPER HEAT EXCHANGE#19921 1
82ADH15 ADHESIVE SPRAY #77
11D3685B17 B DUCT, INTAKE 1
43FIT41 MANUAL BALL VALVE 1
43FIT58 BUSHING,FEMAL-MALE 1"X.5" 1
43FIT66 NIPPLE,6"LG 1/2"NPT,BRASS 1
68D3433A00 C ASS,Y CLOSED LOOP COOLING MIH
68D3435A00 C ASS'S INSTRUCTION PLUMBING
62KVAC-TMP-01 A KIT, AT-30's Tray Kit-JAD 1
15D4167A00 B LABEL, COOLING CONTROL 1
16D4172A08 C HARNESS,TEMP SENSOR (FEET 1
16D4173A24 A CABLE,RIBBON,20PIN(INCH) 1
16D4805D09 B JUMPER, FLAG .250 BRN 9" 1
16D4805E08 B JUMPER,FLAG,.250 TB BLU8" 1
42HHS9292 NSI 6-32 X .312 Hex Thd S 4
68D7783A00 A WIRING DIA., AT30 SENSOR
68D7785A00 A INSTR. VAC./TEMP AT30
62D7793A00 B KIT, TUBING/FITTING VAC 1
43FIT07 ELBOW, UNION - 3/8 TUBING 4
68D9593A00 KL DIAGRAMPNEUMATIC AT30
64AX501V03 F COOLING CONTROL PCB #19895 1
64AX505V03 A ASSY, PCB TEMP SENSOR #19896 1
64AX650V01 A ASSY PCB 4 VACUUM SNSRS #19898 1
25PRS05 A PRESSUEVACUUMSENSOR 6 PIN 2
64AX650V00 A ASSY PCB 2 VACUUM SNSRS #19897 1
11D4166A02 C COVER #12119 1
62PUM06 ASSYPUMP 220-230V,W/VALV#19906 2
13D2170 A RUBBER WASHER 8
39VAP30 VACUUM PUMP, 230V - 50/60 2
62D9609A00 ASSY VALVE 220VAC VAC PMP 2
31VLV40 VALVE, PNEUMATAIC 220V 2
43FIT103 ELBOW, MALE 3/8 ODX1/4NPT 4
43FIT305 NIPPLE GALVANIZ1/4X2"LONG 2
51TML02 Terminal Female 18-22 AWG 6
51TML08 TERMINAL, MALE 14-20 .093 6
52CTP08 Plug, 3 Pin Molex, .093 Pin 6
52RCP08 Receptacle, 3 Pin 2
11D1633A02 B PLATE, PUMP #14639 2
16D2741A00 A1 CABLE, VAC PUMP #19905 2
12-07-0911 A SPACER STRIP, ACCUTRAC SHAFT 1
65-07-38973 A SILKSCREEN, BEZEL ATH32 1
11-07-32492 A FRONT,CABINET - AT32 BLANK 1
62CPU09 COMPUTER UNIT,W/VIDEO CARD 1
41-04JS.31 JACK SCREW, 4-40X.31 2
69CPU19 DELL, OPTIPLEX 380 1
69KEB04 KEYBORD, MINI 1
69VDC05 VIDEOCAPTURECARDPICOLOALE 1
69VDC06 VIDEOEXTENSIONBOARD 1
360002 ADAPTER CARD, SERIAL COMM 1
63ATT277 GLASS ASSY TOP 2
18ATT277 GLASS TOP, 6MM ATH32 2
12-00689-00 A1 MOD CT-1/8"ELBOW #19327 4
12D8173A00 F BUTTON4 #19442 40
44D8131A00 A CAP #19442 4
63ATB277 GLASS ASSY BOTTOM 2
18ATB277 GLASS BOTTOM, 6MM ATH32 2
12-00689-00 A1 MOD CT-1/8"ELBOW #19327 4
12D8173A00 F BUTTON4 #19442 40
63-F30-39.0-2.88 ASSY FIXED PIN 39.0 MMX2.88OD 2
63-00141-2.88 A ASSY REG PIN 2.88MM 2
44ORNG18 QUAORING 2
12-00535-2.88 I PIN REG AT, 2.88MM DIA 2
12D6213A07 B HUB, REGISTER PIN 2
12D6216A07 B ASSY REG PIN 2.86MM 8
12D6223A67 J PLATE, T-BAR 2
12D8812A71-03 M PIN BLOCK, 39MM 4
63-T30-39.0-2.88 ASSY TENSION PIN 39.0MM 2
41S04WFR N-4-40 WASHER FLAT 8
41SM5SSS.6MM N-Screw, SOCK SET M5x6MM 2
41WSP01 WASHER, SPRING 8
43SPR106 SPRING F=16.99N 2
44ORNG24 O-RING,BUNA-N, 70 SHORE A 2
63-00141-2.88 A ASSY REG PIN 2.88MM 2
44ORNG18 QUAORING 2
12-00535-2.88 I PIN REG AT, 2.88MM DIA 2
12D6213A07 B HUB, REGISTER PIN 2
12D6216A07 B ASSY REG PIN 2.86MM 8
12-00587-39.00 D TENSION PIN BODY-LOWER 2
12D8203A62 C1 PLATE 2
12D8333A07 A DISK 2
12D8334A71 A PIN, PRESSURE 2
12D8336A78 D TENSIONING PIN BODY UPPER 2
12D8344A07 C CYLINDER 2
12D8344B07 C CYLINDER OD= 6.MM X 8.MM LG 2
12D8460A07 B SPRING 2
12D8603A07 A CHG-BOLT, TENSIONING PIN#20575 2
11D6792A00 B REFLECTOR #12856 4
16D9261A00 A CABLE,POWER,TCHSCREEN #19849 1
62-07-0100 B HEPA FILTER ASSY HYBRID #19980 1
11-07-0106 A APH HEPA AIR VALVE 2
12-07-0101 A HEPA FASTEN BRACKET 4
12-07-0102 A HEPA BACK UP BRACKET 4
34CAP06 CAPACITOR 6UF 2
39BLO21 BLOWER, SINGLE INLET 2
41SF0TSK.1.25 SCREW 1/4-20X1.25"L 4
41SF0WFR WAX 42
63-07-0100 C HEPA FILTER ASY #16748 1
11-07-0101 REV.C PRESSURE COVER 1
63-07-0102 REV.C FILTER BASE WELD 1
16GA-4X10 CRS 48 X 120 16 GA (.060)
S-0420-1 NUT CLINCH 1/4- 20 X .056 MIN. 10
63-07-0102-1 REV.C SUPPORT 6
63-07-0101 REV.B COVER WELD 1
16GA-4X12 CRS 48 X 144 16 GA (.059)
11-07-0104 REV.B FILTER WALL RT 1
11-07-0103 REV.B FILTER WALL LT 1
68D9540A00 A WIRING DIA SYS ATH 60HZ
68D9541A00 A HEPA FILTER ASSY HYBRID-MIH
39FLT20 FILTER, HEPA ALUM. 1
39FLT08 FILTER, PANEL 1
41SF0BHX.75 NSI 1/4-20X3/4 HEX HD BOL 34
41SF0NHX N-1/4 X 20 HEX SCR NUT 8
63-00150-00 B CART ASSY POWER SUPPLIES#20192 1
11-00049-00 B SHELF, POWER SUPPLY CART#19481 2
11-00050-00 B BASE, POWER SUPPLY CART #19482 1
11D4025A17 A P/S CLAMP, BRKT #12081 4
41SF0PPS.62 SCREW 1/4-20X.625 PHPANHD 12
41SF0WFR WAX 12
49-00002-00 CASTER, FIXED, 3" 2
49CAS04 Caster, Swivel, 3" w/Brk 2
27. Preventive Maintenance

27.1 Preventive Maintenance Daily (Approximately 15 minutes required)
• Clean exposure frame glass. The exposure frame glass should be kept
meticulously clean. Dirt and resist flakes on these surfaces will cause
exposure defects.
27.2 Preventive Maintenance Monthly (Approximately 1 hour required)

Perform daily maintenance steps plus the following:
Do not use silicone spray lubricants in the printer.
• Lightly oil frame tracks. Lightly oil the upper and the lower exposure
frame tracks every month. Wet a small piece of cloth or paper towel with
a lightweight machine oil and rub it on the linear bearing surface.
Keeping the linear bearings oiled will ensure smooth and quiet
operation.
• Lubricate gas strut mounts. Apply a light coat of oil on the retaining ball
mountings for the gas struts that support the upper half of each exposure
frame.
27.3 Preventive Maintenance Semi-Annually (Approximately 2 hours required)

Perform daily and monthly maintenance steps plus the following:
• Inspect exposure frame vacuum seals for cracks. Cuts or nicks in the
seals could cause vacuum leaks and slow frame evacuation. Replace the
seals as necessary. Replacement procedures are in the Service section of
this manual.
• Clean unit and power supplies. The inner cabinet and power supply areas
should be cleaned to prevent dust buildup.
• Turn the printer off and allow the internal blowers to run through their
cool-down cycle. Disconnect the power and lock it out.
• Open both side cabinet doors. Remove both power supply covers by
removing the two top forward screws and lift the covers up and forward.
Using a vacuum or compressed air, remove all accumulated dust and
debris from the cabinet and the power supplies.
• Clean reflectors and lamp head safety glass. Clean the lamp reflectors
and the safety glass on the upper and lower lamp heads. Refer to the
lamp replacement procedures in the Service section of this manual for
disassembly information.
• Lubricate frame drive chain and check tension.

• Apply a light coat of machine oil to the exposure frame drive chain by
rubbing an oil wetted rag along the chain. Do not wet the chain enough
to cause the oil to run or drip.
• The chain tension adjustment is along the inner left hand side of the nose
section. Turning the adjuster nut clockwise tightens the chain;
counterclockwise loosens it. Adjust the chain to allow no more than a 1
inch (25 mm) flex between the drive motor and the adjuster wheel.
• Lubricate upper and lower light block mechanisms. Apply a light coat of
machine oil to the piano-style hinges on the on the upper and lower light
blocks. Apply a light coat only otherwise excess oil will drip on the
exposure frames during operation.
• Clean vacuum pump filters. Remove and clean the filters in each vacuum
pump. Replace the filter if plugged with debris. Refer to “Vacuum
System” in the Service section of this manual for more detailed
information.
27.4 OPTICS CLEANING (ATH30/32)

The Collimated Exposure System should be installed in a clean room, with the cleanliness level maintained at
class 10,000 or lower. All personnel using the equipment should strive to maintain that cleanliness level.
If any chemicals, such as chlorothanes, trichloroethylene, solvents, inks, ammonia, or any acids are found in the
area of the ATH30 Exposure System, these special precaution are necessary as these chemicals can damage the
coated surfaces of the optics; i.e., the mirrors, the collectors, etc. Air from other working areas containing fumes
of these chemicals must not be used for cooling and re-circulation. The fumes as well as direct contact with the
chemicals will attack the surface coatings of the optics.
The dichroic mirror, integrator, beam-splitter, and collimator mirrors should be cleaned as seldom and as little as
possible. The sensitive surface coatings of these precision optical devices can be easily damaged during cleaning.
Therefore, cleaning should be held to a minimum. If proper cleanliness is maintained and checked periodically
minor dust particles or other accumulations on the optical surfaces can be removed by blowing clean, dry
nitrogen gas or filtered air across the optical surfaces. If dirt or contamination is not removed by blowing,
proceed as follows:
During cleaning, all electrical power must be O FF. Make sure that the Main
Line Disconnect switch is O FF.
Finger prints have oils and acids in them, and will etch any mirrored surface.
Remove any finger prints as soon as possible.
a. Place a clean cloth or a small container under the mirror or glass to be cleaned, and rinse the mirrored
surface with a solution of isopropyl alcohol and de-ionized water (use a 50:50 mix of alcohol and water).
Remove all loose dirt and dust.
NO TE - Isopropyl alcohol and de-ionized water shall be analytical reagent grade.
b. Wait a few seconds, and rinse again to remove any dissolved dirt or dust.
NO TE - Do not use lens tissue to dry the collimator mirrors in the top and bottom of the exposure
cabinet. Blow-dry the collimator mirrors with dry nitrogen gas or clean, moisture-free compressed air.
Refer to the SAFETY SUMMARY at the beginning of this manual for the precautions to be taken before
performing any maintenance or repair procedures.
27.5 FILTER REPLACEMENT

The two separate pneumatic systems of the ATH30 use disposable filters. Each should be changed every six
months to a year, depending upon use.
27.6 VACUUM/PRESSURE LINE REPLACEMENT

If any accessible vacuum or pressure line is broken or leaking, replace the complete line with a new length of
tubing; use the same size, type, and color as the original tubing to insure proper operation of the pneumatic
systems of ATH30. Do not attempt to patch vacuum/pressure tubing.
28. Warranty
STATEMENT OF WARRANTY
OLEC Products by FABCON are guaranteed to be free from defects in material and defective components for six (6) months from date of shipment, with exclusions
defined in Appendix 1
A) Used, Rebuilt, Re-Conditioned assemblies of FABCON manufacture are guaranteed for a period of three (3) months from date of shipment.
B) FABCON will correct defects in materials, which may develop under proper care and normal operating conditions or at FABCON's option replace or repair the defective
parts affected under the terms set herein.
C) In no event shall FABCON be liable for any damages whether direct, indirect, immediately foreseeable, consequential or special arising out of component failure due to
defective material supplied. FABCON shall not be liable for any expenses or lost production incurred by the purchaser through the failure of components and/or parts
manufactured by FABCON. The sole responsibility of FABCON is to repair and/or replace the defective parts.
D) Any verbal statements made by FABCON, the seller or any other parties regarding product suitability, reliability or longevity do not constitute warranties and shall not be
relied upon by the user and are not part of the sale.
E) FABCON reserves the right to substitute parts or material of comparable quality for direct replacement in FABCON equipment.
F) Components received under warranty from FABCON are for immediate replacement only. Defective material subject to credit must be returned to FABCON within 30
days after receipt of material.
G) FABCON will make every effort to replace the defective components as quickly as possible however, replacement material (and related shipping charges) purchased
locally by the customer will not be subject to reimbursement unless prior written authorization is obtained from FABCON In no event will customer or any other third party
perform any repair work on FABCON equipment without written authorization by FABCON. This would immediately void the warranty.
H) Evidence of misuse, abuse or neglect to the equipment will invalidate warranty.
I) FABCON is not responsible for the placement or operation of outside service connections made to the equipment. This includes but is not limited to electrical connection,
exhaust venting connections, water and air conditioning connection.
J) Any work, such as but not limited to, operation, modification, repair, service or maintenance performed on FABCON products by persons not trained and authorized by
FABCON will invalidate the Warranty. Any such determination will be at FABCON's sole discretion. Warranty is not transferable.
LAMP WARRANTY
K) Should any original Lamp fail prematurely when used in OLEC products, it should be returned promptly to FABCON, prepaid. It should be accompanied by proof of
purchase, explanation of the type of failure incurred, and the approximate useful life of the lamp prior to failure. If it is determined by FABCON that the failure or shortened
life has been caused by faulty material or workmanship, full or partial replacement will be extended to the Buyer. IMPORTANT: The use of any lamp, other than those
purchased or approved by FABCON will void this Warranty.
SHIPPING POLICY
L) FABCON will prepay via ground transportation within the continental United States and Economical air for International shipments for replacement parts under warranty
for the first 30 days. FABCON reserves the right to select the shipment method to expedite arrival at the customer's location.
M) In no event shall FABCON be liable for any damages arising from shipment delay or stock availability.
O) The customer will be responsible for any freight and handling charges if special shipping or services are requested.
P) Customer will issue a purchase order to FABCON for the replacement parts and FABCON will assign a return material authorization (RMA) number to customer and
ship the parts. Customer will return of defective or damaged material via prepaid freight for the purpose of evaluation, and credit. Should such parts not be returned within
30 days, FABCON reserves the right to bill and collect the cost of such replacement parts from the customer.
APPENDIX 1
Product parts and any product replacement parts of FABCON manufacture are guaranteed to be free from defects in material for a period listed below from the date of
shipment. There are no implied warranties of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose other than direct replacement for original equipment. It is the customer's
responsibility to pursue the warranty with other manufactures beyond FABCON's warranty.
1) Rubber, felt pads, drive rollers ... 90 day warranty 2) InkJet Heads Manufacturers warranty
3) Doctor blades, conveyor belts… 90 day warranty 4) Spare Parts 90 days warranty
5) Glass (bubbles only) 30 day warranty 6) Electrical Components 90 day warranty

Accutray At30

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accutray At30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Circuit Imaging System

Models AT30, ATH30, ATH32

= Risk of injury and/or property damage.

Note: = Special information regarding efficient use of the Exposure Station.

Report any malfunction or irregularity in operation to supervisor!

Service must be performed by authorized personnel

Never disable or disconnect electrical interlock safety

1.5 Operating Safety

1.6 The Nature of Light

Wavelength in nano-meters Wavelength in nano-meters

Relative Intensity L1280 Relative Intensity L1252, L1282

Wavelength in nano-meters Wavelength in nano-meters

1.8 Maintenance and Service

When it becomes necessary to replace a lamp or to remove

the transom the power line must be disconnected. Remove

Only authorized personnel must perform repair service!

Never disable or disconnect electrical interlock safety

Only original OLEC replacement lamps must be used!

with corner tooling systems.

2.3 Theory of Operation

(a) Non-tooled inner-layer and chemical machining registration

(b) Outer-layer Registration

(c) Fiducial Registration

The image shows a miniature camera with the illuminator enabled.

NEED NEW PICTURE

(d) Combination registration

Front to back registration targets

Bottom film Top film All

Outerlayer registration targets

The lower film has a cross pattern. The upper

2.6 Panel Registration Tooling

2.7 Quality Control Tool

and become a strong tool to implement and measure process improvement.

(a) Shim thickness

(c) Air Flow

2.10 Statistical registration option

to improve outerlayer registration. The Statistical-

An additional benefit of the Statistical-

2.12 Hybrid Collimation

Hybrid Light Source Orientation Hybrid Upper Mirror

Hybrid Lower Mirror Hybrid Exposure

92"/2337mm with C/L

102" 60" 80"

2590 mm 1524 mm 2032 mm

3.3 Shipping Weight

Uncrated 1500 lbs. 681 kg.

3.4 Actual Dimensions

Length Width Height

92" 48.5" 72"

2337 mm 1232 mm 1829mm

3.5 Effective Exposure Frame Area

Depth: 24" 610 mm

3.7 Exposure Light Source

3.9 Registration System

3.10 Glass Tooling

3.11 Temperature Control

3.12 General Points

3.14 Typical Room Requirements

Front TOP VIEW

3.16 Sample AccuTray Glass Tool Layout

Remove inside packing and strapping material before operating

4.2 Remove Packaging materials

6. Remove shipping material and protective cover from glass surface.